Home

Silicon Laboratories SI2494/39 User's Manual

Contents

1. Register Address Name Description Default U1B5 0x01B5 SRXFIR1 0x0000 U1B6 0x01B6 SRXFIR2 0x0000 U1B7 0x01B7 SRXFIR3 0x0000 U1B8 0x01B8 SRXFIR4 0x0000 U1B9 0x01B9 SRXFIR5 0x0000 U1BA 0x01BA SRXFIRG 0x0000 U1BB 0x01BB SRXFIR7 0x0000 U1BC 0x01BC SRXFIR8 0x0000 U1BD 0x01BD SRXFIR9 0x0000 U1BE 0 01 SRXFIR10 0 4000 U1BF Ox01BF SRXFIR11 Speakerphone RX FIR Filter Coefficients 0x0000 U1CO 0 01 0 SRXFIR12 0x0000 U1C1 0x01C1 SRXFIR13 0x0000 U1C2 0x01C2 SRXFIR14 0x0000 U1C3 0x01C3 SRXFIR15 0x0000 0164 0x01C4 SRXFIR16 0x0000 U1C5 0x01C5 SRXFIR17 0x0000 U1C6 0x01C6 SRXFIR18 0x0000 U1C7 0x01C7 SRXFIR19 0x0000 U1C8 0x01C8 SRXFIR20 0x0000 U1C9 0x01C9 SRXFIR21 0x0000 U1CD 0x01CD LECHLEN LEC Filter Length 0x0020 U1CE 0x01CE LECDLY Adjustable Delay 0 002 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 185 AN93 Table 115 U199 and U19E Register Bit Maps Reg Name Bits Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bit 0 15 9 4 5 U199 VPCTRL SSP_LOCTALK SSP_PTT 55 FLAG MMUTE SPCAL SMUTE U19E SPKREF MICREF The SMUTE bit 0199 1 mutes the speaker output audio path The bit should be cleared for normal speakerphone operation For recording during hands free TAM the bit should be set to mute the speaker outpu
2. C27 C26 Y1 0 Traces pad sites and vias enclosed in box are in the DAA Section and must be separated XTALI 1 from all other circuits by 5 mm XTALO 52 Q5 pm 5 DDB ES 12 K 14 C4 62 Note Do NOT use ferrite beads in place of R12 and R13 Note Encircled references are described in the numbered paragraphs in Appendix A This is not a complete schematic Only critical component placement and nets are drawn Figure 21 Illustrated Layout Guidelines 4 4 1 ISOmodem Layout Check List Table 34 is a checklist that the designer can use during the layout process to ensure that all the recommendations in this application note have been implemented Additionally Figure 21 provides an annotated diagram of all relevant layout guidelines for the 513054 CNR AMR ACR applications See 10 4 2 Safety on page 254 for information about design for safety compliance Table 34 Layout Checklist P Layout Items Required 1 U1 and U2 are placed so that pins 9 16 of U1 are facing pins 1 8 of U2 C1 and C2 are placed directly between U1 and U2 2 Place U1 U2 C1 and C2 so that the recommended minimum creepage spacing for the target application is implemented R12 and R13 should be close
3. 123 5 9 3 Escape Pin u uu EAE 123 5 10 Data GOmpression n seu sco gay She ee ea 124 511 Error Correction eR oed cu ecd a E dob aad p a rur 124 5 12 Wire Mode vee ied sss ele Speed bus 124 5 13 EPOS Electronic Point of Sale Applications 125 5 13 12 EPOS Fast Connect sehe pete didus 125 2 13 2 V29 entum D tt ye Ooi ea che UR 125 5 14 Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode V 80 Synchronous Access Mode 125 5 15 V 80 Mode EET Ce A IS Eu aloud ots 125 6 Programming Examples 132 6 1 Quick Reference oss deus E RE Ope teat pus ia de ee qt 132 6 2 Country Dependent Setup 133 DC Termination s Duo EE ca teca Ron bios 133 6 2 2 Country 134 6 2 2 1 Country Initialization 134 6 2 2 2 Country Setting Register Tables 145 6 2 2 3 Special Requirements for India 146 6 2 2 4 Special Requirements
4. 19 2 2 3 UART Interface Operation 19 UYAR FOPIN S trcs meds mee a set Caps 23 19 2 2 8 2 e S ra 20 2 2 3 3 0 series brem u u ee en Edu d 21 2 2 4 Parallel and SPI Interface Operation 23 2 2 4 1 Hardware Interface Register 0 25 2 2 4 2 Hardware Interface Register 1 25 2 2 4 3 Parallel Interface 26 2244 SPI Interface 28 2 2 4 5 Interface Communication 28 2 3 Isolation Capacitor Interface 29 2 4 LowsPower Mod 27444442 5655 Deut FRE RP e EQ DDR PUE DR 29 2 41 Power Dowm taeda beets 29 2 42 Wake on Ring 29 243 Sleep WOU s hoo otis Dro us aee eser 2 CE 29 2 5 551 Mode 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 QFN Only 30 2 6 EEPROM Interface 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN 31 2 6 1 Supported EEPROM
5. Numeric Meaning Verbal Response X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 32 UK CID State Tone Alert STAS X X X X X X Signal detected 33 Overcurrent condition xo X X X X X x Blacklist is full BLACKLIST FULL enabled X X X X X X 40 via S42 register Attempted number is black BLACKLISTED enabledvia X X X X X X 41 listed S42 register 42 No phone line present NO LINE enabled via Vn X X X X X X commands 43 Telephone line is in use LINE IN USE enabled via X X X X X X n commands Polarity reversal detected POLARITY REVERSAL X X X X X X 44 e enabled via G modifier 45 Polarity reversal NOT NO POLARITY REVERSAL X X X X X X detected enabled via G modifier 52 Link established at 56000 CONNECT 560008 X X X X X 60 Link established at 32000 CONNECT 320008 X X X X X 61 Link established at 48000 CONNECT 480008 X X X X X 63 Link established at 28000 CONNECT 280008 X X X X X 64 Link established at 29333 CONNECT 293338 X X X X X 65 Link established at 30666 CONNECT 306666 X X X X X 66 Link established at 33333 CONNECT 333338 X X X X X 67 Link established at 34666 CONNECT 346666 X X X X X 68 Link established at 36000 CONNECT 360008 X X X X X 69 Link established at 37333 CONNECT 373338 X X X X X 70 No protocol PROTOCOL NONE Set with W0 command 75 Link established at 75 CONNECT 75 X X X X X 77 V 42 protocol PROTOCOL V427 Set with W0 command 79 V 42bis protocol PROTOCOL V42bis Set with W0 command Notes
6. Command Hex i nd Supported Transmit Direction Receive Direction in Framed Indicator pair Code Transparent Submode Submode Detected a non flag to flag lt EM gt lt err gt OxB2 Transmit an Abort Transition Yes Preceding data are not a valid frame lt EM gt lt under gt 0 4 applicable lt EM gt lt tover gt 0 5 applicable are Transmit Yes Yes lt EM gt lt rover gt 0 6 not applicable e Resume after a data lt EM gt lt resume OxB7 underrun or overrun Not applicable Yes gt applicable if ESA C 1 lt octnum0 gt lt octnum1 gt speci fies lt EM gt lt bnum gt 0 8 applicable number of octets in the trans Yes Yes mit data buffer if ITF C is non zero2 lt octnum0 gt lt octnum1 gt speci fies number of discarded octets fol lowing lt EM gt lt unum gt 0 9 not applicable a data overrun underrun after the lt EM gt lt resume gt command This is applicable if ESA C 12 Terminate carier Tetumio Loss of carrier detected return lt EM gt lt eot gt OxBA to Yes Yes command mode command mode Escape to On Line com Confirmation of Escape to On lt EM gt lt ecs gt OxBB mand Line Yes Yes mode command mode lt EM gt lt rrn gt 0xBC rate renegotia indicate rate renegotiation Yes Yes 128 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS
7. d 200 201 w 202 1 Y CONNECTn CONNECT CONNECT n 1or2 Data received N _ Data received from Host fomHost lt NR 200 Nt uf Receive message b ff 27 send to Host v 80 bits of mark 300 bits channel j 1 seizure alternating 1 s amp OK 05 Host sends messa ge followed n by 150 ms of silence then ESC 30 bits of mark Host sends message followed E 2 by 150 ms of Send Marks Command silence then ESC 3 Mode i Send Marks Implicit FRM Figure 39 SMS Process in Host and Modem e Rev 1 3 241 SILICON LABS AN93 10 Testing and Diagnostics 10 1 Prototype Bring Up Si3018 10 10 1 1 Introduction This section provides tips for the debugging of initial prototypes Although most ISOmodem prototype designs function as expected there is the potential for layout errors omitted or incorrect components used in the initial assembly run and host software problems If the prototype modem does not function correctly the techniques outlined in this guide will help quickly isolate the problem and get the prototype functioning correctly A functional ISOModem evaluation board and data sheet and a computer with HyperTerminal are required for some of the troubleshooting steps I
8. VLS Mode Primitive Description VTX 4VSP VTS 0 None On Hook Ring CID1 Voice mode is disabled TAM operation for call answer with OGM playback 1 T Off Hook FDV DTMF__and record message using RS232 DAA RS232 2Tones DTE voice stream pass gt DAA gt RS232 gt DAA through with no audio moni toring using Si3000 Await call Use VTX for RS232 RS232 5 OrrHook Ming GIDI melody playback via AOUT gt AOUT gt Place call with audio call 5 ST Off Hook FDV progress on AOUT VTS RS232 DAA RS232 2Tones tone signal can be heard at gt DAA gt RS232 gt DAA AOUT via DAA echo back Speakerphone operation Use VSP 1 to enable AEC LEC and speaker phone FIR filters without side tone gain Only CID2 CID2 detector is active RS232 Si3000 lt gt DAA 13 M1S1T Off Hook FDV DTMF oTones Handset operation Use gt DAA RS232 VSP 0 for handset opera gt Si3000 tion with handset FIR filters and side tone gain All the detectors are active Same as VLS 15 without TAM operation Ring CID1 TAM operation for OGM DAA record and OGM message RS232 gt RS232 i i peti playback via DTE voice Si3000 513000 stream pass through gt RS232 Handset voice calls over Si3000 lt gt DAA path CID2 TAM operation for call RS232 DAA RS232 i DAA gt RS232 gt DAA 15 HT Off Hook EDV answer wit
9. 200 7 6 Telephone Answering Machine 201 13 52 OVerVIiSW PDC rrr 201 7 6 2 TAM lt 201 7 6 21 Record OGM at usa Cosas A a ath as ANd 202 702 2 REVIEW OGM eid uos bred itas 203 7 6 2 3 Record Local u c Eo rete ure me ats 203 6 2 4 Review ICM dnd pe REIP ROO 203 7 6 2 5 Speakerphone 203 7 6 2 6 Handset 5 203 7 60 27 TAM Handset a 5 203 7 69 Record OGM cot anne u eu ene EA a Qs 203 7 6 3 2 Review OGM urere e ated ime a ee 206 7 0 3 3 66010 068 TOM eee 208 7 0 3 4 Review IGM bout an 208 TAM PSTN as aska ubuta Mora a wis 208 7 6 4 1 Normal Answer OGM Playback with ICM Record 208 7 6 4 2 Interrupted Answer OGM Playback with Menu Entry 210 7 6 4 3 Speakerphone 212 7 6 4 4 Handset Transitions e em tee Peor ee eder doe Fo cedes 212 Yr Speakerphones da qusa u lu
10. hess ea ek Che theo hos 169 6 10 Pulse Tone Dial Decision 169 6 10 1 Method 1 Multiple Off Hook Transitions 169 6 10 2 Method 2 Single Off Hook Transition 170 6 10 3 Method 3 Adaptive 170 6 10 4 Automatic Phone Line Configuration Detection 170 6 10 5 Line Type Determination 170 6 11 Telephone Voting Mode 171 VOZ QUICK adds eT a 171 7 Handset TAM and Speakerphone Operation 173 7 1 Software Reference 173 Z2 AT Command Seb Deos s C os Oh eod ut Aus 173 7 1 2 Extended Commands 173 7 1 3 lt DLE gt Commands DTE to DCE 178 7 1 4 lt DLE gt Events DCE to DTE 179 7 1 4 1 Simple Event Reporting 179 7 1 4 2 Complex Event Reporting 181 A 523 LROOISIBESs Eo m UT Pu E a 181 7 2 Voice Reference Overview 187 7 3 51
11. 224 8 1 1 1 Listen In and V channel Periods Voice Pass Through 224 8 1 1 2 Inserting a V 32bis period e g SIA Level 3 Video Block Support 224 8 1 1 3 Considerations when Disconnecting the Session 225 8 2 Implementing the Ademco Contact ID 228 8 2 1 Modem Specific Implementation Details 229 8 2 1 1 Handshake Tone 230 8 2 1 2 Session 230 Rev 1 3 7 SILICON LABS AN93 9 Chinese ePOS SMS ies vn yk ea or Rache d a add lan Von 234 9 1 u asi EN T bu UE RE eR 234 9 2 SMS AT Gommarid Set e RUBROS 235 9 2 1 SMS User Registers soo desde dE 236 9 2 23 RIOCOGUIG in tk tee Da he deut Dal su s LA E 237 9 2 2 1 ue uel Q ka hal 237 RESPONSE knobs PANE EE ed us 238 9 2 2 9 RESPONSE 2 pont Felt V ea p SpA S s 238 9 2 2 4 RESPONSES cos od ki Rio baile ade dol eer wisi s E 238 9 3 Example Session A OC ari ee 239 10 Testing and Diagnostics
12. 31 2 6 2 Three Wire SPI Interface to 33 2 6 3 Detailed EEPROM 33 2 6 4 Boot Commands Custom 5 33 2 6 5 AT Command Macros Customized AT 34 2 6 6 Firmware Upgrades 34 2 6 6 1 Boot Command 34 Rev 1 3 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 6 6 2 AT Command Macro Example 35 2 6 6 3 Autoloading Firmware Upgrade Example 35 2 6 6 4 Combination Example 36 3 DAA LIne Side Device eee me es E 38 3 1 Hookswitch and DC Termination 38 do os E orent beh ey 39 3 3 Ringer Impedance and Threshold 39 3 4 Pulse Dialing and Spark Quenching 39 3 5 Line Voltage and Loop Current Sensing 39 3 6 Legacy Mode Line Voltage and Loop Current 42 9 2 Billing u u l ee eee ETE I RC Weir oos 42 4 Hardware Design Reference
13. Data Meaning 19 B2 A 1 bit error is received in an HDLC flag The modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by modem Beginning of Packet 30 93 Good Packet 19 B1 Beginning of Packet 19 B2 A 1 bit error is received in an HDLC flag The modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by modem Beginning of Packet 30 93 Good Packet 19 B1 Beginning of Packet 19 B2 A 1 bit error received in an HDLC flag The modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by modem Beginning of Packet 19 B2 A 1 bit error received in an HDLC flag The modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by modem Beginning of Packet B6 9E F7 46 Spurious data 19 BO Followed by a data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC Flag detected Beginning of Packet 29 C6 Spurious data 19 BO Followed by a data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC Flag detected Beginning of Packet FF 98 89 18 Spurious data 19 BO Data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags SILICON LABS Re v 1 3 167 AN93 Table 104 Bit Errors Continued
14. 242 10 1 dude Bring Up 513018 10 iode l Ea one he qo dex 242 12410 0 2 au 5 u tans ten hi ua 242 10 1 2 Visual Ins pectin Ud RE Pi tend e oe A Neo 242 10 1 3 Basic Troubleshooting Steps 242 10 1 4 Host Interface Troubleshooting 243 10 1 5 Isolation Capacitor 0 244 10 1 6 Si3018 10 Troubleshootliig oz RR RR RE Re 244 10 1 7 Component Troubleshooting 244 10 2 Sef TeSt FTT 249 10 3 Board Test Cu a ID UM AM E nis 250 10 4 Compliance Testing soa er Dosen EE valebit a Ero e 252 TO defe EMI t sis ua Z pa dese 253 10 52 Sally mae See Dayu mu eet amu a adio rut 254 oe elec 254 10 5 AM Band Interference ES thier eR iad Seba ees 255 10 6 Debugging the DTE interface 256 Appendix A EPOS Applications 257 MEN ZE EU ESPERE E Edi LE 257 Recommendation V BD si ERG RR E RU 258 The
15. 43 231 Component FUNCIONS 2 52230 0 DP RE NATU etes tse ust 43 4 1 1 Power Supply and Bias Circuitry 43 4 1 2 Hookswitch and DC Termination 43 4 9 COCKS ELM d E sun me M CR fai A S M AIT 43 4 1 4 Ringer NetWork uu ao A nc M suu aor e Gt luas eom di 44 4 1 5 Optional Billing Tone 44 2 2 a bu ha au bead mu dee hti nes S t UR 47 423 6 2 o muet eed t E Bei mean d doc 48 AA 5 x e dicm s titt ene Mou eM 49 4 4 1 ISOmodem Layout Check 51 4 4 2 Module Design and Application 53 4 4 2 1 Module 5 0 53 4 4 2 2 Motherboard Design 53 4 5 Analog ace eee Shoat u 54 4 5 1 Interaction between the AOUT Circuit and the Required Modem Reset Time 54 2 5 2 Audio Quality sas ua Eni 55 5 Modem Reference Guide 56 5 1 COnlroller ESAME e
16. Type R W Reset settings 0x0000 Bit Name Function 15 5 Reserved Read returns zero 4 COMP 0 Disables compression PCM mode 1 Enables linear compression 3 1 Reserved 0 PRT 0 Disables PCM mode 1 Enables PCM mode U76 provides control for parallel phone detect PPD intrusion parameters including the off hook sample rate 5 absolute current level with modem off hook ACL ACL update from LVCS FACL and the difference in current between ACL and LVCS that triggers an off hook intrusion detection DCL All bits in U76 are read write see Table 74 OHSR 15 9 sets the off hook loop current sampling interval for intrusion algorithms in 40 ms units The default value is 25 1 s The minimum recommended value is 5 200 ms The interval can be adjusted to much lower values however the likelihood of false intrusion detections increases sharply with intervals of less than 520 ms Bit 8 FACL If FACL 0 default the ACL register is automatically updated to the value at the sampling interval determined by OHSR This feature is used to ensure the ACL value is continuously updated Updating ACL allows host software to determine the loop current value returned in ACL provided the modem is off hook longer than the time defined by U77 IST Loop current on a particular line can vary over time due to a variety of factors including temperature and weat
17. Register Name Description Default U52 XMTL Transmit level adjust 1 dB units 0x0000 1 3 105 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 14 U53 Modem Control Register 2 U53 MOD2 is a bit mapped register with all bits except bit 15 reserved see Table 61 The AT amp H11 command sets the V 23 1200 75 bps mode Bit 15 REV is used to enable V 23 reversing This bit is set to 0 disable reversing by default Setting this bit to 1 enables reversing transmit and receive speeds Reversing is initiated by the modem in the origination mode low speed TX and high speed RX U53 resets to 0x0000 with a power on or manual reset 5 7 15 U54 Calibration Timing Register U54 CALT sets the time between off hook and DAA calibration if timed calibration is enabled with the TCAL bit U7D bit 12 The OHCT bits 15 8 control this timing in 32 ms units 5 7 16 U62 U66 DAA Control Registers 062 DAAC1 is a bit mapped register with only bits 1 2 and 8 available All other bits in this register are reserved and must be set according to Table 63 U62 resets to 0x0804 with a power on or manual reset Bit 1 DL 2 1 or 0 causes digital loopback to occur beyond the isolation capacitor interface out to and including the analog hybrid circuit Setting bit 1 high enables digital loopback across the isolation barrier only This setting is used in conjunction with the AT amp H and AT amp T3 commands DL must be set low for normal o
18. 8012 21 6 kbps max amp G13 24 kbps max amp G14 26 4 kbps max amp G15 28 8 kbps max amp G16 31 2 kbps max amp G17 33 6 kbps max default for Si2457 transmit and Si2434 amp Hn Switched network handshake mode amp Hn commands must be on a separate command line from ATD ATA or ATO commands amp HO V 90 with automatic fallback 56 kbps to 300 bps default for 512457 Notes 1 The initial number attempted to test for an outside line is controlled by S51 default 1 2 AT amp reflects the last AT amp P command issued but does not reflect any subsequent changes made by writing U registers with AT U Rev 1 3 77 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 40 Extended AT amp Command Set Continued amp H1 V 90 only 56 kbps to 28 kbps amp H2 V 34 with automatic fallback 33 6 kbps to 300 bps default for Si2434 amp H3 V 34 only 33 6 kbps to 2400 bps amp H4 ITU T V 32bis with automatic fallback 14 4 kbps to 300 bps default for Si2415 amp H5 ITU T V 32bis only 14 4 kbps to 4800 bps amp H6 ITU T V 22bis only 2400 bps or 1200 bps default for Si2404 amp H7 ITU T V 22 only 1200 bps amp H8 Bell 212 only 1200 bps amp H9 Bell 103 only 300 bps amp H10 ITU T V 21 only 300 bps amp H11 V 23 1200 75 bps amp H12 V 92 with automatic fallback default for Si2493 amp Pn Japan pulse dialing
19. Data Meaning 19 B2 HDLC Flag detected Beginning of Packet 92 6E EF 14 65 Spurious data 19 Data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC Flag detected Beginning of Packet DA BE C6 07 EA D8 31 C2 05 FA 86 C4 Spurious data 40 E6 19 0 Transparency code represents 0x11 data byte found in receive data CA EA A8 F9 Spurious data 19 B2 Calculated CRC not equal FCS The modem assumes this is a bad Frame Beginning of Packet 8D 00 57 A5 43 29 Spurious data 19 BO Followed by a data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC Flag detected Beginning of Packet 05 CB 14 9F 7C 2D Spurious data 19 BO Followed by a data byte with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem looks for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC Flag Detected 19 B2 If there is 1 bit error received in an HDLC flag the modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by the modem 19 BA Loss of Carrier Detected OD OA 4E 4F 20 43 41 52 52 49 45 52 OD NO CARRIER 168 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 The following steps will allow the spurious data and bit errors to be eliminated while preserving the valid data 1 Ignore 19 BO 2 Use 19 B2 to discard all collected receive data The filtered version of the HDLC frames based on this algorithm is shown below with the valid data in bold OD OA 43 4E 45 43 54 20 31
20. A 2767 000000 mK 7522 0380 0 10 529 av 0 93 seconds 5501 3Hz 0 35 309 d 7 I I I d I t I DTMF dialing 1 Answer Tone 7 7 4 1 1 2225 or 2100 Hz Calling modem sends Modem exchange packets V 29 Calling training patterns and Tone 980 Hz Answering modem packet s sends training pat terns and packet s Figure 68 Appearance of V 29 FastPOS Protocol Rev 1 3 285 SILICON LABS AN93 A V 22 bis server with unpredictable and undesirable gaps during the USB1 signal A V 22 bis server with a 2225 answer tone instead of 2100 Hz e File Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help usb1 gap test patch 48 OK V34 0805700601 wav Adobe Au Begin Length Sel 0 14 920 0 00 000 View 0 00 000 0 18 983 gt Lise on e M e 0 14 920 dB 69 56 63 40 57 54 5 Eo 3 23 27 25 21 8 15 4 0 Completed in 0 05 seconds EE 011 129 8000 16bit Mono 296 2445GBfre lt Untitled Adobe Audition IX few Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help TPE a Ts s MES E E Es o Le n S Mn 5 E E ae pis DEE altitud i Length 0 00 000 3 0 15 476 Figure 69 Examples of EPOS Server Misbehavior 286 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 s examples of high TX wav Adobe Audition
21. 5 and MR cannot be appended to They must be the last command in a string The command 9 must be on a line of its own Consecutive U registers can be written in a single command as AT Uhh xxxx yyyy zzzz where hh is the first U register address in the three register consecutive series This command writes a value of xxxx to Uhh yyyy to Uhh 1 and zzzz to Uhh 2 Additional consecutive values may be written up to the 48 character limit 58 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 38 Consecutive U Register Writes on a Single Line Command Result AT U00 0078 67EF C4FA 0 0078 written to Ox67EF written to 001 OxC4FA written to U02 Caution Some U register addresses are reserved for internal use and hidden from the user Consequently there are gaps in the addresses of available U registers Writing to reserved registers can cause unpredictable results Care must therefore be taken not to write to reserved or undefined register locations This is especially likely when writing to consecutive U register addresses all addresses covered by a conscutive write operation must be defined and allowed to the user The AT command execution time is as long as 300 ms The host must wait for a response after each command e g OK before issuing additional commands The reset recovery time the time between a hardware reset or the carriage return of an ATZ command and the time the next AT command
22. SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 AN93 Table 3 Carriers and Tones Specification Transmit Carrier Receive Carrier Answer Carrier Detect Acquire Hz Hz Tone Hz Release V 92 Variable Variable per ITU T V 92 V 90 Variable Variable per ITU T V 90 V 34 Variable Variable per ITU T V 34 V 32bis 1800 1800 2100 per ITU T V 32bis V 32 1800 1800 2100 per ITU T V 32 V 29 1700 1700 per ITU T V 29 V 22bis V 22 1200 2400 2100 43 dBm 48 dBm Originate answer 2400 1200 43 dBm 48 dBm V 21 1180 980 1850 1650 2100 43 dBm 48 dBm Originate answer M S 1850 1650 1180 980 43 dBm 48 dBm Bell 212A 1200 2400 2225 43 dBm 48 dBm Originate answer 2400 1200 43 dBm 48 dBm Bell 103 1270 1070 2225 2025 2225 43 dBm 48 dBm Originate answer M S 2225 2025 1270 1070 43 dBm 48 dBm Table 4 ISOmodem Capabilities 1 Die Revision D or later 2 The EEPROM interface option is available only when the UART or SPI interface is selected Part Numbers Package UART EEPROM SPI Parallel SSI Voice Si2493 57 34 15 04 SOIC 16 v V Si2493 57 34 15 04 TSSOP 24 v v2 512494 39 QFN 38 v d 2 Notes Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 Modem System Side Device The Si24xx ISOmodem system side devices contain a controller a DSP program memory ROM data memory RAM UART SPI and parallel interfaces a crystal oscillator and an
23. Disable autobaud and set rate to K AT IPR 115200 S 115 200 bps Apply Patch Commands OK Apply the modem patch commands AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec Disable local AT command echo and OK enter voice mode Limited V 253 event reporting enabled with default setting of VLS 0 ATE0 FCLASS 8 Disable voice mode Used as a transi AT VLS 0 OK tion point between non zero VLS voice modes Setup on hook TAM voice mode See Table 117 on page 190 for details AT Y254 W59 1 OK Enable the SSI interface to the Si3000 AT YO OK Exit the command mode AT VCDT 1 OK Enable always on Type Caller ID AT VCID 1 OK Enable formatted Caller ID AT VSD 129 OK Set silence detection sensitivity level AT PCW 0 OK Enable Type II Caller ID reporting AT U0B1 0500 OK Set Si3000 to DAA transmit gain AT U0B5 0200 OK Set DAA to Si3000 receive gain AT U0B6 0100 OK Set Sidetone gain AT U0B9 0300 OK Set VTS to Si3000 transmit gain AT U0B4 0600 OK Set VTS to DAA transmit gain 194 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 119 Initialization Sequence Continued AT U196 5000 OK Set output limiter threshold gain AT U197 2000 OK Set input limiter threshold gain AT U19C 2400 OK Set AEC reference gain AT U19D 1800 OK Set AEC microphon
24. AV AW 9 1 AA a owF C2 igi 0 1uF IN gt 0 1uF inh 0 1uF 5 vor gt 5 4 up 41 Ne 1 I 7 2 BYPASS 1 1 SHUTDOWN vo2 ___ gt 5 C8 5 e tul LM4819 Figure 23 PWM Audio Processing and Amplifying Circuit 4 5 1 Interaction between the AOUT Circuit and the Required Modem Reset Time When modifying the circuit shown in Figure 23 it is important to examine the reset timing and know that when external reset is applied to the modem the AOUT pin still has time to rise to VCC due to the pullup installed on it One has to assume that the modem has been operating prior to reset and has put AOUT into a PWM state that is 100 low This is important because the AOUT pin which is shared with INT in some packages is read by the strapping option logic in the modem at the end of the reset time to set the operational mode as shown in 2 1 3 Reset Strap Options for 16 Pin SOIC Package and 2 1 4 Reset Strap Options for 24 Pin TSSOP Package on page 13 and 2 1 5 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts on page 15 The value of the capacitors and resistors in the above circuit thus has an effect on the minimum required ISOmodem reset time 54 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 4 5 2 Audio Quality The mulipole filter illustrated in this diagram is designed to shape the response for a pleasant sound and remove interferen
25. if hCom INVALID HANDLE VALUE 1 Handle the error printf CreateFile failed with error d n GetLastError exit 1 e Rev 1 3 265 SILICON LABS AN93 Build on the current configuration and skip setting the size of the input and output buffers with SetupComm bSuccess GetCommState hCom amp dcb if bSuccess Handle the error printf GetCommState failed with error d n GetLastError exit 1 Fill in DCB 57 600 bps 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit dcb fBinary TRUE Binary mode no EOF check dcb fOutxCtsFlow FALSE No CTS output flow control dcb fOutxDsrFlow FALSE No DSR output flow control dcb fDtrControl DTR CONTROL ENABLE DTR flow control type dcb fDsrSensitivity FALSE DSR sensitivity dcb fTXContinueOnXoff TRUE XOFF continues Tx dcb fOutX FALSE No XON XOFF out flow control dcb fInX FALSE No XON XOFF in flow control dcb fErrorChar FALSE Disabl rror replacement dcb fNull FALSE Disable null stripping dcb fRtsControl RTS CONTROL ENABLE assert RTS dcb fAbortOnError FALSE Do not abort rds wr on error dcb BaudRate CBR 115200 set the baud rate dcb ByteSize 8 data size xmit and rcv dcb Parity NOPARITY no parity bit dcb StopBits ONESTOPBIT one stop bit bSuccess SetCommState h
26. FCLASS X Class 1 Mode Enable Mode Off Enables support for V 29 Fast Connect mode Enables voice mode 256 SMS mode FRM X Class 1 Receive Carrier X Mode 2 Detect V 21 980 Hz tone for longer than 100 ms then send answer tone 2100 2225 Hz for 200 ms 95 V 29 short synchronous 96 V 29 full synchronous 200 Returns to data mode prepared to receive an SMS mes sage SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 67 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Class 1 Transmit Carrier X Mode 2 Transmit V 21 980 Hz tone and detect 2100 2225 Hz Stop transmit 980 Hz when 2100 2225 Hz is detected 53 Same as amp 4 but transmit V 29 7200 bps Data pattern set by S40 register AT FCLASS 0 must be sent to restore the ISOmodem to normal operation after test 54 Same as amp 4 but transmit V 29 9600 bps Data pattern SITES set by S40 register AT FCLASS 0 must be sent to restore the ISOmodem to normal operation after test 95 V 29 short synchronous 96 V 29 full synchronous 201 Returns to data mode prepared to transmit an SMS pro tocol 1 message 202 Returns to data mode prepared to transmit an SMS pro tocol 2 message 68 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action GCl X lar country Country settings Automatically configure all registers for
27. Mexico AT GCl 73 Moldova AT GCl 73 Morocco AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Netherlands AT GCl 7B AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 Note These countries do not have built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 140 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization New Zealand AT GCl 7E AT U38 9 8 7 6 AT U3D 4 3 2 1 AT U46 8A0 AT U52 2 AT U67 8 Nigeria AT GCl 1B AT U62 904 Norway AT GCl 82 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 5006 3 Oman AT GCl 89 Pakistan AT GCl 89 AT U46 8A0 Paraguay AT GCl 87 Peru Defaults Philippines AT GCl 89 Poland AT GCl 8A AT U14 7 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 AT U77 4410 ATS006 3 Portugal AT GCI 8B AT U35 10E0 AT U42 41 21 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 1 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Puerto Rico Defaults Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 141 AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Qatar AT GCl 16 AT U49 22 7A Reunion AT GCl 1B AT U62 904 AT
28. The even numbered registers UAO UA2 etc control the amount of time the tone is expected to be present and the odd numbered registers select the amount of time the tone must not be present The values are expressed in 10 millisecond units For example a cadence of on 500 ms off 300 ms then on for 500 ms may be selected by writing 0x0032 to UAO 0x001E to UA1 and 0x0032 to UA2 The unused registers should be written to 0 The default cadence setting is UAO equal to 001Eh and the remaining nine registers are set to zero Table 101 defines the SAS cadence for each supported country The on time is listed in bold These data were obtained from ITU T Recommendation E 180 Supplement 2 04 98 Table 100 SAS Tone Frequency SAS FREO SAS Frequency 0x0000 440 Hz Default 0x0001 400 Hz 0x0002 420 Hz 0x0003 425 Hz 0x0004 480 Hz 0x0005 450 Hz 0x0006 900 Hz 0x0007 950 Hz 0x0008 523 Hz 0x0009 1400 Hz Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers U9F 0x0001 Angola Waiting Tone 400 1 0 5 0 0x0064 UA1 0x01F4 U9F 0x0000 UA0 0x0032 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 Anguilla Waiting Tone 440 0 5 10 0 0 5 U9F 0 0004 480 0 6 10 0 UAO 0x003C UA1 0x03E8 Antigua and Call Waiting Barbuda Tone U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x0028 Argentine Republic Waiting Tone 425 0 4 0 2
29. e Eit yew effects Generate araoe Favortes Window AE APAFA 11 11 npe SPP gsETTTETEI Fee iade ES Tere yew Effects Generate amp aze Favortes Options AE PPARA IET nemen ae UTE WR some B ESEA 21 Beene E Ce Figure 62 Recording Made at Excessive Level 0287 1005 164 Me MAS Gv The above recording was made at an excessively high level One can see clipping in the time domain and numerous distortion products in the frequency domain 2152 9 v22bis fail wav Adobe Audition K 5 u52_9_v22bis_fail wav Adobe Audition Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help File Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help 108 ee SSSR SESSA 115 Begin 0 15 831 Sel 0 15 831 View 0 00 000 Begin Length Fam 45 015831 000000 0 15 831 14 144 o1 o EAR A View 0 00 000 0 24 500 4 19121 48 5 45 53 50 57 54 51 rur Stopped 10 1dB 0 22 674 8000 16 bit Mono 382K 24 45 GB free Stopped 38929Hz 005273 8000 16 Mono 382K 2445 GB free Figure 63 Recording Made with AGC Noise Reduction The above recording was made with AGC Noise Reduction still enabled as can be seen from the gradual level drop in the time domain graph at the start of V 22 negot
30. 93 SILICON LABS 512493 57 34 15 04 Revision D and Si2494 39 Modem Designer s Guide 1 Introduction The 512494 93 57 39 34 15 04 ISOmodem chipset family consists of 38 pin QFN Si2494 39 or 24 pin TSSOP Si2493 57 34 15 04 or 16 pin SOIC Si2493 57 34 15 04 low voltage modem device and a 16 pin SOIC line side DAA device Si3018 10 connecting directly with the telephone local loop Tip and Ring This modem solution is a complete hardware controller based modem that connects to a host processor through a UART parallel or SPI interface Parallel and EEPROM interfaces are available only on the 38 pin QFN or 24 pin TSSOP package option Refer to Table 4 ISOmodem Capabilities on page 10 for available part number capability and package combinations Isolation is provided by Silicon Laboratories isolation capacitor technology which uses high voltage capacitors instead of a transformer This isolation technology complies with global telecommunications standards including FCC ETSI ES 203 021 JATE and all known country specific requirements Additional features include programmable ac dc termination and ring impedance on hook and off hook intrusion detection Caller ID loop voltage loop current monitoring overcurrent detection ring detection and the hook switch function All required program and data memory is included in the modem device When the modem receives a software or hardware reset all register settings reve
31. Mask the interrupt so that it doesn t cause another interrupt until the host software clears it with AT I and tells us to turn it back on ClearINTM control update 1 Rev 1 3 301 SILICON LABS AN93 Insert code here to inform the host of the U70 interrupt or service it application dependent e g gU70Interrupt 1 TXE INTERRUPT if TXEInterrupt Clear the data sent counter BytesSent 0 The transmit FIFO is fourteen bytes deep twelve bytes to the part without risking overflow two bytes or fewer in the transmit FIFO while gUARTToModemBufferSize gt 0 amp amp BytesSent lt 12 writeModem HIRO pullByteForModem OxFF BytesSent tt If there weren t enough data sent to clear the interrupt if BytesSent lt 3 Clear the TXE bit to clear the interrupt ClearTXE control_update 1 Check if the status register needs to be written if control_update writeModem HIR1 modem control OxFF control update 0 Read register 1 to get current status ReadModemStatus Reset receiver counter BytesReceived 0 SFRPAGE SFRPAGE_SAVE Restore SFR page Enable global interrupt therefore upon TXE interrupts it is possible to send up to clear it manually for a subsequent RXF condition in this loop 302 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 DOCUMENT CHANGE LIST Rev
32. Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action PMHR X G IN Initiate MOH Requests the DCE to initiate or to confirm a MOH procedure Valid only if MOH is enabled Mode V 92 MOH request denied or not available MOH with 10 s timeout granted MOH with 20 s timeout granted MOH with 30 s timeout granted MOH with 40 s timeout granted MOH with 1 min timeout granted MOH with 2 min timeout granted MOH with 3 min timeout granted MOH with 4 min timeout granted MOH with 6 min timeout granted MOH with 8 min timeout granted MOH with 12 min timeout granted MOH with 16 min timeout granted MOH with indefinite timeout granted MOH request denied Future request will also be denied PMHT X O gt 10 11 12 13 Controls access to MOH request and sets the timeout value Mode Deny V 92 MOH request Grant MOH with 10 s timeout Grant MOH with 20 s timeout Grant MOH with 30 s timeout Grant MOH with 40 s timeout Grant MOH with 1 min timeout Grant MOH with 2 min timeout Grant MOH with 3 min timeout Grant MOH with 4 min timeout Grant MOH with 6 min timeout Grant MOH with 8 min timeout Grant MOH with 12 min timeout Grant MOH with 16 min timeout Grant MOH with indefinite timeout PQC X V 92 Phase 1 Phase 2 Control Mode Enable Short Phase 1 and Short Phase 2
33. XM 45 v9Lmr9simn 29114 XL SH 29114 XL 95 Pexul os BAN 09 sionuoo LOA exui 05 GON pue uioq slonuoo ALON 70292 51 51410 STA ui ued dSA ILON 166111 Hesin 93009 531405 Rev 1 3 188 SILICON LABS AN93 suondo uonoejes jeubis pue 000515 06 941614 9 81 21 19 0 LLOL LO OO 0 1 gp s 861 u 101 JO 0 8 021 LLL 0 5 00000 LEN ova T MEA 0 1 9 vod n 81 21 9 0 JO 0 10 0 1 041000 ads lqeuutue16oid 01 33 was 10 164 105 YMuisueJl G3SN LON SI Nid SIHL NOILLO3NNOO LN3WNYLSNI 3NOHd3731 193310 HO uo gp 851 8 21 z gp se 00000 29198 dh 2 on 5 LS A 8 9 J929M papanj yos 0 0 lt lt O 89 OEHOZ OL 0 1 80 0 10005000 CSS WOW 10 0 LLY SSW W3QOWOSI woud 5318 5 W3qQONOSI OL 53414815 189 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 117 Voice Mode Operations FCLASS 8
34. escape sequence enabled Answer on ring is disabled Speaker off DTE echo enabled Verbal result codes enabled CTS only enabled m FCC US DAA and call progress settings 2 1 2 Reset Strapping General Considerations The different options available in the Si24xx ISOmodem family are selected by means of 10 kO pulldown resistors placed at certain pins During power on or pin reset the ISOmodem s signal pins are read and the option resistors are taken into account to determine the required configuration After reset the ISOmodem assumes the functionality selected by the corresponding combination of pulldown resistors Below is a summary of reset strap options Not all options are available on all part number or packages Refer to Table 4 ISOmodem Capabilities on page 10 for details m Host interface UART parallel or SPI m Input clock frequency 32 kHz 4 9152 MHz or 27 MHz m Autobaud mode or fixed rate UART communication when UART interface is selected Disabling the autobaud feature at reset sets the rate to 19 200 baud m EEPROM interface m Three wire EEPROM or four wire EEPROM when EEPROM interface is selected Refer to 2 6 EEPROM Interface 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN Only on page 31 for more details on the various ISOmodem EEPROM options The next few sections describe the various reset options that must be selected for each package In all the tables the following conventions apply m Omeans a 10 kO pulldow
35. RXF interrupt If yes receive up to 10 bytes Less than 3 bytes received If ves clear RXF interrupt While timer interrupt present Receive until interrupt clears U70 interrupt If yes mask interrupt Signal interrupt to system If yes send up to 12 bytes Less than 3 bytes sent If yes clear TXE interrupt Update modem control Enable global interrupt Figure 76 Parallel or SPI Port Interrupt Service Flowchart lt Rev 1 3 295 SILICON LABS AN93 Buffer Management Status and Control Layer Buffer Management Sample code for this layer can be found in the application buffers c file This code can be ported to other applications with minimal changes needed to compile on the host platform This block contains the buffer management routines for both modem and UART access The buffer structure consists of two circular buffers implemented as the following array variables char gModemToUARTBuffer BUFFERSIZE The above buffer is typically filled by modemInterrupt and emptied by UARTOInterrupt Once the buffer is empty subsequent TIO UART interrupts have no effect If the buffer is filled again after all TIO interrupts have been serviced the TIO interrupt needs jump starting This is accomplished by calling UARTCommunicationUpdate after filling the buffer char gUARTToModemBuffer BUFFERSIZE The above buffer is typically filled by UARTOInterrup
36. The ISOmodem reports the on hook line voltage with the LVS bits in two s complement LVS has a full scale of 87 V with an LSB of 1 V The first code step going from 0 to 1 is offset so that a 0 indicates a line voltage of less than 3 V The accuracy of the LVS bits is 10 The user can read these bits directly through the LVS register A typical transfer function is shown in Figure 15 When the ISOmodem is off hook the LCS bits measure loop current in 1 1 mA bit resolution These bits enable the user to detect another phone going off hook by monitoring the dc loop current Line current sensing is detailed in Figure 16 and Table 32 LVS Bits 128 112 96 80 64 48 32 16 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 Tip Ring Voltage Volts Figure 15 Typical Loop Voltage LVS Transfer Function 40 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 LCS Bits 96 112 128 144 32 48 64 80 Loop Current m A Figure 16 Typical Loop Current LCS Transfer Function Table 32 Loop Current Transfer Function LVCS 4 0 Condition 00000 Insufficient line current for normal operation 00001 Minimum line current for normal operation 11111 Loop current overload Overload is defined as 128 mA or more except in TBR21 where overload is defined as 56 mA or more SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 41 AN93 3 6 Legacy Mode Line Voltage and Loop Current Measurem
37. U68 is a bit mapped register with bits 15 3 reserved Reading these bits returns zero Bits 4 and 2 0 are all read write see Table 68 Bit 2 BTE 0 default is disabled by default When BTE 1 the DAA automatically responds to a collapse of the line derived power supply during a billing tone event When off hook if BTE 2 1 and BTD goes high the dc termination is increased to 800 Q to reduce loop current If BTE and U70 9 RIM are set to 1 an interrupt from U70 1 RI also occurs when BTD goes to 1 high Bit 1 ROV is normally 0 and is set to 1 to report an excessive receive input level ROV is cleared by writing it to O Bit 0 0 normally but is set to 1 if a billing tone is detected is cleared by writing 0 to 0068 resets to 0x0000 with a power on or manual reset U6A is a bit mapped register with bits 15 3 and 1 0 reserved Reading these bits returns zero Bit 2 is read only See Table 69 Bit 2 OVL is a read only bit that detects a receive overload This bit is similar to U68 1 ROV except OVL clears itself after the overload condition is removed Table 68 U68 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 8 Reserved Read returns zero 7 3 Reserved Do not modify 2 BTE Billing Tone Protect Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 ROV Receive Overload 0 Normal receive input level 1 Excessive receive input level 0 BTD Billing Tone Detected 0 No billing tone
38. as described in the ISOModem evaluation board data sheet section titled Direct Access Interface This connection is illustrated in Figure 40 Be sure to connect the evaluation board ground to the prototype system ground Power up and manually reset the evaluation board then power up the prototype system and send AT CR If an OK response is received make connection to the remote modem as in the previous step If no OK response is received debug host interface and or software If a connection is successful go to the next step to isolate the problem in the prototype modem An alternative approach is to connect the prototype modem to the ISOModem EVB motherboard in place of the daughter card and use a PC and HyperTerminal to test the prototype modem See Figure 41 for details 10 1 5 Isolation Capacitor Troubleshooting Connect the evaluation board isolation capacitor to Prototype Modem Si3018 10 Remove C1 on the evaluation board and on the prototype system Solder one end of the evaluation board C1 to the ISOmodem side pad leaving the other end of C1 unconnected Next solder a short jumper wire from the unconnected side of C1 on the evaluation board to the Si3018 10 side C1 pad on the prototype system This connection is illustrated in Figure 42 Connect the phone line to the prototype system RJ 11 jack Power up and manually reset the evaluation board then power up the prototype system Attempt to make a connection using the host proces
39. iLength strlen caUA_PKT_STR WriteFile hCom caUA PKT STR iLength amp ulNoOfbytes 0 Tx UA messge Delay 100 while 1 Short training happens now AssertRTS false printf RTS 0 RTS 0 for receiving cpInputRd WaitForResponse caRX PKT STR cpInputRd 3000 Rx RR message iLength strlen cpInput test for int 4 0 i iLength i printf 02x unsigned char cpInput test i printf d cpInputRd Alternatively use CTS Delay 150 do flush out the bytes for last RX packets BOOL bError ReadFile hCom cpInputWr 1 amp ulNoOfbytes 0 ulNoOfbytes 1 printf 02x unsigned char cpInputWr 0 while ulNoOfbytes printf n AssertRTS true printf RTS 1 Tx RTS 1 for transmitting Delay 50 morrie 01 20 06 iLength strlen caRR PKT STR for 4 0 i iLength it printf S02x unsigned char caRR PKT STR i printf n WriteFile hCom caRR PKT STR iLength amp ulNoOfbytes 0 Tx RR message Delay 100 Delay x ms to complete TX sending before set RTS 0 for RX return Use this call to check CTS status DWORD iEVentMAsk wait for EV CTS BOOL WaitCommEvent HANDLE hFile amp iEVentMAsk LPOVERLAPPED lpOverlapped void SetupSerPort BOOL bSuccess hCom CreateFile pcCommPort GENERIC READ GENERIC WRITE 0 NULL OPEN EXISTING 0 NULL
40. Country Initialization Estonia AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Finland AT GCl 3C AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 France AT GCI 3D AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 French Polynesia AT GCl 1B AT U62 904 Georgia AT GCl 73 Germany AT GCl 42 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Ghana AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Note These countries do not have a built in GCI support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 137 AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Greece AT GCl 46 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Guadeloupe AT GCl 1B AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Guam Defaults Hong Kong AT GCl 50 Hungary AT GCl 51 AT U35 10E0 AT U62 904 33 Iceland AT GCl 2E AT U62 904 India AT GCl 53 AT U63 3 AT U67 8 Indonesia Defaults lreland AT GCl 57 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Israel 58 935 10 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 952 1 AT U62 904 AT U67 1004 No
41. Dn G L P T W En Local DTE echo EO Disable E1 Enable Hn Hook switch HO Go on hook hang up modem H1 Go off hook In Identification and checksum Display Si24xx revision code 10 Revision Revision etc 11 Display Si24xx firmware revision code numeric No Patch AT Command Chip Revision ATIO A ATI A ATIO B ATI B ATIO C ATI C ATIO D 60 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action ATI D Revision B Patch rb pX YYYY AT Command Chip Revision ATIO B ATH B ATIO C ATH C Revision C Patch rc pX YYYY AT Command Chip Revision ATIO B not allowed ATI B not allowed ATIO C ATH C Command Action Display line side revision code 18 10 C 5 018 10 Revision C Display the ISOmodem model number 2404 Si2404 6 2415 512415 2434 512434 2457 512457 2493 512493 Diagnostic Results 1 Format RX rx rate TX tx rate 17 PROTOCOL protocol LOCAL rre REMOTE rte RETRN RR rn DISC REASON Diagnostic Results 2 Format lg RX LEVEL rx level TX LEVEL tx level EFFECTIVE S N lt esn gt RESIDUAL ECHO lt re gt SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 61 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Ln Speaker Volum
42. Operation Yes Yes Yes Si3018 10 Operation Yes Yes Hookswitch Yes Yes dc Termination Yes Yes Bridge Yes Yes AC Termination Yes Yes Line Voltage Monitor Yes Ringer Network Yes Intrusion Detection Yes Caller ID Yes Overcurrent Detection Yes SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 251 AN93 10 4 Compliance Testing Regulatory compliance testing requires the modem to be configured in specific ways and controlled to perform specific operations necessary to make required measurements Compliance testing commands and configuration information are provided Some helpful commands for conducting compliance testing on the ISOmodem are listed in Table 152 The modem register defaults configure the modem for FCC operation Table 152 AT Commands for Compliance Testing AT Command Test Method Desired Response ATH1 Continuous off hook ATHO Return on hook AT amp Hn see command description for n Set modulation AT amp T3 requires load and loop current Turn on carrier originate Set S10 255 to keep the modem under test from hanging up after the remote modem is unplugged Connect with another modem Si24xx in Turn on carrier answer answer mode then unplug the other modem Initiate transmit as originating modem dis with automatic data generation AT amp T5 Blind dial no dial tone AT Y1D lt digit gt example AT Y1D1 for DTMF1 Send continuous DTMF digit
43. Time 1 ms units 30 ms default Rev 1 3 115 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 76 U78 Bit Map Bit Function 15 14 IB Intrusion Blocking 00 No intrusion blocking 01 Intrusion disabled from start of dial to end of dial 10 Intrusion disabled from start of dial to IS register time out 11 Intrusion disabled from start of dial to CONNECT XXX NO DIALTONE or NO CARRIER 13 8 Reserved Read returns zero 7 0 IS Intrusion Suspend 500 ms units default 0 ms U79 is a bit mapped register Bits 15 6 are reserved Bits 5 0 represent the line voltage loop current or on hook line monitor see Table 77 While the modem is on hook the value in the LVCS register measures loop voltage see Table 78 This value can be used to determine if a line is connected or if a parallel phone or other device goes off hook or on hook The accuracy of the LVCS bits is 20 When the modem goes off hook the value in the LVCS register measures loop current LVCS can indicate when a parallel phone or other device goes on hook or off hook and detect whether enough loop current is available for the modem to operate or if an overload condition exists The line voltage monitor full scale may be modified by changing R5 as follows Vmax Vmi 4 2 x 10 R5 1 78 R5 1 78 5 See Table 78 LVCS is backward compatible with older ISOmodem revisions The value is absolut
44. 1 Force CID monitor always on 2 UK with wetting pulse 3 Japan The following sections describe each CID mode 6 3 1 Force Caller ID Monitor Always On In this mode the ISOmodem when on hook continuously monitors the line for the CID mark sequence and FSK data This mode can be used in all systems especially those requiring detection of CID data before the ring burst It is also useful for detecting voicemail indicator signals and for supporting Type II Caller ID In most systems Always On is the preferred method since it separates CID detection from ring detection 6 3 2 Caller ID After Ring Only The ISOmodem detects the first ring burst echoes RING to the host and prepares to detect the CID preamble On preamble detection the modem echoes the CIDM response to the host indicating the preamble was received and FSK modulated CID data will follow and INT is triggered if enabled Next the CID algorithm looks for the start bit assembles the characters and sends them to the host as they are received When the CID burst is finished there is no more carrier and NO CARRIER is echoed to the host The ISOmodem continues to detect subsequent ring bursts echoes RING to the host increments the ring counter S1 and automatically answers after the number of rings specified in SO 6 3 3 UK Caller ID with Wetting Pulse The ISOmodem first detects a line polarity reversal echoes FLASH to the host and triggers t
45. 8 Configure ISOmodem for 10 pulse per second pulse dialing amp P1 Configure ISOmodem for 20 pulse per second pulse dialing Japan amp Tn Test mode Initiate ITU T V 54 ANALOOP test Modem mode set by amp H Test loop is through the DSP and amp T2 DAA interface section of the ISOmodem only ISOmodem echoes data from TX pin Hardware Inter face Register 0 in parallel or SPI mode back to RX pin Hardware Interface Register 0 in parallel or SPI mode This test mode is typically used during board level debug Initiate ITU T V 54 ANALOOP test Modem mode set by amp H Test loop is through the DSP ISOmo dem DAA interface section ISOmodem ISOcap interface Si3018 10 and analog hybrid circuit amp T3 Si3018 10 ISOmodem echoes data from TX pin Hardware Interface Register 0 in parallel or SPI mode back to RX pin Register 0 in parallel or SPI mode Phone line termination required as in Figure 25 In order to test only the ISOcap link operation the hybrid and AFE codec can be removed from the test loop by setting U62 1 DL 1 Initiate transmit as originating modem with automatic data generation Modulation data rate and amp T4 symbol rate are set by amp H amp G and S41 Data pattern is set by the S40 register Continues until the ATH command is sent after an escape into command mode Data are also demodulated as in ANALOOP The test can be ended by escaping and issuing the ATH command Initiate transmit as answering mo
46. AN93 2 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page Az Introduction janes s ullu Word bee vade dau Ee xu eile Caec y ean 1 Selection Guide MI 9 2 Modem System Side Device 11 2 1 Heselling the Devi6e sd qs dux e Sioa ts mee 11 2211 552 epo vs nee eU ze 11 2 1 2 Reset Strapping General Considerations 12 2 1 3 Reset Strap Options for 16 Pin SOIC Package 13 2 1 4 Reset Strap Options for 24 Pin TSSOP Package 13 2 1 4 1 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP 24 with UART Interface 14 2 1 4 2 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP 24 with Parallel Interface 14 2 1 4 3 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP with SPl Interface 15 2 1 5 Reset Strapping Options for QFN 15 2 1 5 1 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with UART Operation 15 2 1 5 2 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with SPI Operation 16 2 1 5 3 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with Parallel Operation 16 2 2 System Interface Gis un 5 17 2 2 1 Interface 5 17 2 2 2 Interface Signal
47. Bit 12 CIDM 0 default prevents a change in U70 4 CID Caller ID from triggering an interrupt If CIDM 1 an interrupt is triggered with a low to high transition on CID Bit 11 OCDM 0 default an interrupt is not triggered with a change If OCDM 1 a low to high transition on U70 3 OCD overcurrent detect triggers an interrupt This bit must be set for Australia and Brazil Bit 10 PPDM 1 default causes a low to high transition in U70 2 PPD parallel phone detect to trigger an interrupt If PPDM 0 an interrupt is not triggered with a change in PPD Bit 9 RIM 2 1 default causes a low to high transition in U70 1 RI ring indicator to trigger an interrupt If RIM 0 an interrupt is not triggered with a change in RI Bit 8 DCDM 1 default causes a high to low transition in U70 0 DCD data carrier detect to trigger an interrupt If DCDM 0 an interrupt is not triggered with a change DCD Bits 4 0 are the event indicators described below All are sticky i e remain high after the event and are cleared upon an interrupt read command 112 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 73 U70 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 HES Enable Hardware Escape Pin 0 Disable 1 Enable 14 Reserved Read returns zero 13 TES Enable Escape 0 Disable 1 Enable 12 CIDM Caller ID Mask 0 Change d
48. CR LF DTE A T U 8 7 0 5 0 CR A DCE CR LFO CR LF DTE T U 7 A 1 CR An UD ps 08 Qs 4 1 5 DCE CR O LE DTE x om 121 so Q UE DCE EM 65 EM Bl 0 93 EM B1 EM B2 0 EM AO EM Bl DTE 0 s EM Bl 0 EM AO DCE EM B2 0 EM AO EM B1 EM B2 0 EM AO EM Bl DTE EM Bl 0 EM A0 EM Bl 0 EM AO 272 Rev 1 3 e SILICON LABS AN93 APPENDIX B LiNE AUDIO RECORDING Recording and examining the audio signals on the phone line is one of the best debugging techniques for PSTN modems Virtually all the relevant signals are in the audio spectrum and are easy to acquire using a standard PC sound card and accessory hardware and software that is especially designed for music creation and analysis The required hardware is a Radio Shack Catalog No 43 228A Recorder Control It can be used with any computer equipped with a 3 5 mm audio input jack The resulting wave can usually be recorded in the field using the computer s operating system resources but for analysis a software package capable of showing the spectral contents as they change over time is recommended The two most widely used ones are Adobe Audition a commercial product and WaveSurfer which is a free open source product that runs on Windows Linux OS X and Unix This audio recording technique does not replace sophisticated test equipment but it is quite useful in showing up some faults in the line a
49. Code Hex Description DLE 0x10 The DCE will shield a 0x10 character in the voice stream to create a 0x10 0x10 sequence sent to the DTE 508 OxX1A DLE DLE in datastream lt gt 0x03 End of voice stream data state X 0x58 Packet Header Complex Event Detection Report Implemented for CID and Distinctive Ring report only Ox2E Packet Terminator Complex Event Detection Report Implemented for CID and Distinc tive Ring report only Ox2F tone detection started Ox7F tone detection ceased R 0x52 Ring incoming 1 0x31 DTMF 1 2 0x32 DTMF 2 3 0x33 DTMF 3 4 0x34 4 5 0x35 5 6 0x36 DTMF 6 7 0x37 7 8 0x38 8 9 0x39 9 0 0x30 DTMF 0 A 0x41 Extended keypad DTMF A B 0x42 Extended keypad B C Ox43 Extended keypad DTMF C D 0x44 Extended keypad D 5 Ox2A Extended keypad DTMF E Ox23 Extended keypad DTMF F SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 179 AN93 Table 112 DLE Simple Events DCE to DTE Continued Format lt DLE gt Code Code Hex Description o Ox6F Receive buffer overrun u 0x75 Transmit buffer underrun Ox63 Calling has detected T 30 1100 Hz tone e 0x65 Data Calling DCE has detected V 25 1300 Hz tone h 0x68 Line voltage collapsed phone line detached H 0x48 Line voltage restored phone line reattached q Ox71 Presum
50. Enable synchronous access mode when connection is completed and data state is entered B This parameter should not be used C Specifies the mode of operation when answer a modem connection D Disable synchronous access mode 8 Enable synchronous access mode when connection is completed and data state is entered 66 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action 4ESA A B C D E F G Synchronous access mode control options A Specifies action taken if an underrun condition occurs during transparent sub mode 0 Modem transmits 8 bit SYN sequences see ESA G on idle B Specifies action taken if an underrun condition occurs after a flag during framed sub mode 0 Modem transmits 8 bit HDLC flags on idle C Specifies action taken if an underrun or overrun condition occurs after a non flag during framed sub mode 0 Modem transmits abort on underrun in middle of frame 1 Modem transmits flag on underrun in middle of frame and notifies host of underrun or overrun D Specifies V 34 half duplex operation This parameter should not be used E Specifies CRC polynomial used while in framed sub mode 0 CRC generation checking disable 1 16 bit CRC generation and checking is performed by the modem Specifies NRZI encoding and decoding 0 NRZI encoding and decoding disabled G Defines 8 bit SYN 255 Fixed at 255 marks
51. File Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help DS SCS ST T n The Answer Tone is too short at 400 ms Innocent answer modem generated guard tone 38369 G 943559 11025 16bt Mono 1639MB 2444GBfree Figure 70 Example of EPOS Server Misbehavior Rev 1 3 287 SILICON LABS AN93 Examples of Line Impairments DTMF Distorted by Low Line Level s mfg dtmf 200ms 3 wav Adobe Audition 12424 RSS Figure 71 Defective DTMF S test wav Adobe Audition E 1 1 TTE BRISIEESPIBIPICIH PS I II IE m 21 26 320 m m 16bit EET YS Figure 72 Normal DTMF Solutions m Fixthe telephone line m Lower the DTMF level with AT U46 OBDO or AT U46 OCFO m Checkthe loop current level with AT R79 and AT R6C 288 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS Power Line Related Noise office ok1 2 wav Adobe Audition File Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help Pease 11211 AEE M 5 3 BRE jh 12 000 2 00 06 203 3182 3 2 amp 1 14 277 22050 8bit Mono 1728K 24 45 GB free Figure 73 Odd Harmonics of 50 Hz Manifest as Horizontal Lines Spaced at 100 Hz Causes m Unbalanced phone line m High ac leakage supply m Poor CMR in modem Solutions m Fixthe telephone line m Ground the system to earth or float completely using a battery m Use analog supply wi
52. MINI 1 0 Min Loop Current 00 10 mA 01 12 mA 10 14 mA 11 16 mA 11 10 Reserved Read returns zero 9 ILIM Current Limiting Enable 0 Current limiting mode disabled 1 Current limiting mode enabled This mode limits loop current to a maximum of 60 mA per the legacy TBR21 standard 8 j Reserved Read returns zero 7 DCR DC Impedance Selection 0 50 dc termination slope is selected This mode should be used for all standard applications 1 800 Q dc termination is selected 6 OHS On Hook Speed See OHS2 5 4 Reserved Read returns zero 3 2 DCV 1 0 Tip Ring Voltage Adjust These bits adjust the voltage on the DCT pin of the line side device which affects the Tip Ring voltage on the line Low voltage countries should use a lower Tip Ring voltage Raising the Tip Ring voltage can improve signal headroom DCV 1 0 DCT Pin Voltage 00 3 1V 01 3 2V 10 3 35 V 11 3 5V 1 RZ Ringer Impedance 0 z Maximum high ringer impedance 1 Synthesize ringer impedance C15 R14 Z2 and Z3 must not be installed when setting this bit Rev 1 3 109 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 67 U67 Bit Map Continued Bit Name Function 0 RT Ringer Threshold Select Used to satisfy country requirements on ring detection Signals below the lower level do not generate a ring detection signals above the upper level are guaranteed to generate a ring detection 0 11 to 22 Vims 1 17 to 33 Vims
53. P Rev 1 3 17 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 14 Pin Functions vs Interface Mode QFN 38 Pin UART Mode SPI Mode Parallel Mode 35 INT INT INT 34 GPIO18 GPIO18 DO 33 GPIO17 GPIO17 D1 32 GPIO16 GPIO16 D2 31 GPIO23 GPIO23 D3 30 GPIO24 24 D4 29 ESC D5 28 DCD D6 24 RTS ss D7 23 TXD MOSI WR 22 RXD MISO RD 21 CTS SCLK 5 20 GPIO11 GPIO11 AO 19 RI 18 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 2 2 Interface Signal Description The following tables describe each set of UART parallel and SPI interface signals Table 15 UART Interface Signals Signal Direction Description TXD Input Data input from host TXD pin RXD Output Data output to host RXD pin RTS Input Active low request to send input for flow control CTS Output Clear to send Si2493 is ready to receive data on the TXD pin active low Table 16 SPI Interface Signals Signal Direction Description SCLK Input Serial data clock MISO Output Serial data output MOSI Input Serial data input SS Input Chip select active low INT Output Interrupt active low Table 17 Parallel Interface Signals Signal Direction Description 0 Input Register selection address input CS Input Chip select active low RD Input Read enable active low WR Input Write enable active low D 7 0 Bidirectional Parallel data bus INT Output
54. Waiting Tone 400 0 1 3 0 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x000A UA1 0x012C Greece Call Waiting Tone 425 0 3 10 0 0 3 10 0 U9F 0x0003 0x001E UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x001E UAS 0x03E8 Guyana Waiting Tone 480 0 5 18 0 U9F 0x0004 UAO 0x0032 UA1 0x0708 Honduras Call Waiting Tone 440 0 5 0 5 0 2 4 0 U9F 0x0000 0x0032 UA1 0x0032 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x0190 Hong Kong Call Waiting Tone 440 3x 0 5 0 5 8 0 U9F 0x0000 UA0 0x0032 UA1 0x0032 UA2 0x0032 UA3 0x0032 UA4 0x0032 UA5 0x0352 Hungary Waiting Tone 425 0 04 1 96 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0004 UA1 0x00C4 Iceland Waiting Tone 425 4x 0 2 0 2 0 2 3 6 0 2 0 2 0 2 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0014 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x0168 UA4 0x0014 UA5 0x0014 UA6 0x0014 Iran Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 10 0 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x0014 UA1 0x0014 UA 0x0014 UAS 0x03E8 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 155 AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Israel Call Waiting Tone 400 1x 0 15 10 0 0 15 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x000F UA1 0 03 8 2 0x000F Japan Call Waiting Tone 400 16 400 0 5 0 0
55. 0 4 4 0 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0028 UA3 0x0190 152 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Aruba Call Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 4 4 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0014 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x01B8 Australia Call Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 4 4 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0014 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x01B8 Austria Waiting Tone 420 0 04 1 95 U9F 0x0002 UA0 0x0004 UA1 0x00C3 Bermuda Waiting Tone 440 Two bursts ten seconds apart U9F 0x0000 Bhutan Waiting Tone 400 0 5 0 25 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x0032 UA1 0x0019 Botswana Waiting Tone 425 0 2 1 0 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x0014 UA1 0x0064 Brazil Waiting Tone 425 0 05 1 0 U9F 0x0003 0x0005 UA1 0x0064 British Virgin Islands Waiting Tone 440 0 5 10 0 0 5 U9F 0x0000 UAO 0x0032 1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 Brunei Darussalam Call Waiting Tone 400x24 0 5 0 25 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x0032 UA1 0x0019 Channel Islands Jersey Waiting Tone 400 0 1 2 5 0 1 U9F 0x0000 UAO 0x000A UA1 0x00FA 2 0x000A Chile Waiting Tone 900 1300 0 5 0 5 U9F 0x00
56. 1 Local XON OFF flow control 2 Hardware flow control CTS IPR rate Fixed DTE Rate Description 0 Automatically detect the baud rate BPS The decimal value of the rate in bits per second Note that the rate parameter represents the DTE rate in bps and may be set to any of the following values 300 600 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 230400 245760 and 307200 ITF Options Transmit flow control threshold ITF A Threshold above which the modem will generate a flow off ITF signal ITF A B C 0 to 511 bytes B Threshold below which the modem will generate a flow on signal 0 to 511 bytes C Polling interval for lt gt lt gt indicator 0 to 300 in 10 msec units Modulation reporting control X Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MR X If enabled the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during connect negotiation The format of this result code is as fol lows MCR carrier e g V32B MRR rate e g MRR 14400 70 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action MS Options MS A MS A B MS A B C MS A B C D MS A B C D E MS A B C D E F Modulation Selection A Preferred modem carrier V21 ITU T V 21 V22 ITU T V 22 V22B ITU T V 22bis default for Si2404 V32 ITU T V 32 V32B
57. 7 0 m Setthe speaker and microphone level thresholds which determine whether remote speech or local speech is active The thresholds are defined in U19C and U19D Typical values for the speaker and microphone thresholds are 0x700 and 0x600 respectively These thresholds are not affected by the speaker and microphone control gains UB5 and UB1 m Setthe holding time which is the time that the SSP holds the current mode after the signal level falls below the threshold Holding time prevents frequent mode switching between RX and TX A typical value for holding time is OxC8 200 ms For manual operation push to talk m SetSSP FLAG to 1 U199 6 1 and SSP PTT to 1 U199 7 1 m Use the SSP LOCTALK bit U199 8 to set the speech direction U199 8 1 for local talker U199 8 0 for remote talker U1D8 is the break through threshold for the speaker signal in SSP auto switch mode If the speaker signal is above the threshold U1D8 and holds at least for the holding time the direction is switched to remote talker no matter how strong the signal in the microphone is To disable break through set the threshold to 7FFFh AT U1D8 7FFF m U1D8 greater than U1D6 when the speaker signal is greater than or equal to U1D8 the microphone is muted and speaker unmuted immediately regardless of the microphone holding time When the speaker signal is greater than U1D6 but less than U1D8 the speaker signal goes through after the expiration
58. AN93 Table 86 EM In Band Commands and Statuses Continued Command Hex dio s Supported I Transmit Direction Receive Direction in Framed Indicator pair Code Transparent Submode Submode Retrain Rate Reneg com pleted following octets lt tx gt lt rx gt indicate tx and rx rates 0 20 1200 bps 0x21 2400 bps 0x22 4800 bps 0 23 7200 bps 0x24 9600 bps 0 25 12 kbps lt EM gt lt rate gt OxBE not supported 0226144 Yes Yes 0x27 16 8 kbps 0 28 19 2 kbps 0x29 21 6 kbps 0x2A 24 kbps 0 2 26 4 kbps 0 2 28 8 kbps Ox2D 31 2 kbps 0 2 33 6 kbps Notes 1 087 10 1 Can be used to limit the transparency characters in the receive direction to these four cases only 2 The actual value represented in lt octnum0 gt lt octnum1 gt 2 octunum1 64 3 0 45 indicates that an unrecognized lt EM gt command was sent to the modem In addition a common Point of Sale V 22 Fast Connect Handshake Protocol with transparent HDLC requires these additional settings Table 87 Fast Connect Settings AT MS V22 V22 Protocol AT U7A 3 Set Fast Connect Transmit HDLC Flags instead of Marks during handshake negotiation Rev 1 3 129 SILICON LABS AN93 Given the example initialization settings shown in Table 87 after an ATDT command has been sent to establish a connection the modem responds with the follow
59. AT U181 78 0 0 1C OK Set up 1400 Hz detector to detect 100 ms Handshake tone burst ATDnnnnnnn OK Call RECEIVER station AT VTD 5 U48 32 OK Change DTMF on off time to pre pare for Data Tones transmis sion 10 Wait for RECEIVER to answer with handshake tones 11 DLE c i e 0x10 0x63 1400 Hz tone burst detected Note First part of Handshake Tones detected lt DLE gt lt e gt i e 0x10 0x65 2300 Hz tone burst detected Notes Second part of Hand shake Tones detected Since there is a 100 ms silence between the 1400 Hz and 2300 Hz tones the lt DLE gt lt e gt message should come nomi nally 200msec after the previous lt DLE gt lt c gt message It is the responsibility of the host DTE driver to measure and vali date this time period AT U181 334 0 0 12C OK Change 1400 Hz detector to detect 800 300 ms tone burst i e Kissoff tone Delay 250 ms before transmitting Data Tones message Host DTE should adjust this delay so that the following VTS DTMF transmission will start between 250 to 300 ms after the reception of lt DLE gt lt e gt above Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 231 AN93 Table 145 Ademco Mode of Operation Continued Step DTE to Modem Command Modem to DTE Indication Remarks AT VTS 9 9 9 9 1 8 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 3 OK First Data Block is transmitted Note Data oct
60. Ademco Mode of Operation Step DTE to Modem Command Modem to DTE Remarks Indication 1 AT y254 w8686 1AA CCDF C73B C001 0 OK Initialize 2300 Hz tone detector AT y254 w868B 1AA D3D1 C39A 3FFF DDD OK AT y254 w8690 1AA C34B C35F 3FFF 54A0 OK Note This step must be done AT y254 w8695 C 400 OK after a reset or ATZ But it is not AT y254 w8697 7BE E050 CC04 3FFF 345F OK needed for every call AT y254 w869C 7BE BF39 CA8D 3FFF 37B5 OK AT y254 w86A1 C 300 C00 CCD OK 2 AT y254 w86A5 100 2A44 C480 C001 0 OK Initialize 1400 Hz tone detector AT y254 w86AA 167 25BC C22F 3FFF EC95 OK AT y254 w86AF 167 303D C21E 3FFF BEF2 OK This step must be done after a AT y254 w86B4 C 400 OK reset or ATZ But it is not needed AT y254 w86B6 812 1E2F C772 3FFF D55F OK for every call AT y254 w86BB 939 3394 C6FC 3FFF D345 OK AT y254 w86C0 1000 0 0 0 0 OK AT y254 w86C5 C 140 8c0 CCD 3 ATEO UAD 40 Set UAD 6 to enable Ademco mode tone detections AT UAD amp FF7F OK Clear UAD 7 to disable SIA mode 5 48 0064 DTE reads and records what is the normal tone off duration for DTMF dialing This parameter is country dependent This param eter will be modified for Data Tones transmission later 6 AT FCLASS 8 OK Put modem into V 253 voice mode 230 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 145 Ademco Mode of Operation Continued Step DTE to Modem Command Modem to DTE Indication Remarks
61. Any attempt to write to a non listed U register or to write a reserved bit can cause unpredictable modem operation There are two types of U registers The first represents a single 16 bit term such as a filter coefficient threshold delay or other quantity These registers can be read from or written to as a single 16 bit value The second type of U register is bit mapped Bit mapped registers are also written and or read in hexadecimal but each bit or combination of bits in the register represents an independent value These individual bits are used to enable or disable features and indicate states Bits in these registers can be read write read only reserved or they may be required to always be set to a certain value Pay particular attention when writing to bit mapped registers to ensure no reserved bits are overwritten When changing bits in a U register with reserved bits use a read modify write procedure read the register value with AT R modify only the desired bits then write the new value with AT U This will ensure the reserved bits are not altered All U registers revert to their default settings after a reset The U registers can be broken into three groups call progress 00 033 49 4 dialing 037 048 line interface and extended functions U4D UA9 Table 46 lists the available U registers a brief description and their default values Table 47 summarizes the signals and values available in the bit mapped registers Cou
62. Connect EVB RS232 transceivers to prototype modem Use PC with HyperTerminal to test prototype modem Figure 41 Test the Prototype Modem Rev 1 3 245 SILICON LABS AN93 Prototype System Connect the prototype ground to the EVB ground Lift prototype C1 and C2 and EVB C1 and C2 so the Si3018 is disconnected from the Si24xx on both modems Connect EVB C1 and C2 to the Si3018 pad of prototype system C1 and C2 Connect the phone line to the RJ11 jack on the prototype system Use PC and HyperTerm and attempt to establish a modem connection Figure 42 Test the Prototype Si3018 10 Circuitry Prototype System To Phone Line Connect the prototype ground to the EVB ground Lift prototype and EVB C1 and C2 to decouple the line side from the DSP side Do same on evaluation board Connect prototype system C1 and C2 to the Si3018 pad of EVB C1 and C2 Connect the phone line to the RJ11 jack on the EVB Run the prototype system software to attempt a modem connection Figure 43 Verify Prototype Si3018 10 Failure 246 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Voltages measured with respect to IGND 513018 15 On Hook IGND DCT3 QB C1B QE2 C2B S2 VREG VREG2 RNG1 RNG2 Off Hook DCT2 IGND DCT3 QB QE2 SC VREG VREG2 RNG1 RNG2 Figure 44 Si3018 10 Typical Voltages Table 148 Resistance to Si3018 10 Pin 15 Si3018 10 Resi
63. Enable Short Phase 1 Enable Short Phase 2 Disable Short Phase 1 and Short Phase 2 72 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Selection of full or short startup procedures X Mode 0 TheDCEs decide to use short startup procedures PSS X 1 Forces the use of short startup procedures on next and sub sequent connections 2 Forces the use of full startup procedures on next and subse quent connections Caller ID Type n Mode 0 After ring only VCDT n 1 Always on 2 UK with wetting pulse 3 Japan 6 DTMF Caller ID Enable n Mode VCID n 0 Off 1 Formatted Caller ID enabled 2 Raw data Caller ID enabled Type II Caller ID information VCIDR will be followed by raw VCIDR Caller ID information including checksum NO DATA will be dis played if no Type II data are available Distinctive Ring n Mode 0 Disable distinctive ring 1 0 Enable distinctive ring The ISOmodem will report DROF and DRON result codes only DROF and VDR n DRON are reported in 100 ms units 1 x Enable distinctive ring The ISOmodem will report DROF and DRON result codes as well as well as a RING result code x 10 seconds after the falling edge of a ring pulse DROF and DRON are reported in 100 ms units Receive Gain Selection The gain parameter has a range of 112 134 with 128 being the nominal value This represents a range of 48 dB to 1
64. Kissoff tone is a 1400 Hz tone that lasts for at least 750 ms and at most 1 second The frequency tolerance of the Kissoff tone is X396 transmitters have a frequency tolerance of 5 for back compatibility with old receivers The receiver must detect at least 400 ms of the Kissoff tone for it to be considered valid The transmitter waits for the Kissoff tone to end then waits an additional 250 to 300 ms before sending another Message Block If no Kissoff tone is received after 1 25 s the transmitter sends the message again Up to four retries are attempted per Message Block After the last message block has been acknowledged the transmitter hangs up 228 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 8 2 1 Modem Specific Implementation Details The DTMF transmitters and receivers are used to send and receive data Voice mode operation documented in chapter X is used to transmit and receive the tones A summary of the necessary tone transmission AT commands is shown in Table 144 The procedure is as follows Modem Initialization host sends to modem enters voice mode goes off hook and starts tone detection AT FCLASS 8 AT VLS 15 Send and receive tones example AT VTS 941 1336 10 0x10 Ox2F 0x31 0x32 Ox7E Host commands modem to send DTMF digit 0 Modem responds with 5 characters as it receives two DTMF tones 1 and 2 There are 2 preamble and 1 postamble characters in this example Table 144 Ademco Contact ID Protoc
65. Reset Strapping Options for Parts with Parallel Operation Input cs AOUT EECLK RD Pin 21 Pin 15 Pin 13 Pin 22 32 kHz 1 0 1 7 1 0 1 1 4 9152 MHz 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 16 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 2 System Interface The ISOmodem can be connected to a host processor through a UART SPI or parallel interface Connection to the chip requires low voltage CMOS signal levels from the host and any other circuitry interfacing directly The following sections describe the digital interface options in detail 2 2 1 Interface Selection The interface is selected during reset as described 2 1 Resetting the Device Tables 12 13 and 14 show the functions of the affected pins for possible interface modes for 16 24 and 38 pin packages respectively Table 12 Pin Functions vs Interface Mode SOIC 16 Pin UART Mode SPI Mode 3 RI RI 5 RXD MISO 6 TXD MOSI 7 CTS SCLK 11 INT INT 14 ESC ESC 15 DCD DCD 16 RTS SS Table 13 Pin Functions vs Interface Mode TSSOP 24 Pin UART Mode SPI Mode Parallel Mode 2 FSYNC 551 FSYNC 551 D6 3 CLKOUT SSI CLKOUT SSI 0 8 RTS SS D7 9 RXD MISO RD 10 TXD MOSI WR 11 CTS SCLK CS 15 AOUT AOUT INT 16 INT INT DO 17 RI RI D1 18 SDI SSI SDI SSI D2 22 ESC ESC D3 23 DCD DCD D4 24 SDO SSI SDO SSI D5
66. Si3018 10 pin 8 and RNG2 Si3018 10 pin 9 can impair modem performance R7 and R8 are also used by the modem to monitor the line voltage 4 1 5 Optional Billing Tone Filter To operate without degradation during billing tones in Germany Switzerland and South Africa an external LC notch filter is required The Si3018 10 will remain off hook during a billing tone event but modem data may be lost or a modem disconnect or retrain may occur in the presence of large billing tone signals The notch filter design requires two notches one at 12 kHz and one at 16 kHz Because these components are expensive and few countries require billing tone support this filter is typically placed in an external dongle or added as a population option Figure 17 shows an example billing tone filter L3 must carry the entire loop current The series resistance of the inductors is important to achieve a narrow and deep notch This design has more than 25 dB of attenuation at 12 kHz and 16 kHz The billing tone filter degrades the ac termination and return loss slightly but the global complex ac termination passes worldwide return loss specifications with and without the billing tone filter by at least 3 dB 44 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 C1 C2 L4 To DAA C3 RING Lo Figure 17 Billing Tone Filter Table 33 Optional Billing Tone Filters Component Values Symbol Value C1 C2 0 027 uF
67. VSM command Any 0x10 character in the voice stream must be shielded with a lt DLE gt The DTE issues a lt DLE gt lt ETX gt sequence to terminate the transmit stream The DCE will respond with lt DLE gt lt ETX gt followed by OK The DCE can be configured to terminate the stream using the DTE DCE Inactivity Timer which is configured using the VIT command SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 177 AN93 7 1 3 DLE Commands DTE to DCE The characters listed in the Code column of Table 111 are referenced throughout this document with the lt gt notation Simple action commands consist of a DLE character plus a simple action command character two bytes total Table 111 lt DLE gt Commands DTE to DCE Format lt DLE gt Code Code Hex Simple Action Command Description DLE 0x10 The DTE must shield any 0x10 characters in the voice data stream sent to the DCE to avoid creation of a DLE simple action command SUB Ox1A More efficient representation of two 0x10 0x10 characters in the voice data stream CAN 0x18 Clear transmit buffer of voice data during VTX session lt NUL gt 0x00 Do nothing Refresh VIT Inactivity Timer 0 3 Disable DTMF reporting ix Ox2F Enable DTMF reporting lt 5 gt Ox1B End Voice Receive State started by the VRX command 0x21 Abort Voice Receive State started by the VRX command u 0x75 Incre
68. mode on originate or answer AT ESA 0 0 0 1 0 Send Abort on underrun over run in Framed Submode Enable CRC generation and checking AT IFC 2 2 CTS RTS Flow Control AT ITF 0383 0128 Controls CTS Flow Control Threshold CTS off at 383 bytes CTS On at 128 bytes AT U87 050A Direct to Framed Sub mode upon connection DCE starts to transmit upon receipt of 10 bytes from the DTE 126 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 86 EM In Band Commands and Statuses Supported Supported Command Hex cUm in Transmit Direction Receive Direction in Framed Indicator pair Code Transparent Submode Submode lt EM gt lt t1 gt 0x5C Transmit one 0x19 byte Received one 0x19 byte Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t2 gt 0x76 Transmit one 0x99 byte Received one 0x99 byte Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t3 gt OxAO Transmit one 0x11 byte Received one 0x11 byte Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t4 gt 1 Transmit one 0x13 byte Received one 0x13 byte Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t5 gt 0x5D Transmit two 0x19 bytes Received two 0x19 bytes Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t6 gt 0x77 Transmit two 0x99 bytes Received two 0x99 bytes Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t7 gt 2 Transmit two 0x11 bytes Received two 0x11 bytes Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t8 gt Transmit two 0x13 bytes Received two 0x13 bytes Yes Yes l
69. the modem will automatically connect with the normal Phase 1 and Phase 2 negotiation unless specifically commanded not to Two AT commands control this feature AT PQC and AT PSS The AT PQC command controls the enabling and disabling of shortened Phase 1 and Phase 2 individually according to Table 108 It is recommended that both shortened phases be used to realize the maximum reduction in connect time The possible settings of the AT PSS command are shown in Table 109 The AT PSS command be used to force quick connect by setting AT PSS 1 however this is not recommended because calling server that does not support this feature will result in a failed connection Table 107 Possible Settings Value Description 0 Deny V 92 Modem on Hold Request 1 Grant MOH with 10 second timeout 2 Grant MOH with 20 second timeout 3 Grant MOH with 30 second timeout 4 Grant MOH with 40 second timeout 5 Grant MOH with 1 minute timeout 6 Grant MOH with 2 minute timeout 7 Grant MOH with 3 minute timeout 8 Grant MOH with 4 minute timeout 9 Grant MOH with 6 minute timeout 10 Grant MOH with 8 minute timeout 11 Grant MOH with 12 minute timeout 12 Grant MOH with 16 minute timeout 13 Grant MOH with indefinite timeout Rev 1 3 171 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 108 Parameters Value Description Enable Short Phase 1 and Short Phase 2 Enable Sho
70. 0x0014 UA3 0x012G UA4 0x0014 UA5 0x012G UA6 0x0014 Nigeria Call Waiting Tone 400 2 0 0 2 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x00C8 UA1 0x0014 Oman Waiting Tone 425 0 3 1 0 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x001E 1 0x0064 Papua New Guinea Waiting Tone 425 0 04 10 0 0 04 20 0 0 04 20 0 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x0004 1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0004 UA3 0x07D0 UA4 0x0004 UA5 0x07D0 Paraguay Waiting Tone 950 950 1400 0 65 0 325 0 125 1 3 2 6 U9F 0x0007 0x0041 1 0x0021 2 0 000 0 0082 4 0x0104 Poland Waiting Tone 425 0 15 0 15 0 15 4 0 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x000F UA1 0x000F 2 0x000F 0x0190 Portugal Call Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 5 0 U9F 0x0003 0x0014 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x01F4 158 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Russia Waiting Tone 950 1400 1800 3x0 333 1 0 U9F 0x0007 U9F 0x0000 27 UAO 0 0032 St Kitts and Nevis Waiting Tone 440 0 5 10 0 0 5 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 U9F 0x0003 Li UAO 0x0014 St Lucia K 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0
71. 1 Numeric mode Result code CR 2 Response for ATDn mmm is silence is not found 3 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 Si2434 and Si2415 4 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 and Si2434 5 Xis not preceded by lt CR gt lt LF gt 6 This message is supported only on the Si2493 and Si2457 7 44 with data compression disabled DS 0 emits this result code 8 If data compression is disabled DS Q the modem returns the message PROTOCOL V42 Rev 1 3 85 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 43 Result Codes Continued Numeric Meaning Verbal Response XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 80 MNP2 protocol PROTOCOL Set with W command ALTERNATE CLASS 2 81 MNP3 protocol PROTOCOL Set with W command ALTERNATE CLASS 82 MNP4 protocol PROTOCOL Set with W command ALTERNATE CLASS 4 83 MNP5 protocol PROTOCOL Set with W command ALTERNATE CLASS 5 84 V 44 protocol PROTOCOL V 448 Set with DR command 90 Link established at 38666 CONNECT 386669 X X X X X 91 Link established at 40000 CONNECT 400008 X X X X X 92 Link established at 41333 CONNECT 413336 X X X X X 93 Link established at 42666 CONNECT 426669 X X X X X 94 Link established at 44000 CONNECT 440008 X X X X X 95 Link established at 45333 CONNECT 453338 X X X X X 96 Link established at 46666 CONNECT 466666 X X X X X 97 Link established
72. 10 2 Method 2 Single Off Hook Transition Use this method if it is undesirable for the modem to go off hook more than once or to DTMF dial a single digit This method is somewhat more complicated and is best illustrated with an example dialing the number 1234 below Set bit 7 of U register 7A U7A 7 DOP 1 and send ATDT1 CR Dial the first digit using and wait for a response A response of OK indicates that DTMF digit 1 was sent and the rest of the digits can be dialed If a response of NO DIALTONE is received the command failed because there was no dial tone no line available and the call cannot be completed If a response of OK is received after sending ATDT1 CR continue by sending ATDTW CR to perform the second dial tone detection and wait for a response A response of NO DIALTONE indicates that no dial tone was detected for two seconds and the line is DTMF capable Complete the dialing by sending ATDT2345 lt CR gt dial beginning with the second number since the first number was successfully sent initially If an OK dial tone present was received after the the line requires pulse dialing Pulse dial the entire telephone number using ATDP12345 CR 6 10 3 Method 3 Adaptive Dialing Adaptive dialing attempts to dial with DTMF then falls back to pulse dialing It is enabled with bit 6 of U7A If bit 6 is set the first digit is dialed with DTMF and the ISOmodem waits two
73. 100 ns EESD output setup time EOSU 500 ns EESD output hold time EOH 500 ns EECS asserted to EECLK positive edge ECSS 500 ns 1 3 31 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 28 EEPROM Timing Parameter Symbol Min Typ Max Unit EESD tristated before last falling EECLK edge during read cycle Last positive half of EECLK cycle is extended to provide EOZ 100 both 500 ns minimum EOH and 100 ns EESD before EECLK is falling edge EECS disable time between accesses ECSW 500 ns EECS asserted after final EECLK edge ECSH 1 us Note EESD output at negative EECLK edge ECLK EOZ NS E EOH Ce X X X d 4 EISU EIH EOSU EDH ECSS ECSH ECSW EEPROM Data Format EESD lt 8 01 instruction gt 16 bit address 8 bit data gt EECS Figure 11 EEPROM Serial Timing 32 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 6 2 Three Wire SPI Interface to EEPROM To enable the 3 wire SPI interface to EEPROM on the 24 pin TSSOP package appropriate pins must be reset strapped according to Table 6 on page 14 or Table 8 on page 15 depending on the interface selected The EEPROM option is not available on the 24 TSSOP package if the parallel host interface is selected Figure 12 shows the connection diagram for the 3 wire SPI interface to EEPROM A four wire
74. 103 through V 34 can be tested by connecting the modems through a telephone line simulator such as Teltone TLS 3 A call can be placed or received in either direction at the speed set in the modems test script must be written for a computer to control the dialing monitor the call progress send a file and compare the received and sent file Figure 46 illustrates this test configuration Reference Modem Test Computer Teltone TLS 3 Modem Under Test Figure 46 Bell 103 V 34 Modem Functional Test Connection 250 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 V 90 modems must be tested with a digital modem such as the USR Courier If a digital modem isn t used as illustrated in Figure 47 the highest connection speed a V 90 modem will support is 33 6 kbps A call can be placed or received in either direction at the speed set in the modems A test script must be written for a computer to control the dialing monitor the call progress send a file and compare the received and sent files Figure 47 illustrates this test configuration Teltone ILS 2000 ISDN Terminal Adaptor ISDN Modem Modem Under Test Figure 47 V 90 Modem Functional Test Connection Table 151 compares the coverage of amp T2 amp T3 and full bidirectional functional testing Table 151 Test Coverage Circuit or Function amp T2 amp T3 Functional Test Si24xx chip Yes Yes Yes 5
75. 2 Speaker on continuously ATMO Turn off speaker AT Uhh xxxx hh is U register and xxxx is the hex value to be written Write register AT Rhh hh is U register Read a U register AT R Read all U registers ATA Send Answer Tone for 3 seconds AT U4D 0008 ATXO ATDT Send Calling Tone Connect test modem and remote modem through a telephone line sim ulator Configure test modem without protocol Set test modem 10 255 Connect phone in parallel to remote modem Set remote modem to desired modulation Dial remote modem and connect Take parallel phone off hook Remove power from remote modem Test modem transmits indefinitely Transmit a specific modulation Homologation testing requires that the ISOmodem signal output be measured for each modulation and data rate The AT amp T3 command establishes an analog loopback connection to the phone line and places the modem in data mode The modulation is controlled by the amp H command This command is insufficient for homologation for several reasons m It is not possible to configure the output tone to be as if from the answering or originating modem m tis not possible to configure the data rate used in an analoop connection within a given modulation m Three data patterns need to be sent during output testing all marks all spaces and random data Once transmission with automatic data generation is initiated the modem goes off hook and begins to transmit the data in the
76. 4 Attenuation dB re 50 Ohms 003 01 1 10 100 Frequency MHz Eliminating common mode EMI from telephone lines handset cords and LANs can be done quickly and easily with these plug in filter modules One two and four line two four and eight wire versions are available with RJ11 RJ14 or RJ45 standard termina tions They re designed to help meet FCC Part 15 and 68 as European CCITT and CISPR 22 requirements Part A B c c number Lines max max min max TREF RJ11 1 068172 084213 24541153 5 549407 TRF RJ14 2 088 17 2 09084213 4540153 5 54407 TRF RJ45 8 4 089226 08321 4 2426 1082 5261335 Figure 49 Published Coilcraft TRF RJ11 Filter Performance Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 255 AN93 10 6 Debugging the DTE interface A hardware based serial RS232 monitoring product such as the Parascope Plus is an invaluable tool for debugging the DTE DCE Interface It captures and records details of DTE DCE interaction Hexadecimal and bit shifted views are possible and it timestamps every character exchanged with much greater precision than a software based monitor It is sold by FETEST at http www fetest com FELINE WinXL Examine Buffer Captured Data Line Data TOK 90 Ble Setup View Run Examine Tool Options Window Help To To To PC DCE Power Printer Port H TEAR Al PIRE 7b5d 7bof ifchf 159 76 11 14 ATEORRFURRE RFURR
77. 50 V 10 C3 0 01 pF 250 V 10 L3 3 3 mH gt 120 mA 10 O 10 Coilcraft RFB0810 332 or equivalent L4 10 mH gt 40 mA 10 10 Coilcraft RFB0810 103 or equivalent SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 45 AN93 SJOljIoede 2 OWA IINA suonounj 01 810615 781 941614 13938 IT sor 810 q SL HL bara 0Q 1NI AXLAT 1 1 1 0 0953 aod I 80 69 n i 8 5 l 9 pow 89 so 1 ZO3HA g au GERIN I sera 001 30 eso 180 12 vo er L 1 vorstiveizsieevzis P i zioa uorado suorssrug lt lt ue 9r A 8886 asa t i 19 ay 820 1 I I vr veo asosla zu zo ea Four v 1 su i yr vio SO3a 0V LNOMTO NM yr 190 vo so OQ LNI i 190 Ow1x s eoueginisiq 1PUOH utr Bye x dw m m pg m
78. Bit6 BitS Bit4 Bit2 Bit1 15 14 13 12 11 10 U4D MOD1 TOCT NHFP NHFD CLPD FTP SPDM GT18 GT55 CTE U53 MOD2 REV U54 CALT OHCT 062 DAAC1 OHS2 FOH DL U63 DAAC3 LCS ACT U65 DAAC4 PWM PDN PDL G U66 DAAC5 FDT 067 ILIM DCR OHS DCV RZ RT U68 ITC2 BTE ROV BTD U6A ITC4 501 500 OVL U6C LVS LVS U6E CK1 R1 HRS U6F PTME PTMR U70 100 HES TES CIDM OCDM PPDM RIM DCDM CID OCD PPD RI DCD U71 IO1 COMP PRT U76 GEN1 OHSR FACL DCL ACL U77 GEN2 IST HOI AOC OHT 078 5 079 4 LVCS U7A GENA ARMLO DOP ADD HDLC FAST U7C GENC RIGPO RIG POEN U7D GEND NLM TCAL CALD ATZD FDP U80 XMITDEL V22F V22FCDEL CDF U87 SAM MINT SERM FSMS XMTT UAA V29MODE RUDE 29 8 96 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 2 000 016 Dial Tone Detect Filter Registers 000 013 set the biquad filter coefficients for stages 1 4 of the dial tone detection filter 014 015 and U16 set the dial tone detection output scaler on threshold and off threshold respectively The thresholds are empirically found scalars and have no units These coefficients are programmed as 16 bit two s complement values All AO values are in 3 12 format where 1 0 0x1000 All other coefficients are in 1 14 format where 1 0 0xC000 Default settings meet FCC requirements Additionally register U34 sets the time window in which a dial tone can be detected Register U35 sets the minimum time within the U34
79. DAA is normally represented by a 50 O slope as shown in Figure 13 but can be changed to an 800 O slope by setting the DCR bit This higher dc termination presents a higher resistance to the line as the loop current increases FCC DCT Mode Voltage Across DAA V 6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 11 Loop Current A Figure 13 FCC Mode I V Characteristics DCV 1 0 11 MINI 1 0 00 For applications requiring current limiting per the legacy TBR21 standard the ILIM bit may be set to select this mode In this mode the dc I V curve is changed to a 2000 slope above 40 mA as shown in Figure 14 This allows the DAA to operate with a 50 V 230 O feed which results in the highest current possible in the old TBR21 standard TBR21 DCT Mode Voltage Across DAA V 5 015 02 025 03 035 04 045 05 055 06 Loop Current A Figure 14 TBR21 Legacy Mode I V Characteristics DCV 1 0 11 MINI 1 0 00 The MINI 1 0 bits select the minimum operational loop current for the DAA and the DCV 1 0 bits adjust the DCT pin voltage which affects the Tip to Ring voltage of the DAA These bits allow important trade offs to be made between signal headroom and minimum operational loop current Increasing the Tip Ring voltage increases signal headroom whereas decreasing the voltage allows compliance to PTT standards in low voltage countries such as Japan or Malaysia Increasing the minimum operational loop c
80. Handset Review OGM Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Local Modem Actions Host Result Codes Data AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec Configure Si3000 Register 1 Enable speaker driver AT U72 0110 OK Disable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Enable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Mute Line In AT U72 05B3 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Enable MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain AT U72 065C OK Disable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain AT U72 075E OK Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation Set the RS232 to Si3000 transmit gain K b UB8 for TAM Hands Free 206 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 130 TAM Handset Review OGM Continued 5 4 Select G 711U 4 8 bit 64 kbps format The voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM POM file Trigger transmit operation lt DLE gt lt u gt TX Underrun Appears at the start of VTX before transmit data are seen Voice Stream Transmit OGM voice stream During voice stream capture the user can adjust the UB8 value via the
81. ISOmodem in EPOS Applications 260 A V 29 FastPOS Sample Program as ERA 4 Eden 261 Appendix B Line Audio Recording 273 When to Use Audio Recording ek RR x Rex RR omi Re Reed ut 273 Times When Audio Recording May 273 Hardware Set D xo hy eus te NOUS dore ale ing chan 273 Audio Playback arid Analysis ERG EUR ERES BETIS ERES 279 Examples of Line Impairments 288 Appendix C Parallel SPI Interface Software Implementation 290 Software Description RR RUM Metu LEE tes 292 Compiler Option Dot Comimgnds 5 29 446434 I ar bee p oe eek Pee EE CEDE 299 Modem Operation 5522 Xd RE eet ee tees sot ES Ed 299 Modem Interrupt Service Sample Code 300 Document Change List icicle viu cx a pa e E ge 303 Contactiinformationi ca ace oy doas rd A wat EC ida Do a e ers 304 8 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 1 1 Selection Guide Tables 1 through 3 list the modulations protocols carriers tones and interface modes supported by the Si2494 39 and Si2493 57 34 15 04 ISOmodem family The 512493 supports all modulations and protocols from Bell 103 thr
82. ITU T V 32bis default for Si2415 V34 ITU T V 34 default for Si2434 V90 ITU T V 90 default for Si2457 V92 ITU T V 92 default for 512493 B Automatic modulation negotiation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default C Min Tx rate Specifies minimum transmission rate 0 Not configurable always set to 0 D Max Tx rate Specifies highest transmission rate If not specified it is determined by the carrier and automode settings V21 300 V32 9600 V90 33600 V22 1200 V32B 14400 V92 48000 V22B 2400 V34 33600 E Min Rx rate Specifies minimum receive rate 0 Not configurable always set to 0 F Max Rx rate Specifies maximum receive rate If not specified set to 0 it is determined by the carrier and automode settings V21 300 V32 9600 V90 54666 V22 1200 V32B 14400 V92 54666 V22B 2400 V34 33600 PCW X Controls the action to be taken upon detection of call waiting Mode Toggle RI and collect type II Caller ID if enabled by VCID Hang up Ignore call waiting PIG X Mode Enable PCM upstream 0 1 2 Controls the use of PCM upstream in a V 92 DCE X 0 1 Disable PCM upstream PMH X Controls the modem on hold procedures X 0 Enables V 92 MOH 1 Disables V 92 MOH PMHF X V 92 MOH hook flash This command causes the DCE to go on hook and then return off hook If this command is initiated and the modem is not On Hold Error is returned SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 71 AN93
83. Interrupt active low 2 2 3 UART Interface Operation The UART interface allows the host processor to communicate with the modem controller through a UART driver In this mode the modem is analogous to an external box modem The interface pins are 5 V tolerant and communicate with TTL compatible low voltage CMOS levels RS232 interface chips such as those used on the modem evaluation board can be used to make the UART interface directly compatible with a PC or terminal serial port 2 2 3 1 UART Options The DTE rate is set by the autobaud feature after reset When autobaud is disabled the UART is configured to 19 2 kbps 8 bit data no parity and 1 stop bit on reset The UART data rate is programmable from 300 bps to 307 2 kbps with the AT Tn command see Table 42 Extended Command Set on page 81 After the AT Tn command is issued the ISOmodem echoes the result code at the old DTE rate After the result code is sent all subsequent communication is at the new DTE rate The DTE baud clock is within the modem crystal tolerance typically 50 ppm except for DTE rates that are uneven multiples of the modem clock All DTE rates are within the 1 2 5 required by the V 14 specification Table 18 shows the ideal DTE rate the actual DTE rate and the approximate error Rev 1 3 19 SILICON LABS AN93 The UART interface synchronizes on the start bits of incoming characters and samples the data bit fie
84. Off Hook the voice driver should use the command sequence in Table 141 to return to the Handset mode Note the voice driver is responsible for tracking the handset hook switch state Table 141 Speakerphone to Handset Transition Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result Codes Data Local Modem Actions AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec AT U72 0110 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Enable speaker driver Disable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Enable MBIAS output AT U72 05B3 OK Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Mute Line In 20 dB MIC input gain Enable MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter AT U72 065C OK Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Disable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR 222 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 141 Speakerphone to Handset Transition Continued AT U72 0900 OK Configure Si3000 Register 9 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT VSP 0 OK Select handset voice path See Figure 29 on page 188 for details AT U199 amp FFF5 OK Enable the microphone and speaker paths to the codec 7 7 11 Termination A SP Button Off Event Handset On Hook will cause
85. The longer words that are implied by the B5 8P1 amp B6 8X1 commands are not allowed These commands should not be used Rev 1 3 23 SILICON LABS TX FIFO 14 Characters 11 Bits to Data Bus Shared Serial Parallel Parallel I F Register 0 CONTROL RX FIFO 12 Characters lt gt Parallel I F Register 1 2 D D D D D MUX D D D 3 16 17 18 22 23 24 4 8 Parallel Interface Unique RD WR CS 9 10 11 c c 3 5 c Q 5 5 c o E 3 v E wre amp 15 Figure 6 Parallel Interface 24 Rev 1 3 SI ICON LABS AN93 Table 21 Hardware Interface Register Bit Map Ao RD WR Action Register 07 06 D5 D4 D2 DO 0 0 1 Read HIRO Modem data or command from receive FIFO 0 1 0 Write Modem data or command to transmit FIFO 1 0 1 Read HIR1 RXF TXE REM INTM INT ESC RTS CTS 1 1 0 Write RXF INTM Note ESC RTS n a Note REM and INT are read only bits 2 2 4 1 Hardware Interface Register 0 Hardware Interface Register 0 HIRO is the eight bit wide read write location where modem data and commands are exchanged with the host Writing a byte to the HIRO adds that byte to the modem s transmit F
86. UAO 0x0032 islands Waiting Tone 440 0 5 10 0 0 5 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 U9F 0x0000 0 001 United States 440 0 3 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x001E UA3 0x03E8 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0014 Uruguay Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 4 4 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x01B8 2 U9F 0x0003 Vanuatu 425 0 3 10 0 0x001E UA1 0x03E8 Call Waiti U9F 0x0003 Zimbabwe at 523 659 1 5 1 5 0x0096 UA1 0x0096 Note Explanation of Symbols 1xf2 is modulated by f2 f1 f2 the juxtaposition of two frequencies f1 and f2 without modulation f1 f2 f1 is followed by f2 f1 f2 in some exchanges frequency f1 is used and in others frequency f2 is used 160 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 6 Intrusion Parallel Phone Detection The modem may share a telephone line with a variety of other devices especially telephones In most cases the modem has lower priority for access to the phone line Someone dialing 911 in an emergency for example has a higher priority than a set top box updating billing information If someone is using a telephone the modem should not go off hook If someone picks up a phone while the modem is connected or dialing the modem should drop the connection and allow the phone call to proceed The modem must monitor the phone line for intrusion in both the on hook and off hook conditions 6 6 1 On Hook Condition When the ISOmodem is the U7
87. V 42bis is in use in receive direction only DR V42B TD V 42bis is in use in transmit directions only DR V44 Rec V 44 is in use in both directions DR V44 RD Rec V 44 is in use in receive direction only DR V44 TD Rec V 44 is in use in transmit directions only SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 65 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Controls V 42bis data compression function A Direction 0 No compression V 42bis PO 0 1 Transmit only 4DS 2 Receive only ABCD 3 Both Directions V 42bis PO 11 B Compression negotiation 0 Do not disconnect if Rec V 42 is not negotiated 1 Disconnect is Rec V 42 is not negotiated C Max dict 512 to 65535 D Max string 6 to 250 Controls V 44 data compression function A Direction 0 No compression V 42bis PO 0 1 Transmit only 2 Receive only 3 Both Directions V 42bis PO 11 B Compression negotiation 0 Do not disconnect if Rec V 42 is not negotiated 4DS44 1 Disconnect is Rec V 42 is not negotiated A B C D E F G C Capability H I 0 Stream method 1 Packet method 2 Multi packet method Max_codewords_ tx 256 to 65536 Max_codewords_ rx 256 to 65536 Max string tx 32 to 255 Max string rx 32 to 255 Max history tx gt 512 history rx gt 512 Note Si2493 only Enable synchronous access mode A specifies the mode of operation when initiating a modem connection D Disable synchronous access mode 6
88. Volume Volume Select Select Select Advanced crystal WDM Audio Figure 53 Sounds and Multimedia Properties Setting PC Microphone Input for Recording Windows 98 Use the following procedure 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Multimedia Properties to open the Multimedia Properties window 2 Select the Audio tab and then the Recording icon to open the Recording Control window 3 Select Microphone as input and adjust the balance and volume Rev 1 3 275 SILICON LABS AN93 Multimedia Properties 2 Video MIDI CD Music Devices Playback Preferred device zm Aureal Vortex Playback To select advanced options click Advanced Properties m Recording To select advanced options click Options Help Setting Microphone Line In CD ROM StereoMixer Balance Balance Balance pod pu Use only preferred devices Show volume control on the taskbar Volume Volume Volume Select Select Select Figure 54 Multimedia Properties C Microphone Input for Recording Windows XP Use the following procedure 1 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Multimedia Properties to open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window Select A Q Select the Audio tab and then the Sound Recording volume button to open the Recording Control
89. X X X 11 Link established at 4800 CONNECT 4800 X X X X X 12 Link established at 9600 CONNECT 9600 X X X X X 14 Link established at 19200 CONNECT 192004 X X X X X 15 Link established at 7200 CONNECT 72003 X X X X X 16 Link established at 12000 CONNECT 120003 X X X X X 17 Link established at 14400 CONNECT 14400 X X X X X 18 Link established at 16800 CONNECT 16800 X X X X X 19 Link established at 21600 CONNECT 216004 X X X X X 20 Link established at 24000 CONNECT 240004 X X X X X 21 Link established at 26400 CONNECT 26400 X X X X X 22 Link established at 28800 CONNECT 288004 X X X X X 23 Link established at 31200 CONNECT 312004 X X X X X 24 Link established at 33600 CONNECT 336004 X X X X X 30 Caller ID mark detected CIDM X X X X X X 31 Hookswitch flash detected FLASH X X X X X X Notes 1 Numeric mode Result code CR 2 Response for ATDn mmm is silence is not found 3 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 Si2434 and Si2415 4 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 and Si2434 5 Xis not preceded by lt CR gt lt LF gt 6 This message is supported only on the Si2493 and Si2457 7 44 with data compression disabled 05 0 emits this result code 8 If data compression is disabled DS Q the modem returns the message PROTOCOL V42 84 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 43 Result Codes Continued
90. accept the legacy TBR21 specification still accept their previous settings It is advantageous in terms of heat dissipation to disable the TBR21 current limit In order to disable loop current limiting bit ILIM U67 9 should be set to zero after the GCI command Table 90 contains recommended updates to the GCI register settings The U register writes must be loaded after the command Some TBR21 and ES 203 021 countries require blacklisting This can be enabled with S42 1 Some also require a minimum period of time between calls that can be set with S50 6 6 2 2 1 Country Initialization Table Table 90 Country Initialization Table Country Initialization AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT GCl 51 AT U46 680 AT U52 1 ATS007 50 AT GCl 73 ATS007 80 AT GCl 9 AT U42 55 F Australia AT U4F 79 AT U52 2 5006 3 Algeria Argentina Armenia Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 134 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Austria AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Bahamas Defaults Bahrain AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Belarus AT GCl 73 Belgium AT GCl F AT U14 7 AT
91. actions taken by the modem that the host assumes and does not worry about In EPOS applications only the Framed Sub Mode is of importance Example sending an HDLC Frame containing the following bytes OxFF 0 11 The host will transmit the following byte stream Note that the Ox11 is sent as an lt EM gt lt t3 gt or 0x19 0 0 An EM flag or 0x19 0xB1 denotes the end of frame OxFF 0x19 0 0 0x19 OxB1 At the UART interface at TXD the bit representation is strt OxFF stp stp 0x19 stp strt OxAO0 stp strt 0x19 stp strt 0 1 1 0 111111111 0 10001001 1 0 000001011 0 10001001 1 0 10001101 The modem strips off the start and stop bits and reconstructs the original bytes OxFF 0x19 0 0 0x19 1 The transparency characters are resolved and since the EM flag is present the Frame Check Sequence is calculated Let us assume that the FCS is 0xC00F 16 bit FCS OxFF Ox11 0 0 OxOF Adding the HDLC flags and zero stuffing the bit stream is shown as follows The bit stream containing the OxFF and OxOF bytes have inserted zero bits The algorithm is fairly simple in that whenever there are five ones in a row a bit is inserted The inserted bits are shown in red This bit stream is then modulated and transmitted out to the DCE 16 bit FCS Flag 0 11 0 0 OxOF Flag 01111110 111110111 10001000 00000011 111010000 01111110 The receive process reverses the above steps The receiver hunts for HDLC flags and s
92. additional BOM components Through settings of two bits in two registers OHS Register U67 bit 6 and OHS2 Register 062 bit 8 a delay between the time the OH bit is cleared and the time the DAA actually goes on hook can be created which induces a slow ramp down of the loop current 3 5 Line Voltage and Loop Current Sensing There are two methods for line voltage and loop current sensing The first method is the legacy mode using U79 LVCS 4 0 The legacy mode is intended for backward compatibility in applications originally designed for the previous generation ISOmodem This mode is used in the intrusion detection algorithm implemented on the device The second method of measuring line voltage and loop current takes advantage of the improved resolution available on the Si3018 and Si3010 DAA chips U63 LCS 15 8 represents the value of off hook loop current as a non polar binary number with 1 1 mA bit resolution Accuracy is not guaranteed if the loop current is less than the minimum required for normal DAA operation U6C LVS 15 8 represents the value of on hook and off hook loop voltage as a signed two s complement number with a resolution of 1 V bit Rev 1 3 39 SILICON LABS AN93 Bit 15 represents the polarity of the Tip Ring voltage and a reversal of this bit represents a Tip Ring polarity reversal LVS 0x0000 if the Tip Ring voltage is less than 3 0 V and in the on hook state can be taken as no line connected
93. appears in the receive path regardless of how ESA C is programmed If ESA C 0 the modem transmits an abort character at the DCE at the point of the transmit underrun Additional transmit frames can then be transmitted normally If ESA C 1 the modem transmits an HDLC flag at the point of the transmit underrun and the DCE continues to send only HDLC flags until the host sends an lt EM gt lt resume gt command The lt EM gt lt resume gt is then followed by the lt EM gt lt unum gt command so that the host software can correct this problem A transmit overrun can occur if the host does not properly implement transmit flow control When a transmit overflow occurs the lt EM gt lt tover gt indicator always appears in the receive path A transmit overflow is considered to be a catastrophic failure and results in non deterministic behavior at the DCE It is recommended that the session be terminated immediately 130 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 It is expected that the lt EM gt lt tover gt and lt EM gt lt tunder gt indicators be encountered during system debug and designing the system software properly to avoid having these indicators occur should be the design goal In the receive direction assuming that the remote modem is another Si2493 57 34 15 this is the expected sequence at the remote receiver DTE representing the frame sequence of lt 0 10 gt lt 0 11 gt lt 0 12 gt lt 0 13 gt lt 0 14 gt lt 0
94. as a continuous DTMF tone through the AT Y1 command After issuing the commands AT amp H10 and AT Y2A a constant answer tone is produced and the modem is returned to command mode Both AT commands need to be sent for each and every tone to be produced Each of the two commands need to be on its own command line The tone continues until a character is received or the S7 timer expires After the command has been terminated the modem returns on hook and sends the NO CARRIER message For homologation testing it may be necessary to output the V 29 modulation with transmit data The FTM command includes additional codes given in Table 154 to initiate output with the transmit data specified in S40 Table 154 V 29 Data Rate FTM Transmit Modulation Data Rate 53 V 29 7200 55 V 29 9600 The AT FCLASS 0 command must be sent before any other analoop test or connection is made The modem must remain on hook for a time programmed in S register 50 Any attempt to go off hook is delayed by this time in 1 s units S 50 default is 3 seconds There is a double CONNECT message for analoop in B103 V 21 and V 23 for all options except WO 10 4 1 EMI The ISOmodem chipset and recommended DAA schematic are fully compliant with and pass all international electromagnetic emissions and conducted immunity tests including FCC parts 15 and 68 EN50082 1 Careful attention to the ISOmodem schematic page 47 bill of materials page 48 and
95. as a transition point between ok non zero VLS voice modes _ Setup on hook voice mode See Table 117 on page 190 for SH details This will return the modem to on hook state 4 Disable Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path This ensures ok codec tones are not sent to the FDV and DTMF 00 5 0 OK Disable DAA to Si3000 receive gain path This ensures line events such as CID and ring are not heard via the codec Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver AT U72 0108 OK Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 20 dB Line In gain Enable Line In AT U72 05D7 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT U199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for local ring tone alert tones AT U72 065E OK AT U72 075E OK Rev 1 3 199 SILICON LABS AN93 7 5 8 Speakerphone Transition In the Handset mode the SP Button On Event will trigger the transition from Handset to Speakerphone mode See 7 7 Speakerphone on page 212 for details on Speakerphone mode The voice driver
96. at 49333 CONNECT 493338 X X X X X 98 Link established at 50666 CONNECT 506666 X X X X X 99 Link established at 52000 CONNECT 520008 X X X X X 100 Link established at 53333 CONNECT 533336 X X X X X 101 Link established at 54666 CONNECT 546666 X X X X X 102 DTMF dial attempted ona UN OBTAINABLE NUMBER X X X X X X pulse dial only line Notes 1 Numeric mode Result code CR 2 Response for ATDn mmm is silence is not found 3 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 Si2434 and Si2415 4 This message is supported only on the Si2493 Si2457 and Si2434 5 Xis not preceded by lt CR gt lt LF gt 6 This message is supported only on the Si2493 and Si2457 7 44 with data compression disabled DS 0 emits this result code 8 If data compression is disabled DS Q the modem returns the message PROTOCOL V42 86 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 44 Disconnect Codes Disconnect Code Reason 8002 Handshake stalled 8 No dial tone detected 8008 No line available 9 No loop current detected 8009 Parallel phone pickup disconnect A No ringback B Busy signal detected D V 42 requested disconnect E MNP requested disconnect 10 Drop dead timer disconnect 8014 Loop current loss 8017 Remote modem requested disconnect 8018 8019 Soft reset command received 1a V 42 Protocol error 1b MNP Protocol error 801c
97. by removing the comment slashes at the appropriate line in the modem 80C51 h header file and include the files dot command loop c and test code c in the project build Contact Silicon Labs for more details on diagnostic commands Modem Operation Initialization After reset the ISOmodem does not by default have all the required features enabled When using the parallel or SPI mode Silicon Labs recommends the following initialization steps 1 Push the command AT U70 8F00 followed by carriage return into the transmit buffer The setting of U70 can vary but it is recommended that bit 15 HES be set to enable escape 2 Monitor the receive buffer for OK indicating that the command was successful 3 If a firmware upgrade needs to be programmed into the part push the upgrade into the transmit buffer one line at a time The OK prompt must be received after each line 4 Once the patch is written to the ISOmodem other commands be pushed into the transmit buffer 5 If software interrupts are required enable them by calling setControl SiINTM ENABLE NOW Silicon Labs also recommends the use of any firmware upgrade provided by Silicon Labs if called for in the errata for that revision Firmware upgrades address known problems with a given revision Making a Connection Making a connection in parallel or SPI mode is no different than in UART mode The application layer should keep track of whether the ISOmodem
98. can be executed must also be respected as described in 2 1 1 Reset Sequence on page 11 Characters must not be sent between the ATDT command and the protocol message During this time the modem is in a transition between command and data modes Any characters sent during this time will cause the connection attempt to fail Blind dialing dialing without waiting for dial tone is enabled by 0 ATX1 and Whether or not blind dialing is enabled use of the W dial modifier causes the modem to look for a dial tone before dialing the number string after the W For example an AT command string ATX1 DT 9 W123456 lt CR gt causes the modem to dial 9 immediately without detecting a dial tone but does not dial 123456 until a dial tone is detected AT commands and result codes are listed in Tables 39 43 The default settings are shown in bold Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Command Action Display Basic AT command mode settings see text for details Answer incoming call Re execute last command executes immediately not preceded by AT or followed by lt CR gt A Rev 1 3 59 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Dial The dial command which may be followed by one or more dial command modifiers dials a phone number Modifier Or
99. data stream so that a lower protocol layer will not need to be rewritten Hence the final special character set for V 80 includes 0x19 0x99 0x11 and 0x13 What happens if the data file being sent is a constant stream of 0x19 bytes By the single transparency rules one would then argue that the number of bytes sent across the DTE would effectively be doubled In order to ensure that the throughput does not become bloated by the EM Shielding provisions for all combinations of two special character combinations are created This adds yet another sixteen EM Shielding cases since there are 4 x 4 matrix of combinations of these special characters At this point the transparency cases for EM Shielding can thus guarantee the ability to send anything over the DTE with the special considerations of 7 vs 8 data bits XON and XOFF characters and throughput considerations However once the data channel has been architected the rest of the unused EM codes can be used for the primary purpose of V 80 which is the concept of hardware abstraction In EPOS applications there is little value in abstracting pins such as RI or RTS The value comes in abstracting the TXCLK and RXCLK of the Synchronous UART The Synchronous UART is the primary method of connecting to the Zilog 85C30 SCC V 80 allows the interface between the host and the modem to be a simple asynchronous DTE while allowing for synchronous operation performed by the modem itse
100. for Serbia and Montenegro 147 6 2 3 BlackliStIRQ ete sra p d 147 E RW Reime d Dips duum ca 148 6 3 1 Force Caller ID Monitor Always 148 6 3 2 Caller ID After Ring 148 6 3 3 UK Caller ID with Wetting 148 6 34 Caller Dice AE Ug euo se susu s 148 6 3 5 DTME Gallet IDEE 149 6 4 SMS SUPPONE ers PR TRE RIEN divert 149 6 5 Type Il Caller ID SAS Detection 151 Rev 1 3 5 SILICON LABS AN93 6 6 Intrusion Parallel Phone Detection 161 6 6 1 On Hook Condition 161 6 6 1 1 Line Not Present In Use Indication Method 1 Fixed 161 6 6 1 2 Line Not Present In Use Indication Method 2 Adaptive 162 6 6 2 Off Hook Condition 162 57 Modem On Fl 6 d sre Shia nbi rure a usss saqispa 164 6 7 1 Initiating 0 164 6 7 2 Receiving Modem On Hold Requests 165 6 8 HDLC Bit Errors on a Noisy Line 165 6 9 Overcurrent
101. gt does not shut off the transmitter The lt EM gt lt esc gt can also be followed by an ATO to resume the connection Rev 1 3 131 SILICON LABS AN93 6 Programming Examples The following programming examples are intended to facilitate the evaluation of various modem features and serve as example command strings that can be used singly or in combination to create the desired modem operation 6 1 Quick Reference Table 88 summarizes the modem function feature and the associated hardware pins AT commands S registers and U registers When a command string is created to enable a particular feature Table 88 should be reviewed to make sure all necessary commands and registers have been considered Table 88 Modem Feature vs Hardware AT Command and Register Setting Function Feature AT Commands S Registers U Registers Autobaud VT 16 T17 Blacklisting 42 43 44 Type Caller ID VCID VCDT U70 12 4 Type II Caller ID PCW VCID VCIDR Country dependent settings 00 04 U4D 10 1 0 U50 U52 U62 8 U67 6 3 2 1 0 U68 2 1 0 U69 6 5 4 DTE interface En Pn Qn VT n U DTMF dialing D 6 8 14 046 048 04 EEPROM E M Escape parallel SPl U70 15 Parallel Register 1 2 Escape UART B6 12 U70 13 15 Intrusion detection U6A 1 U69 2 U70 10 2 U76 15 9 8 7 5 4 0 U77 15 12 11 U78 15 14 7 0 U79
102. is 0 45 s thus BMOT 0 45 x 7200 0 8 m The busy cadence minimum total time is 0 45 s 0 45 s 0 9 s thus BMTT 0 9 x 7200 6480 0x1950 m The maximum total time is 0 55 s 0 55 s 1 1 s thus BDLT 1 1 0 9 x 7200 1440 0x05A0 The hexadecimal values are stored in the appropriate registers using the AT Uhh command Detection parameters can be wider than the minimum specifications This is often done in the modem defaults and other suggested settings so that one set of parameters can cover a broad number of different country requirements Maximum Cadence TOTAL Time 5 Minimum ON Time Minimum Cadence Cadence Delta BMOT TOTAL Time Time BDLT RMOT BMTT RDLT RMTT Figure 26 Cadence Timing 100 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 4 U31 U33 Ringback Cadence Registers U31 U32 and U33 set the ringback cadence minimum total time RMTT ringback cadence delta time RDLT and ringback cadence minimum on time RMOT see Table 51 Country specific settings for ringback cadences are specified as a range for on time minimum and maximum on and a range for off time minimum off and maximum The three values represented by RMTT RDLT and RMOT fully specify these ranges RMTT minimum total time is equal to the minimum on time plus the minimum off time RDLT allowable delta is equal to the maximum total time maximum on time plus the maximum off
103. is in command mode or data mode to determine whether to send an escape before sending commands The steps for making a connection are as follows 1 Clear the HIR1 ESC bit by calling setControl SiESC DISABLE NOW 2 Push the dial string into the transmit buffer and begin monitoring for the CONNECT response 3 The ISOmodem is now in data mode when the connect protocol response is received 4 The application layer can begin pushing data to the modem for transmission over the phone line Received data will accumulate in the receive buffer as a result of polling or interrupts Data Bursts The ISOmodem has internal buffering of approximately one kilobyte in each of the receive and transmit directions The modem attempts to empty and fill these buffers as quickly as possible This results in transmit and receive data bursts at a much faster rate than the modem connection The receive bursts are limited by the V 42 frame size and the V 42bis data compression ratio The higher the compression ratio the longer the burst will be The transmit bursts can be as large as one kilobyte when transmission first begins Once the buffer is full the transmit bursts are also limited by the V 42 frame size and compression ratio Rev 1 3 299 SILICON LABS AN93 Modem Interrupt Service Sample Code The following is the C code for the modem ISR Also refer to Figure 76 Parallel or SPI Port Interrupt Service Flowchart for more explanatio
104. issue was the case where the EPOS Terminal was calling a server that could answer either as V 29 FastPOS or V 22bis it was not possible for the modem to train down to V 22bis To address these issues a new interface has been implemented in the Rev D Si2493 57 34 15 and Rev A Si2494 39 and is available as a patch in the RevC ISOmodem This interface allows the call to start as a V 29 FastPOS and can train down to V 22bis if the server NAC can answer as either a V 29 FastPOS or V 22bis Please contact Silicon Laboratories Inc for the latest patch One of the improved aspects of this interface technique is to use two control lines RTS and DTR RTS controls direction of transfer while the DTR hangs up the line The tradeoff here is that RTS can no longer be used as a method of stopping the modem from sending data to the host This is generally not an issue as long as the DTE rate is greater than the DCE rate and the host can keep up with the receiver without having to resort to the negation of RTS The data are in V 80 format Just read and write data while toggling RTS as needed Assert RTS to transmit and de assert to receive This is called a push to talk paradigm The description here shows how to set up and use the modem for V 29 FastPOS and also provides a sample program along with both a DTE trace and WAV files that capture what is happening at both ends of the modem The only critical signals that are not recorded below but obviously con
105. layout guidelines ensure compliance with these international standards In designs with difficult layout constraints the addition of R12 and R13 to the C8 and C9 recommended capacitors may improve modem performance on emissions and conducted immunity For such designs a population option for R12 and R13 may allow additional flexibility for optimization after the printed circuit board has been completed Also under some layout conditions C8 and C9 may improve the immunity to telephone line transients Rev 1 3 253 SILICON LABS AN93 10 4 2 Safety Designs using the ISOmodem pass all overcurrent and overvoltage tests for UL1950 3rd Edition with the addition of a 1 25 A Fuse or PTC as shown in Figure 48 In a cost optimized design compliance to UL1950 does not always require overvoltage tests In the design cycle it is important to plan ahead and know which overvoltage tests will apply System level elements in the construction such as fire enclosure or spacing requirements need to be considered during the design stages Consult with a testing agency during product design to determine which tests will apply 1000 100 MHz 200 mA C8 TIP Fuse PTC RV1 1000 100 MHz 200 mA FB2 RING Figure 48 Circuits that Pass All UL1950 Overvoltage Tests 10 4 3 Surges Use the reference design described in 4 Hardware Design Reference on page 43 with through hole Y1 capacitors for C1 C2 C8 and C9 Use s
106. lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 120 Table 121 Handset Automatic Tone Dial Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data Perform automatic tone dial of 102 Modem will return OK Depending on the number of rings the host may receive ATDT102 OK lt DLE gt lt r gt events for ring back notifications If the line is busy a lt DLE gt lt b gt event will be sent to the host After connection the host will receive lt DLE gt lt q gt events during quiet periods of no voice 7 5 4 Call Manual Off Hook Tone Dial Table 122 lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 120 Table 122 Handset Manual Off Hook Dial Host to Modem Commands Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Data Codes Data The user is free to dial manually using the VTS com mands to create the DTMF digits 5 4697 1209 20 Generate DTMF 1 digit for 200 ms Generate DTMF 0 digit for 200 ms AT VTS 941 1336 20 OK Generate DTMF 2 digit for 200 ms Depending on the number of rings the host may receive lt DLE gt lt r gt events for ring back notifications If the line AT VTS 697 1336 20 OK is busy a lt DLE gt lt b gt event will be sent to the host After connection the host will receive lt DLE gt lt q gt events during quiet periods of no voice 7 5 5 Call Automatic Pulse Dial Tab
107. lt U84 Report LINE IN USE and U register remain on hook U84 LVCS Go off hook and establish connection A debouncing timer controlled by U registers 50 and 51 prevents polarity reversals from being detected as a loss of loop current The intrusion detection algorithm continues to operate if U77 HOI 11 is set In this case a parallel phone intrusion while off hook gives a LINE IN USE result code to indicate the ISOmodem has gone on hook due to a parallel phone intrusion Note This method may not be as desireable as method 2 particularly for low voltage lines Pros m Easy to understand and predict m Allows reference level control Cons m Chosen levels must work for all lines not adaptive Rev 1 3 161 SILICON LABS AN93 6 6 1 2 Line Not Present In Use Indication Method 2 Adaptive This method is enabled through 2 This feature checks the line status before going off hook and again before dialing While on hook the part monitors line voltage and updates U85 5 NLIU 15 0 with this value Before going off hook with the ATO or ATA command the ISOmodem reads the line voltage and compares it with the stored reference Loop Voltage Action 0 lt LVCS lt 6 25 x U85 Report NO LINE and remain on hook 6 25 96 x 085 lt LVCS lt 85 x 085 Report LINE IN USE and remain on hook 8596 x U85 LVCS Go off hook and establish connection To prevent polarit
108. lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjustments and update the VGT value for future use lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK Terminate the transmit operation The modem will respond with OK to denote the return to command mode AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec AT U72 0108 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output AT U72 05D7 OK Configure Si3000 Register 5 20 dB Line In gain Enable Line In 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter AT U72 065E OK Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR AT U72 0900 OK Configure Si3000 Register 9 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT U199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for local ring tone alert tones SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 207 AN93 7 6 3 3 Record Local ICM The Record Local ICM is identical to the Record OGM procedure provided in Table 129 on page 204 The main difference is that one of the ADPCM formats is generally used and the PCM file is stored with the other ICM files recorded
109. main block is provided in this document An optional diagnostic console level command set is also available to run on the application layer This command set is enabled using compiler options in the MCU development environment Refer to Compiler Option Dot Commands on page 299 for details 290 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Figure 75 illustrates the MCU software architecture and the MCU and modem hardware connections Optional Dot command shell Application layer Buffer management layer Interrupt service and or polling Hardware access layer 4 receive FIFOs Figure 75 MCU Software and Modem Interface Rev 1 3 291 SILICON LABS AN93 Software Description Hardware Access Layer This layer contains all the routines to access the MCU and modem hardware at the most basic level The application layer typically does not need to access these functions directly It consists of two source files m MCU hardware c m modem hardware c MCU hardware c This sample code will work only on the Silicon Labs MCU C8051F12xx platform used for this example This file contains code specific to the MCU hardware configuration such as port configuration oscillator configuration timers UART GPIOs etc modem hardware c This code can be ported to other applications with minimal changes needed to compile on a given host platform This file contains code to read from or write to the modem The two functions below
110. modulation selected by the existing amp H command Transmission continues until the ATH command is sent after escape 252 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 The data sent during amp T4 and amp T5 transmission tests is controlled by the S40 register The data rate for amp T4 and amp T5 commands is controlled by the existing amp G command In V 34 cases where a data rate may use multiple symbol rates the symbol rate is controlled by the S41 register If an invalid combination of data symbol rate is selected the modem chooses a valid symbol rate It is the responsibility of the operator to select valid combinations for testing Table 153 Symbol Data Rate S41 V 34 Symbol Rate Allowable Data Rates 0 default 2400 symbols second 2400 21600 1 2743 symbols second 4800 26400 2 2800 symbols second 4800 26400 3 3000 symbols second 4800 28800 4 3200 symbols second 4800 31200 5 3429 symbols second 7200 33600 After the amp T4 or amp T5 command is issued and the modulation output has begun a result code stating CONNECT followed by the data rate as if the output were an actual connection is sent The 300 bps rate does not give the speed after CONNECT The amp G4 command allows V 34 2400bps operation and amp G3 allows V 22bis 1200 bps operation The answer tone output must also be measured during homologation testing A bit in memory allows a continuous answer tone to be output in the same way
111. or reactivating DCD carrier loss debounce time 88 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 45 S Register Descriptions Continued Definition S Register Decimal Function Default Decimal Range Units 10 Carrier loss timer The time a remote modem carrier must be lost before the ISOmodem disconnects Set ting this timer to 255 disables the timer and the modem does not time out and disconnect If S10 is less than S9 even a momentary loss of carrier causes a disconnect Use for V 22bis and lower data rates 14 1 255 0 1 second Escape code guard timer Minimum guard time before and after to recognize a valid escape sequence 50 10 255 0 02 second Wait for dial tone delay timer This timer starts when the W command is executed in the dial string 0 255 seconds 24 Sleep inactivity time This is the time the modem operates in normal power mode with no activity on the UART parallel port SPI port or telephone line before entering the low power sleep mode and waking on ring The modem remains in the normal power mode regardless of activity if the timer is set to O 0 255 seconds 30 Disconnect activity timer Sets the length of time that the modem stays online before disconnecting with no activity on the UART parallel port SPI port or tele phone line ring hookswitch flash or Caller ID This feature is disabled if se
112. parameters Line interface settings include ac line impedance off hook voltage and current characteristics ringer sensitivity and transmit levels CID Caller ID settings are discussed in a separate section Tables 89 93 describe the registers and bits used for global configuration and the functions performed by each Many countries use some or all of the default FCC settings 6 2 1 DC Termination The ISOmodem offers a great deal of flexibility in setting dc termination Several bits can be used to adapt to particular country requirements and unusual line conditions The dc termination control bits are shown in Table 89 Table 89 DC Termination Control Bits Reg Bit Val Function 067 7 DCR DC Impedance Select U67 32 DCV DC Termination Select 7 10 LLV Special low voltage mode A detailed description of each bit is given in the relevant U register description section of this manual The following discussion centers on the use of these bits alone or in combination to meet particular country requirements Rev 1 3 133 SILICON LABS AN93 6 2 2 Country Configuration The modem default settings are for the US like countries Many countries use at least some of the default register settings Default values do not have to be written when configuring the modem to operate in a particular country assuming the modem was reset just prior to the configuration process To avoid confusion and
113. pin toggle 12 Reserved Read returns zero 11 ARMLO 0 Normal operation 1 Accomodate remote modem with large clock offset such as 340 ppm May degrade training for normal modems enable only when necessary 10 8 Reserved Read returns zero 7 DOP 0 Normal ATDTW operation 1 Use ATDTW for pulse tone dial detection see 6 10 Pulse Tone Dial Decision on page 169 for details 6 ADD Adaptive Dialing 1 Enable 0 z Disable Reserved Read returns zero NEWFC New 22 handshake enable This bit is mutually exclusive with bit 0 This bit makes hard coded 080 timing unnecessary Without this bit the appropriate value U80 is required 3 2 Reserved Read returns zero Note When HDLC or FAST is set the WO Wire mode setting must be used Rev 1 3 117 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 79 U7A Bit Map Continued Bit Name Function 1 HDLC _ Synchronous Mode 0 Normal asynchronous mode 1 Transparent HDLC mode 0 FAST Fast Connect This bit is mutually exclusive with bit 4 only one bit can be enabled at a given time 0 Normal modem handshake timing per ITU Bellcore standards 1 Fast connect modem handshake timing Note When HDLC or FAST is set the WO Wire mode setting must be used U7C is a bit mapped register with bits 15 5 and bits 3 1 reserved U7C resets to 0x0000 with a power on or manual reset Bit 4
114. possible errors the modem should be reset prior to reconfiguration between countries Some countries have unusual requirements For example registers U37 U40 set the number of pulses to dial digits 0 through 9 respectively By default digit 1 has a setting of 1 pulse digit 2 has a setting of 2 pulses and so on Digit O has a setting of OxA 10 decimal pulses This pulse arrangement is used nearly universally throughout the world However New Zealand requires ten pulses for 0 nine pulses for 1 eight pulses for 2 and so on Sweden on the other hand requires one pulse for 0 two pulses for 1 and so on Japan requires both the usual 10 pps pulse dialing and 20 pps pulse dialing To configure the modem for 20 pps set U42 PDBT 0x0022 043 PDMT 0x0010 and U45 PDIT 0x0258 The P command may also be used The Netherlands has a unique dial tone filter Other countries such as Japan have special low voltage loop requirements South Korea Poland and South Africa have special ringer impedance requirements Set all country specific parameters listed in Table 90 In order to use the command for a given country and modify one or more U registers it is necessary to execute the GCI command first then modify the desired register or registers The GCI command resets all U registers through U86 and S7 to factory defaults before applying the country specific settings A compliance laboratory can verify whether the countries that
115. provide basic access to the modem s Hardware Interface Registers char readModem tHIRREG eHIR This is the main access point for unconditionally reading the modem s data and status registers in parallel or SPI mode The function reads the HIRO when eHIR is HIRO 0 and the HIR1 when eHIR is 1 void writeModem tHIRREG eHIR char val char mask This is the main access point for unconditionally writing the modem s data and control registers in parallel or SPI mode The parameter eHIR can be HIRO 0 or HIR1 1 When writing to the HIR1 an optional mask value allows first reading the HIR1 from the modem by calling readModem and then setting or clearing only those bits that are high in mask Defined values for mask are define SiCTSb 0x01 Clear to send active low define SiRTSb 0x02 Request to send active low define SiESC 0x04 Escape to command mode define SiINT 0x08 Software interrupt define SiINTM 0x10 Enable software interrupt define SiRE 0x20 Receive FIFO empty define SiTXE 0x40 Transmit FIFO almost empty interrupt define SiRXF 0x80 Receive FIFO almost full interrupt Boolean OR combinations of the above are possible This allows setting and or clearing several bits simultaneously Thus a mask value of OxFF results in all bits of va1 being written to the HIR1 and a mask value of zero reads the and simply rewrites the value just read ignoring val The mask paramet
116. r cpInputRd OK r n 300 AT U87 010A Synch access mode config 0x0400 bit 10 Minimal transparency lt gt lt thru T4 during Rx 0 0100 bit 8 Upon connection immediately enter framed sub mode Ox000A bits 3 0 Wait for 10 bytes before starting xmission cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT U87 050ANr cpInputRd OKNr Mn 300 UT7A 1 Fast connect cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT U7A 1 r cpInputRd OK r n 300 AssertRTS false if hpTelNoFile fopen fnameTelno rb NULL fprintf stderr The Tel Number File is missing Nn exit 1 char caOutGoing 256 bool bValidLine GetFileTextLine caOutGoing printf Phone Number s n caOutGoing if bValidLine cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor caOutGoing cpInputRd CONNECT r n 120000 else fprintf stderr The Tel Number File is incorrect n exit 1 int iLength iCharCount 0 reset the total chars to 0 for data mode Skip waiting for the speed packet cpInputRd WaitForResponse 0x19 0xbe 0x24 0x24 0x19 0xb1 cpInputRd 6000 Long training happens now cpInputRd WaitForResponse caSNRM PKT STR cpInputRd 6000 Delay 50 Delay to allow the line to turn around 8 264 Rev 1 3 S SILICON LABS AN93 AssertRTS true RTS 1 for transmitting Delay 300 Delay to allow the line to turn around Alternatively use USE CTS
117. receive FIFO fills up to ten bytes or more Rev 1 3 293 SILICON LABS AN93 TXE Interrupt Transmit FIFO Almost Empty This interrupt occurs when only two bytes or fewer remain in the modem s transmit FIFO The interrupt can be cleared by writing more data to the FIFO to clear the interrupt condition or by clearing the TXE bit in the HIR1 However if the FIFO is emptied by the modem faster than it is being filled the TXE interrupt will either persist or trigger again If the TXE bit is cleared the interrupt is disabled and can be rearmed only when three bytes have been placed into the transmit FIFO The TXE interrupt may then trigger again when the transmit FIFO drops below the three byte threshold If the transmit FIFO is empty and new data need to be transmitted after the TXE interrupt has been cleared the TXE interrupt needs to be jump started by calling modemCommunicationUpdate Timer Interrupt Receive FIFO Not Empty This interrupt occurs whenever some data remained in the modem s receive FIFO without the FIFO being read for a period of time set in register U6F This happens typically at the end of a data burst when there aren t enough bytes in the receive FIFO to cause an RXF interrupt and no more data are received A timer interrupt can also occur when the receive FIFO is full if the RXF interrupt was disabled by clearing the RXF bit The timer is also reset when new received data are added to the receive FIFO The rese
118. return to command mode The answer tone continues until the ATH command is received or the S7 timer expires amp Z Enter low power wake on ring mode Notes 1 The initial number attempted to test for an outside line is controlled by S51 default 1 2 AT amp reflects the last AT amp P command issued but does not reflect any subsequent changes made by writing U registers with AT U TIP T 6000 q 513018 IL 10 HF RING Figure 25 Phone Line Termination Circuit Rev 1 3 79 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 41 Extended Command Set Command Action Display command settings see text for details B Report blacklist See also S42 register Cn Data compression 0 Disable V 42bis and MNP5 data compression 1 Enable V 42bis transmit and receive paths If MNP is selected N2 1 enables MNP5 in transmit and receive paths 2 Enable V 42bis transmit path only C3 Enable V 42bis in receive path only Answer mode 901 ISOmodem answers a in answer mode 902 ISOmodem answers in originate mode Automatic Line Status Detection After the V1 and V2 commands are issued the SOmodem automatically checks the telephone connection for whether a line is present If a line is present the ISOmodem automatically checks if the line is already in use Finally the ISOmodem checks line status both before going off h
119. should track the handset hook switch state such that if the user exits Speakerphone mode the system will switch back to Handset configuration without losing the active call Table 125 Handset to Speakerphone Transition Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver AT U72 0108 OK Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 20 dB Line In gain Enable Line In AT U72 05D7 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT U72 065E OK AT U72 075E OK Enable speakerphone voice path See Figure 29 on AT VSP 1 OK page 188 for details AT U199 amp FFF5 OK Enable the microphone and speaker paths to the codec 200 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 6 Telephone Answering Machine 7 6 1 Overview The Si2494 39 supports telephone answering machine TAM operations These parts use the V 253 command set to control operation This section cov
120. status of the 12 byte deep receive FIFO If RXF 0 the receive FIFO contains less than 10 bytes If RXF 1 the receive FIFO contains more than 9 bytes and is full or almost full Writing RXF 0 clears the interrupt Rev 1 3 25 SILICON LABS AN93 Bit 6 TXE is a read write bit that gives the status of the 14 byte deep transmit FIFO If TXE 0 the transmit FIFO contains three or more bytes If TXE 1 the transmit FIFO contains two or fewer bytes Writing TXE 0 clears the interrupt but does not change the state of TXE Bit 5 REM is a read only bit that indicates when the receive FIFO is empty If REM 0 the receive FIFO contains valid data If REM 1 the receive FIFO is empty The timer interrupt set by U6F ensures that the receive FIFO contents lt 9 bytes are serviced properly Bit 4 INTM is a read write bit that controls whether or not INT bit 3 triggers the INT pin Bit 3 INT is a read only bit that reports Interrupt status If INT 0 no interrupt has occurred If INT 1 an interrupt due to CID OCD PPD RI DCD 070 bits 4 3 2 1 0 respectively has occurred This bit is reset by l Bit 2 ESC is a read write bit that is functionally equivalent to the ESC pin in the serial mode The operation of this bit like the ESC pin is enabled by setting U70 15 HES 1 The use of bits 1 and 0 RTS and CTS has been deprecated for both parallel and SPI interfaces Instead the use of bits 6 and 5 TXE a
121. switch output that starts and stops a recording device We only use one of the output connectors since we not interested in the VOX mechanism Connect the audio output connector a 3 5 mm O D connector to the microphone input socket at the back of the computer The RJ11 connector from the Recorder Control should be connected to the Tip and Ring of the phone line being monitored Rev 1 3 273 SILICON LABS AN93 The larger of the two jacks 3 5 mm carries audio to the PC Connect the R11 jack in parallel with Tip Ring of modem Figure 52 Hardware Setup Setting PC Microphone Input for Recording Windows NT Use the following procedure 1 Click Start 2Settings Control Panel gt Sounds and Multimedia to open the Sounds and Multimedia Properties window 2 Click Audio Tab click Volume to open the Recording Control window 3 Select Microphone as input adjust balance and volume 274 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Sounds and Multimedia Properties Sounds Hardware Sound Playback Q Preferred device Crystal WDM Audio Volume Advanced Sound Recording Preferred device 1 Crystal WDM Audio Advanced MIDI Music Playback sia 255 Preferred device Recording control Options Help Stereo Mix CD Player Microphone Line In Balance Balance Balance Balance UK 4 Volume Volume
122. the ATDT to establish a synchronous access mode connection the following commands and registers require initialization MS ES ESA ITF 087 U7A As an example the closest equivalent to the Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode is the following initialization setting With either Synchronous Access Submode once a connection has been established payload data are multiplexed with command indicator information by use of lt EM gt shielding With lt EM gt shielding either of the two bytes 0x19 or 0x99 used to represent lt EM gt precedes a special command or special indicator Synchronous access mode lt EM gt shielding is designed to support XON XOFF handshaking As such the bytes 0x13 and 0x11 XON XOFF are considered to be special characters in the same way the 0x19 and 0x99 bytes used for lt gt are special Since the payload data are multiplexed with EM shielded command indicator and possibly XON XOFF characters Transparency lt EM gt codes are defined for the purpose of allowing the host software to send 0x13 0x11 0x19 and 0x99 bytes to from the DCE For example if one 0x99 character needs to be sent as payload the host software sends lt gt lt 0 76 gt instead For a complete list lt gt commands and statuses see Table 86 Table 85 Synchronous Access Mode Settings AT NO Required to disable MNP V 42 and other protocols AT ES 6 8 Enable synchronous access
123. the sound source and adjust the white noise level so that the level at the speakerphone s Tip Ring is 15 dBm Record the white noise level and disconnect the call Line Simulator White Noise Ref Remote 67079109 Telephone Hardware Mete System Online 4 Sy Tip amp Ring 15 dBm Figure 32 Transmit Gain Reference Measurements Figure 33 illustrates the setup used to set the transmit gain Here the modem has the AEC AES disabled with AT VSP 0 Using the Si24xx VMB call the remote phone and establish a voice call Use the command sequence in Table 134 Place the same sound source at a distance of one foot from the speakerphone s microphone Play out the same white noise as the near end speech through the sound source and adjust the transmit gain UB1 so that the level at the Si24xx Tip Ring is 15 dBm Record the calibrated UB1 value Rev 1 3 213 SILICON LABS AN93 Si24xx VMB Central Office or Line Simulator Microphone amp Speaker Wiring g White Noise Source Ref SINAD Telephone Hardware Shell System Offline Sy Tip amp Ring 15 dBm Figure 33 Transmit Gain Configuration 214 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 134 Transmit Receive Gain Calibration Dial Remote Telephone Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result Codes Data Local Modem Actions ATZ OK Reset the modem AT FCLASS 8 OK Enter v
124. the system to return to the TAM Hands Free mode Use the same configuration listed in Table 124 on page 199 Note the voice driver is responsible for tracking the handset hook switch state 7 8 Glossary AEC AES Convergence Rate DCE DLE DTE DTD Double Talk ETX ICM LEC OGM PSTN Single Talk TAM 7 9 References ITU T G711 ITU T G726 ITU T V 253 Acoustical Echo Canceller of speakerphone Acoustical Echo Suppressor of speakerphone Rate at which AEC or LEC converges Data Circuit terminating Equipment Data Link Escape 0x10 Data Terminal Equipment Double talk detector of AEC or LEC Both the near end and far end users talk End of Text 0x03 Incoming Message Line Echo Canceller of speakerphone Outgoing Message Public Switch Telephone Network Either the near end or far end user talks Telephone Answering Machine Pulse code modulation PCM of voice frequencies 11 1998 40 32 24 16 kbit s adaptive differential pulse code modulation ADPCM 12 1990 Control of voice related functions in a DCE by an asynchronous DTE 02 1998 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 223 AN93 8 Security Protocols The Si24xx ISOmodem can handle a variety of security protocols Two are specifically described here The Ademco Contact ID Protocol and the SIA protocol 8 1 Implementing the SIA Protocol The SIA protocol defines communication between an alarm panel and a central station In a traditional security Sys
125. then begins transmitting scrambled data or HDLC Flags The delay units are 1 600 s For example to command the modem to begin transmitting three seconds after the end of dialing 3 x 600 1800 0x0708 Issue command AT U80 8708 This register is only used when U7A 4 0 U80 XMITDEL Transmit Delay for V 22 Fast Connect Bit Name Function 15 V22FCDF 10 Normal operation default 1 Transmit scrambled data or HDLC flags after delay set in bits 14 0 14 0 V22FCDEL When V22FCDF 1 V22FCDEL is the delay between end of dialing and sending scrambled data or HDLC flags in 1 600 s units Default is 0x0168 600 ms When V22FCDEL 0 V22FCDEL is the delay between ANS tone detected to start of training SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 119 AN93 5 7 21 U87 Synchronous Access Mode Configuration Register U87 SAM Synchronous Access Mode Configuration Options Bit Name Function 15 11 Reserved Read returns zero 10 MINT Minimal Transparency Host software must always set this bit 0 Generate two byte lt EM gt transparency sequences This option will use codes lt EM gt lt T5 gt through RM T20 if possible for received data containing two back to back bytes requiring transparency Rev C and later 1 Generate one byte lt EM gt transparency sequences This option will only use codes lt EM gt lt T1 gt through lt EM gt lt T4 gt for received data Rev B
126. time minus the minimum total time RMTT RMOT is the minimum on time The values stored in the registers are the hexadecimal representation of the times in seconds multiplied by 7200 Default values meet FCC requirements Table 51 Ringback Cadence Registers Register Name Description Default U31 RMTT Ringback cadence minimum total time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x4650 U32 RDLT Ringback cadence delta in seconds multiplied by 7200 OxEF10 U33 RMOT Ringback cadence minimum on time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x1200 5 7 5 034 035 Dial Tone Timing Register U34 determines the period of time the modem attempts to detect a dial tone U35 sets the time within this window that the dial tone must be present in order to return a valid dial tone detection The value stored in U35 is the hexadecimal representation of the time in seconds multiplied by 7200 The value in U34 is the hexadecimal representation of the time in seconds multiplied by 1000 The time window represented in U34 must be larger than the dial tone present time represented in register U35 see Table 52 Table 52 Dial Tone Timing Register Register Name Description Default U34 DTWD Window to look for dial tone in seconds multiplied by 1000 0x1B58 U35 DMOT Minimum dial tone on time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x2D00 5 7 6 037 045 Pulse Dial Registers Registers 037 1740 set the number of pulses to dial digits 0
127. time within S44 seconds results in a BLACKLISTED result code If the blacklist mem ory is full any dial to a new number will result in a BLACKLIST FULL result code Numbers are added to the blacklist only if the modem connection fails The B command lists the numbers on the blacklists 0 disabled 1 enabled 0 disabled 0 1 43 Dial attempts to blacklist When blacklisting is enabled with S42 this value con trols the number of dial attempts that result in a num ber being blacklisted 44 Blacklist Timer Period during which blacklisting is active 180 0 255 seconds 50 Minimum on hook time Modem remains on hook for S50 seconds Any attempt to go off hook is delayed until this timer expires 0 255 seconds 51 Number to start checking for an outside PBX line 90 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 U Registers U registers user access registers are 16 bit registers written by the AT Uhh command and read by the AT R read all U registers command or AT Rhh read U register hh command See the AT command list in Table 39 on page 59 All values associated with the U registers the address and the value written to or read from the register are hexadecimal Some U registers are reserved and not available to the user Therefore there are gaps in the available U register address sequence Additionally some bits within available U registers are reserved
128. to be accurate in all respects at the time of publication but is subject to change without notice Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsibility for errors and omissions and disclaims responsibility for any consequences resulting from the use of information included herein Additionally Silicon Laboratories assumes no responsibility for the functioning of undescribed features or parameters Silicon Laboratories reserves the right to make changes without further notice Silicon Laboratories makes no warranty rep resentation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose nor does Silicon Laboratories assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit and specifically disclaims any and all liability including without limitation conse quential or incidental damages Silicon Laboratories products are not designed intended or authorized for use in applications intended to support or sustain life or for any other application in which the failure of the Silicon Laboratories product could create a situation where per sonal injury or death may occur Should Buyer purchase or use Silicon Laboratories products for any such unintended or unauthorized ap plication Buyer shall indemnify and hold Silicon Laboratories harmless against all claims and damages Silicon Laboratories Silicon Labs and ISOmodem are trademarks of Silicon Laboratories Inc Other products or brandnames mentioned he
129. trigger this transition See Table 136 on page 219 for configuration sequence 7 6 2 6 Handset Transition The Handset Raised Event will trigger this transition See Table 120 on page 197 for configuration sequence 7 6 3 TAM Handset Using the handset to record the OGM will result in better message quality The handset can also be used to screen messages in private The host will need to correctly process the Handset Raised Event to keep the modem on hook during record review operations 7 6 3 1 Record OGM The host will prompt the user to lift the handset to begin OGM recording The procedure restores the TAM Hands Free settings before completion Rev 1 3 203 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 129 TAM Handset Record OGM Modem to Host to Modem Commands Data Host Result Local Modem Actions Codes Data AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec Configure Si3000 Register 1 Enable speaker driver AT U72 0110 OK Disable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Enable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Mute Line In AT U72 05B3 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Enable MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain APUTA DEDE os Disable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain AT U72 075E OK En
130. will switch the modem to off hook state AT U0B1 0500 OK Restore Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path 00 5 0200 Restore DAA to Si3000 receive gain path Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver AT U72 0108 OK Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Enable Line In AT U72 0597 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX gain ON Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB gain AT U72 075E OK Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR Rev 1 3 219 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 136 Speakerphone Configuration Continued Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Local Modem Actions Result Codes Data Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT VSP 1 OK Enable speakerphone voice path See Figure 29 on page 188 for details Enable the microphone and speaker paths AT U199 amp FFF5 OK to the codec 7 7 5 Simplex Speakerphone Configuration Configuring the modem to automatically switch between local talker and remote talker is as follows m Forthe SSP auto switch VOX function set SSP FLAG to 1 U199 6 1 and SSP PTT to 0 U199
131. 0 Sets the duration of the first SAS tone ms 0x001E UA1 0x00A1 SC1 SAS cadence 1 Sets the duration of the first SAS silence ms 0x0000 UA2 0x00A2 SC2 SAS cadence 2 Sets the duration of the second SAS tone ms 0x0000 0 00 563 SAS cadence 3 Sets the duration of the second SAS silence ms 0 0000 UA4 0 00 4 504 SAS cadence 4 Sets the duration of the third SAS tone ms 0x0000 UA52 0x00A5 SC5 SAS cadence 5 Sets the duration of the third SAS silence ms 0x0000 UA62 0x00A6 SC6 SAS cadence 6 Sets the duration of the fourth SAS tone ms 0x0000 72 0x00A7 5 7 SAS cadence 7 Sets the duration of the fourth SAS silence ms 0x0000 UA8 0x00A8 SC8 SAS cadence 8 Sets the duration of the fifth SAS tone ms 0x0000 UA9 0x00A9 SC9 SAS cadence 9 Sets the duration of the fifth SAS silence ms 0x0000 UAA 0x00AA V29MODE This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 UIDA 0x01DA Delay ms to the response to an answer tone 0x0000 Notes 1 See Table 100 for details 2 See Table 101 for details Rev 1 3 95 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 1 U Register Summary Table 47 Bit Mapped U Register Summary Register Name Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit9 Bits Bit7
132. 017 HRXFIR21 0x0000 U196 0x0196 OUTLIM Output Limiter Threshold 0x5000 U197 0x0197 INLIM Input Limiter Threshold 0x2000 U199 0x0199 VPCTRL This is a bit mapped register U19A 0 019 AECHLEN Filter Length 0x0200 U19B 0x019B AECDLY AEC Adjustable Delay 0x001F U19C 0x019C AECREFG AEC Reference Gain 0x1000 U19D 0x019D AECMICG AEC Microphone Gain 0x1000 U19E 0x019E AECNRG This is a bit mapped register SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 183 AN93 Table 114 Voice Mode U Registers Continued Register Address Name Description Default U1A0 0x01A0 STXFIR1 0x0000 U1A1 0x01A1 STXFIR2 0x0000 U1A2 0x01A2 STXFIR3 0x0000 U1A3 0x01A3 STXFIR4 0x0000 U1A4 0x01A4 STXFIR5 0x0000 U1A5 0x01A5 STXFIR6 0x0000 U1A6 0x01A6 STXFIR7 0x0000 U1A7 0x01A7 STXFIR8 0x0000 U1A8 0x01A8 STXFIR9 0x0000 U1A9 0x01A9 STXFIR10 0x0000 U1AA STXFIR11 Speakerphone TX FIR Filter Coefficients 0x0000 U1AB 0x01AB STXFIR12 0x0000 U1AC 0x01AC STXFIR13 0x0000 U1AD 0x01AD STXFIR14 0x0000 U1AE 0 01 STXFIR15 0x0000 U1AF 0x01AF STXFIR16 0x0000 U1BO 0 0180 STXFIR17 0x0000 U1B1 0x01B1 STXFIR18 0x0000 U1B2 0x01B2 STXFIR19 0x0000 U1B3 0x01B3 STXFIR20 0x0000 U1B4 0x01B4 STXFIR21 0x0000 184 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 114 Voice Mode U Registers Continued
133. 06 UAO 0x0032 UA1 0x0032 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 153 AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers U9F 0x0005 China Waiting Tone 450 0 4 4 0 0x0028 UA1 0x0190 i U9F 0x0003 Croatia 425 0 3 8 0 0x001E UA1 0x0320 U9F 0x0003 T 0x000A 2 425 0 1 0 1 0 1 5 3 UA1 0x000A UA2 0x000A UA3 0x0212 Call Waitin U9F 0x0003 Czech Republic a 9 425 0 33 9 0 UAO 0x0021 UA1 0x0384 U9F 0x0000 Dominica Call Waiting UA0 0x0032 Commonwealth of Tone 1919 10 95 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 U9F 0x0003 Ecuador 425 0 2 0 6 0x0014 UA1 0x003C Estonia 950 1400 1800 3x 0 33 0 3 U9F 0x0003 Ethiopia 425 0 2 0 6 UAO 0x0014 UA1 0x003C U9F 0x0003 Finland Waiting Tone 425 0 15 8 0 UAO 0x000F UA1 0x0320 U9F 0x0003 UA0 0x0014 Germany Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 2 0 2 5 0 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x01F4 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x0050 Ghana Waiting Tone 400 0 8 0 2 0 3 3 2 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x001E UA3 0x0140 154 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Gibraltar
134. 070 100 This is a bit mapped register 0x2700 071 0x0071 IO1 This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U76 0x0076 GEN1 This is a bit mapped register 0x3240 U77 0x0077 GEN2 This is a bit mapped register 0x401E U78 0x0078 This is bit mapped register 0x0000 U79 0x0079 GEN4 This is a bit mapped register 0 00 U7A 0x007A GENA This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U7C 0x007C GENC This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U7D 0x007D GEND This is a bit mapped register 0x4001 U80 0x0080 This is a bit mapped register 0x0168 U83 0x0083 NOLN No Line threshold If V1 is set NOLN sets the threshold for 0x0001 determination of line present vs line not present 3 V bit U84 0x0084 LIUS Line in use threshold If V1 is set LIUS sets the threshold for 0x0007 determination of line in use vs line not in use 3 V bit U85 0x0085 NLIU Line in use No line threshold If 96 V2 is set sets the thresh 0x0000 old reference for the adaptive algorithm see 96 V2 V bit 94 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 46 U Register Descriptions Continued Register Address Name Description Default Hex Value U86 0x0086 V9AGG V 90 rate reduction in 1333 bps units The V 90 connect rate is 0x0000 reduced by this amount during negotiation U87 0x0087 SAMCO This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U9F 0x009F SASF SAS frequency detection 0x0000 UA02 0x00A0 SCO SAS cadence
135. 09 U15 0x0015 DTON Dial tone detection ON threshold 0x00A0 U16 0x0016 DTOF Dial tone detection OFF threshold 0x0070 U17 0x0017 BT1A0 Busy tone detection filters stage 1 biquad coefficients 0x0800 U18 0x0018 BT1B1 0x0000 U19 0x0019 BT1B2 0x0000 U1A 0x001A BT1A2 0x0000 U1B 0x001B BT1A1 0x0000 U1C 0x001C BT2A0 Busy tone detection filter stage 2 biquad coefficients 0x00A0 U1D 0x001D BT2B1 Ox6EF 1 U1E 0x001E BT2B2 OxC4F4 U1F 0x001F BT2A2 0 000 020 0 0020 2 1 0 0000 021 0 0021 Busy tone detection filter stage biquad coefficients 0x00A0 U22 0x0022 1 0 78 0 023 0 0023 2 0xC305 U24 0x0024 BT3A2 0x4000 U25 0x0025 1 0xB50A U26 0x0026 BT4A0 Busy tone detection filter stage 4 biquad coefficients 0x0400 U27 0x0027 BT4B1 0 7002 028 0x0028 2 0xC830 U29 0x0029 BT4A2 0x4000 U2A 0x002A BT4A1 0 80 2 028 0x002B BTK Busy tone detection filter output scaler 0x0009 U2C 0x002C BTON Busy tone detection ON threshold 0x00A0 U2D 0x002D BTOF Busy tone detection OFF threshold 0x0070 92 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 46 U Register Descriptions Continued Register Address Name Description Default Hex Value U2E 0x002bE BMTT Busy cadence minimum total time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x0870 U2F 0x002F BDLT Busy cadence delta in seconds multiplied by 7200 25 8 0
136. 1 Billing tone detected cleared by writing 0 110 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 69 U6A Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 Reserved Read returns zero 14 SQ1 Spark quenching See OHS2 13 Reserved Read returns zero 12 SQO Spark quenching See OHS2 11 3 Reserved Read returns zero 2 OVL Overload Detected This bit has the same function as ROV but clears itself after the overload has been removed This bit is only masked by the off hook counter and is not affected by the BTE bit 1 Reserved Read only value indeterminate 0 Reserved Read returns zero 5 7 18 U6C Line Voltage Status Register U6C contains the line voltage status register LVS and resets to Bits 7 0 are reserved and a read returns zero 5 7 19 UGE U7D Modem Control and Interface Registers Modem Control and Interface registers include registers U6E U70 U71 and 076 1079 These are bit mapped registers that control functions including TX RX gain clocking I O SSI codecs intrusion detection and LVCS line voltage current sense UGE controls the clockout divider Bits 15 13 and 7 0 are reserved U6E resets to with a power on or manual reset see Table 71 Bits 12 8 R1 control the R1 clockout divider A 196 608 MHz clock signal passes through a divide by R41 circuit to derive the CLKOUT signal If R1 2 00000 CLKOUT is disabled R1 is
137. 1 Loop Current Debouncing Registers 105 5 7 13 U52 Transmit Level Register 105 5 7 14 U53 Modem Control Register 2 106 5 7 15 U54 Calibration Timing Register 106 5 7 16 U62 U66 DAA Control 106 5 7 17 U67 U6A International Configuration Registers 108 5 7 18 U6C Line Voltage Status 111 5 7 19 UGE U7D Modem Control and Interface 111 5 7 20 U80 Transmit Delay for V 22 Fast 119 5 7 21 087 Synchronous Access Mode Configuration Register 120 5 7 22 V 29 Mode Register 121 5 7 23 UIDA Response and Answer Tone Delay Register 121 5 9 Firmmware Upgredes sa ERE Wr UE RUE e ord ug e 121 5 8 1 Method 1 ases u asa us La US e bU du 121 5 8 2 Method recto A Mert Cd kdo I et eine 122 5 8 9 122 5 9 Escape See RR E Reed ERU TR E eau rs 122 58 84 GERE ESCAS eu t bte e UM ERE ea eye 123 SII BIE ESCAPE 15 sua
138. 1 DL 0 Digital loopback beyond ISOcap interface 1 Digital loopback across ISOcap interface only 0 Reserved be set to zero 063 DAAC2 is a bit mapped register with bits 3 0 reserved and should be modified through a read modify write operation Bits 15 8 LCS function as an 8 bit unsigned measure of off hook loop current with a resolution of 1 1 mA bit Bits 7 4 ACT set the ac termination the Si3010 Si3018 presents to Tip and Ring The ac impedance setting is dictated by the certification requirements for the country in which the modem is used Table 64 U63 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 8 LCS Off hook loop current 1 1 mA bit 7 4 Termination Select ACT AC Termination 0000 Real 600 0011 220 Q 820 O 120 nF and 220 Q 820 O 115 nF 0100 370 620 310 nF 1111 Global complex impedance 3 0 Reserved Read returns 0011 U65 DAACA is a bit mapped register with bits 3 0 12 5 and 15 reserved Bits 1 0 and 6 5 must not be changed Bit 14 PWMG 0 default provides 0 dB gain to AOUT PWMG 1 provides a 6 dB gain to AOUT Bit 13 PDN 0 enables the device for normal operation PDN 1 completely powers down both the Si3018 10 and the Si24xx chips The bit takes effect at the carriage return of the AT command setting this bit high Once this bit is set the modem must be reset via the RESET pin to become active When reset the modem reverts to t
139. 11 OxC8EF A2 0x0000 0 000 0 4000 0 4000 A1 0x0000 0x0000 OxA7BE 0x8128 K 0x0009 320 630 0 0x0078 0x0210 0x0330 0x0330 B1 0 67 0 79 0 68 0 0 7235 B2 OxCAFA 0xC252 OxCB6C 0xC821 A2 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 A1 0x0214 0x8052 OxB1DC 0x815C K 0x0008 325 550 0 0x0100 0x0600 0x0600 0x0600 B1 0x71CC 0x78EF 0x69B9 0x68F7 B2 0 777 0 245 0 9 4 0 451 2 0 4000 0 4000 0 4000 0 4000 A1 0x81C2 0x806E OxAFE9 OxFCA6 K 0x0009 100 550 0 0x0800 0 01 0 0 01 0 0 01 0 B1 Ox7DAF 0x5629 Ox7ESF 0x6151 B2 0 105 OxCF51 0xC18A OxDC9B A2 0x4000 0xC000 0x4000 0x4000 A1 0x8000 0x0000 0xB96A 0x8019 Rev 1 3 99 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 50 BPF Biquad Values Continued BPF Biquad Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Output Scalar Values K 0x0005 400 440 0 0x0020 0x0200 0x0400 0x0040 B1 0x7448 0x7802 0 7305 0x75A7 B2 OxCOF6 OxCOCB 2 4 0xC26B A2 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 A1 0x96AB 0x8359 0x8D93 0x85C1 K 0x0008 Example The United States specifies a busy tone on time from 450 to 550 ms and off time from 450 to 550 ms Thus the minimum and times are 0 45 s each and the maximum and times are 0 55 s each m The busy cadence minimum on time
140. 115 7200 bps T6 9600 bps T7 12 0 kbps T8 14 4 kbps T9 19 2 kbps T10 384 kbps T11 57 6 kbps T12 115 2 kbps T13 230 4 kbps T14 1 245 760 kbps 715 307 200 kbps T16 Autobaud On TT 17 Autobaud Off Lock at current baud rate In UART mode 2 1 Causes a low pulse 25 ms on RI and DCD 2 Makes INT the inverse of ESC U 3 Makes RTS the inverse of CTS In parallel or SPI mode causes a low pulse 25 ms on INT This command terminates with RESET and does not generate an OK message Wn Connect message type WO Report connect and protocol message W2 Report connect message only exclude protocol message WA Report connect and protocol message with both upstream and downstream connect rates Notes 1 3 4 When autobaud mode BO B1 and P1 is not detected automatically The combination of B2 and P3 is detected This is compatible with seven data bits no parity two stop bits Seven data bits no parity one stop bit may be forced by sending AT T17 B1 After changing the baud rate the result code OK is sent at the o d DTE rate Subsequent commands must be sent at the new rate If the ISOmodem is configured in autobaud mode AT commands NT0 through T15 lock the new baud rate and disable autobaud To eliminate any possibility of a race condition between the receipt of the result code and the changing of the U
141. 15 gt lt 0 10 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 0 gt lt 0 12 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt lt 0 14 gt lt 0 15 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt In the receive direction the lt EM gt lt flag gt indicates that the CRC check is successful and the preceding frame was received correctly If there had been an error in the preceding frame the lt EM gt lt err gt would have been sent instead of the lt EM gt lt flag gt The host is expected to discard the entire frame based on whether or not the frame is terminated with an EM flag or lt EM gt lt err gt The host should also expect to occasionally see the EM mark indicator if the sending modem experienced a transmitter underrun or overrun problem In general the RTS flow control is not used However if it is used and if RTS is negated for too long the receive buffers will eventually overflow This is called a receiver overrun and the modem sends an lt gt lt gt indicator A receiver overrun is considered to be a catastrophic failure and the host is expected to terminate the session Host software must be designed so that an lt gt lt gt indicator never occurs It is expected that the lt EM gt lt rover gt indicator be encountered during system debug and designing the system software properly to avoid having these indicators occur should be the design goal Please note that there is an option available in the U87 10 The reason for this option
142. 179 19 2 kbps Rev 1 3 81 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 42 Extended AT Command Set Continued Command Action N2 MNP reliable mode The ISOmodem attempts to connect with the MNP protocol If unsuccessful the call is dropped Compression is controlled by Cn V 42 auto reliable The ISOmodem attempts to connect with the V 42 protocol If unsuccess G3 ful the MNP protocol is attempted If unsuccessful wire mode is attempted Compression is controlled by Cn NA V 42 reliable mode or drop call Same as except that the ISOmodem drops the call instead of connecting in MNP or wire mode Compression is controlled by Cn V 42 and MNP reliable mode The ISOmodem attempts to connect with V 42 If unsuccessful MNP N5 is attempted If MNP is unsuccessful the call is dropped Wiremode is not attempted Compression is controlled by Cn Pn Parity type is automatically set in autobaud mode PO Even Space P2 Odd P3 Mark Qn Modem to DTE flow control Disable all flow control This may only be used if the DTE speed and the line DCE speed are guar QO anteed to match throughout the call Q2 Use CTS only Q3 Use RTS CTS 4 Enable XON XOFF flow control for modem to DTE interface Does not enable modem to modem flow control Tn DTE rate TO 300 bps T1 600 bps T2 1200 bps Notes 1 When in a
143. 30 0x0030 BMOT Busy cadence minimum on time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x0438 U31 0x0031 RMTT Ringback cadence minimum total time in seconds multiplied by 0x4650 7200 U32 0x0032 RDLT Ringback cadence delta in seconds multiplied by 7200 OxEF10 033 0 0033 RMOT Ringback cadence minimum on time in seconds multiplied by 0x1200 7200 U34 0x0034 DTWD Window to look for dial tone in seconds multiplied by 1000 0x1B58 U35 0x0035 DMOT Minimum dial tone on time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x2D00 U37 0x0037 PDO Number of pulses to dial 0 0x000A U38 0x0038 PD1 Number of pulses to dial 1 0x0001 U39 0x0039 PD2 Number of pulses to dial 2 0x0002 U3A 0x003A PD3 Number of pulses to dial 3 0x0003 U3B 0x003B PD4 Number of pulses to dial 4 0x0004 U3C 0x003C PD5 Number of pulses to dial 5 0x0005 U3D 0x003D PD6 Number of pulses to dial 6 0x0006 U3E 0x003E PD7 Number of pulses to dial 7 0x0007 0x003F PD8 Number of pulses to dial 8 0x0008 U40 0x0040 PD9 Number of pulses to dial 9 0x0009 U42 0x0042 PDBT Pulse dial break time ms units 0x003D U43 0x0043 PDMT Pulse dial make time ms units 0x0027 U45 0x0045 PDIT Pulse dial interdigit time ms units 0x0320 U46 0x0046 DTPL DTMF power level 0x09BO U47 0x0047 DTNT DTMF on time ms units 0x0064 U48 0x0048 DTFT DTMF off time ms units 0x0064 U49 0x0049 RGFH Ring frequency high 2400 maximum valid ring frequency in Hz 0x0022 0x004A RGFD Ring frequency delta 2400 minimum valid ring freq
144. 3000 Configuration eue Reste mb E 192 7 3 1 Microphone and Speaker Ports 192 7 32 Register Settings su ws Cee QM a E E es 192 7 3 3 System Voice 192 7 3 3 1 TAM Hands Free 192 Loses TAM eut oett d a ban eoe ec 192 7 3 3 3 Speakerphone 192 79 94 Handset u tp uc ate wank cao eo o i ul d 192 3 9 5 TAM PSTN EIS du 193 52 LER COSE as uqha 194 Zib Hands SS Q us Es EUR EGAN Ehe a ed arb pub d Ro Rcgi ea e ws gh as UR 196 445 1 OVOIVIGW i uit rapiens qox dta rt Gc 196 7 5 2 Handset GOrfigurallOr dae DRE RP Yara et bte et der er 196 7 5 3 Call Automatic Tone Dial inet ERA ob rt Euh eds 198 7 5 4 Call Manual Off Hook Tone 198 7 5 5 Call Automatic Pulse 198 725 6 ADSWOL asso uec rcd Net erst pd iced a S sa e dtu 198 7s terminales oos Pad PORA 199 6 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 7 5 8 Speakerphone Transition
145. 32 30 30 OD OA 19 20 20 19 B1 19 BO 19 B2 30 93 19 B1 19 B2 30 93 19 B1 19 B2 30 93 19 B1 19 B2 30 93 19 B1 19 B2 19 B2 B6 9E F7 46 19 BO 19 B2 29 C6 19 19 B2 FF 98 89 18 19 BO 19 B2 92 6E EF 14 65 19 BO 19 B2 DA BE C6 07 EA D8 31 C2 05 FA 86 C4 40 19 AO EA F9 19 B2 8D 00 57 5 43 29 19 BO 19 B2 05 CB 14 9F 7C 2D 19 BO 19 B2 19 B2 19 BA OD OA 4E 4F 20 43 41 52 52 49 45 52 OD OA 6 9 Overcurrent Detection The ISOmodem has built in overcurrent detection feature disabled by default that measures loop current a programmable amount of time after going off hook This allows the modem to detect an improper line condition The overcurrent detect feature is enabled by setting U70 11 OCDM 1 During the time after the modem goes off hook loop current is measured and set by U77 8 0 OHT The default delay is 16 ms After the delay current is sampled every 1 ms An overcurrent is detected if two consecutive samples indicate an overcurrent condition If this feature is enabled and excessive current is detected the ISOmodem sends the X result code and triggers an interrupt by asserting the INT pin or by setting the INT bit in the parallel or SPI mode After an interrupt is received the host issues the command to verify the OCD interrupt and clear the OCD bit The delay between modem off hook and loop current measurement is set by the OHT bits OHT is a 9 bit register with 1 ms units Th
146. 4 0 0 05 0 45 0 05 3 45 0 05 0 45 0 05 3 45 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x0032 UA1 0x0000 to 0x0190 UA 0x0005 UAS 0x002D UAA 0x0005 5 0x0159 6 0x0005 0x002D 8 0x0005 9 0x0159 Call Waiting Tone li 400x16 400 0 1 0 1 0 1 3 0 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x000A UA1 0x000A 2 0x000A UA3 0x012C Call Waiting Tone lii 400x16 400 0 064 0 436 0 064 3 436 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x0007 UA1 0x002G UA2 0x0007 UA3 0x0158 Call Waiting Tone Iv 400x16 400 0 25 0 25 0 25 3 25 U9F 0x0001 UA0 0x0019 UA1 0x0019 UA2 0x0019 UAS 0x0145 Jordan Waiting Tone 420 40 400 440 0 5 2x 0 3 0 2 3 0 U9F 0x0001 or 0x0002 0x0032 1 0x001E 2 0x0014 UAS 0x001E UA4 0x0014 UA5 0x012C Kenya Call Waiting Tone 425 CONTINUOUS U9F 0x0003 156 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Kiribati Waiting Tone 425 0 1 0 2 0 1 4 7 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x000A UA1 0x0014 2 0x000A 0x01D6 Korea Republic Of Waiting Tone 350 440 0 25 0 25 0 25 3 25 U9F 0x000 UAO 0x0019 UA1 0x0019 UA2 0x0019 UAS 0x0145 La
147. 4 0 UAE Line rate amp Gn amp Hn Modem on hold PCW PMHF PMHR PMHT PMH ATO Overcurrent detection 067 7 U70 11 3 U77 10 9 8 0 U79 4 0 Power control amp Z 24 U65 13 Pulse dialing D 6 8 14 037 045 U4E 132 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 88 Modem Feature vs Hardware AT Command and Register Setting Continued Function Feature AT Commands S Registers U Registers Quick connect PQC PSS Reset Z U6E 4 U70 7 5 SAS detect U9F UA9 Self Test amp Tn amp Hn 40 41 SMS FCLASS FRM FTM V 29 FCLASS FTM FRM V 42 V 42b DR Cn Nn DS V 44 DS44 DR V 92 MS PIG Note Si2493 only 6 2 Country Dependent Setup Configuring the ISOmodem for operation in different countries is done easily with AT commands In all but rare instances no hardware change is required the exceptions being an optional maximum ringer impedance a billing tone filter etc For this reason the ISOmodem is truly global modem solution Modem initialization commands for various countries are presented in 6 2 2 1 Country Initialization Table All U register values are in hexadecimal The settings for different countries can be broken into three groups call progress dialing and line interface control Call progress settings include filter coefficients cadence data and threshold values Dialing includes DTMF levels thresholds timing and pulse dialing
148. 5 13 9 6 2 and 0 which are reserved These bits must not be written with a logic 1 and reading them returns a value of 0 see Table 56 Bit 14 TOCT 0 default turns off the calling tone after answer tone detection and allows the calling tone cadence to complete before proceeding with the connect sequence per V 25 TOCT 1 turns off the calling tone 200 ms after answer tone detection begins Bit 12 NHFP 0 default disables hook flash during pulse dialing ignores amp and dial modifiers NHFP 1 enables hook flash during pulse dialing Bit 11 NHFD 0 default disables hook flash during dial string tone or pulse NHFD 1 enables hook flash during tone or pulse dial string Bit 10 CLPD 0 default Modem ignores loop current prior to dialing If CLPD 1 modem measures loop current prior to dialing This bit is used in conjunction with the loop current debouncing registers U50 and U51 LCDN and LCDF and U4D bit 1 LLC U50 provides a delay between the modem going off hook and the loop current measurement The delay allows the loop current to stabilize prior to the measurement Some countries require the presence of loop current prior to dialing Bit 8 0 default allows mixing tone and pulse dialing in a single AT command FTP 1 forces the first dialing mode encountered tone or pulse for the entire AT command Bit 7 SPDM 0 default causes the modem to pulse dial if an ATDP command is given If
149. 5C HTXFIR7 0x0000 U15D 0x015D HTXFIR8 0x0000 U15E 0x015E HTXFIR9 0x0000 U15F 0x015F HTXFIR10 0x0000 U160 0x0160 HTXFIR11 Handset TX FIR Filter Coefficients 0x0000 U161 0x0161 HTXFIR12 0x0000 U162 0x0162 HTXFIR13 0x0000 U163 0x0163 HTXFIR14 0x0000 0164 0 0164 HTXFIR15 0x0000 U165 0x0165 HTXFIR16 0x0000 U166 0x0166 HTXFIR17 0x0000 0167 0 0167 HTXFIR18 0x0000 U168 0x0168 HTXFIR19 0x0000 U169 0x0169 HTXFIR20 0x0000 U16A 0x016A HTXFIR21 0x0000 182 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 114 Voice Mode U Registers Continued Register Address Name Description Default U16B 0x016B HRXFIR1 0x4000 U16C 0 016 HRXFIR2 0x0000 U16D 0x016D HRXFIR3 0x0000 U16E 0x016E HRXFIR4 0x0000 U16F 0x016F HRXFIR5 0x0000 U170 0x0170 HRXFIR6 0x0000 U171 0x0171 HRXFIR7 0x0000 U172 0x0172 HRXFIR8 0x0000 U173 0x0173 HRXFIR9 0x0000 U174 0 0174 HRXFIR10 0x0000 U175 0 0175 HRXFIR11 Handset RX FIR Filter Coefficients 0x0000 U176 0 0176 HRXFIR12 0x0000 U177 0 0177 HRXFIR13 0x0000 U178 0 0178 HRXFIR14 0 0000 U179 0 0179 HRXFIR15 0 0000 U17A 0 017 HRXFIR16 0 0000 U17B 0x017B HRXFIR17 0x0000 U17C 0x017C HRXFIR18 0x0000 U17D 0x017D HRXFIR19 0 0000 U17E Ox017E HRXFIR20 0x0000 U17F 0
150. 8 dB The VGR default is 128 0 dB This command is used to control the receive gain at the DTE from either the Si3000 Codec or the DAA The purpose is to adjust the DTE receive gain for the TAM voice stream during idle state SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 73 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Transmit Gain Selection The gain parameter has a range of 112 134 with 128 being the nominal value This represents a range of 48 to 18 dB The default VGT is 128 0 dB This command is used to control the transmit gain at the DTE to either the Si3000 Codec or the DAA The purpose is to adjust the DTE transmit gain for the TAM voice stream during idle state VIP Load Voice Factory Defaults DTE DCE Inactivity Timer 4VIT The lt timer gt parameter has a range of 0 255 with units of sec onds The default is O disable VLS n Analog Source Destination Select n Description 0 ISOmodem on hook AOUT disabled Tone detec tors disabled Si3000 sample pass through to DAA is inactive 1 ISOmodem off hook AOUT disabled Tone detectors disabled 4 ISOmodem on hook AOUT connected to ISOmo dem tone generators Tone detectors disabled 5 ISOmodem off hook AOUT connected to PSTN Tone detectors enabled 15 ISOmodem goes off hook begins V 253 tone event reporting and Si3000 to DAA sample pass through becomes active Dial tone can be heard on handset 20 ISOmodem
151. 9 4 0 LVCS value represents Tip Ring voltage the ISOmodem is in the command mode and the host can easily monitor LVCS with the AT R79 command A typical local loop has a Tip to Ring voltage greater than 40 V if all devices sharing the line telephones fax machines modems etc are on hook The typical local loop has a large dc impedance that causes the Tip Ring voltage to drop below 25 V when a device goes off hook The host can monitor LVCS to determine whether the Tip Ring voltage is approximately 40 V or something less than 25 V to determine if a parallel device is off hook This type of monitoring may also be performed with the 1 command Alternatively the host could be programmed to periodically monitor LVCS and store the maximum value as the all devices on hook line voltage and establish the on hook intrusion threshold as a fraction possibly 5096 of that value This allows the system to adapt to different or changing local loop conditions An on chip adaptive monitoring algorithm may be enabled with the V2 command 6 6 1 1 Line Not Present In Use Indication Method 1 Fixed If enabled with V1 this feature checks the line status before going off hook and again before dialing Before going off hook with the ATD ATO or ATA command the ISOmodem reads the line voltage and compares it to U83 NOLN 15 0 and U84 LIUS 15 0 Loop Voltage Action 0 lt LVCS lt U83 Report NO LINE and remain on hook U83 lt LVCS
152. A0 0x00A0 U1D BT2B1 Ox6EF 1 U1E BT2B2 Busy tone detection filter stage 2 biquad coefficients 0 4 4 U1F BT2A2 0 000 020 2 1 0 0000 021 0x00A0 U22 1 0x78B0 U23 BT3B2 Busy tone detection filter stage 3 biquad coefficients 0xC305 U24 BT3A2 0x4000 U25 1 0xB50A U26 BT4A0 0x0400 U27 1 0x70D2 U28 BT4B2 Busy tone detection filter stage 4 biquad coefficients 0xC830 U29 BT4A2 0x4000 U2A BT4A1 0 80 2 028 Busy tone detection filter output scaler 0x0009 U2C BTON Busy tone detection ON threshold 0x00A0 U2D BTOF Busy tone detection OFF threshold 0x0070 U2E BMTT Busy cadence minimum total time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x0870 U2F BDLT Busy cadence delta time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0 25 8 030 Busy cadence minimum on time in seconds multiplied by 7200 0x0438 98 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 50 BPF Biquad Values BPF Biquad Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Output Scalar Values 310 510 Default Busy and Dial Tone 0 0x0800 0x00A0 0x00A0 0x0400 B1 0 0000 Ox6EF1 0 7880 0x70D2 B2 0x0000 0xC4F4 0xC305 0xC830 A2 0x0000 0 000 0 4000 0 4000 1 0 0000 0 0000 0xB50A 0 80 2 K 0x0009 300 480 0 0x0800 0x01A0 0 01 0 0x03A0 B1 0x0000 0 6 79 0 7905 0 7061 2 0 0000 0xC548 0 3
153. ART speed CTS is de asserted while the result code is being sent until after the rate has been successfully changed The host should send the command and wait for the OK response After OK has been received the host may send data at the new rate as soon as CTS is asserted The NT command should be the last command sent in a multi command line and may not be used on the same command line as U or R commands If it is not the OK from the T command is sent at the old DTE rate and other result codes are sent at the new DTE rate The autobaud feature does not detect this rate Default is 1716 if autobaud is selected by reset strap option otherwise default is T9 19 2 kbps Rev 1 3 83 SILICON LABS AN93 The connect messages shown in Table 43 are sent when link negotiation is complete Table 43 Result Codes Numeric Meaning Verbal Response X0 X1 X2 X4 X5 0 Command was successful OK X X X X X X 1 Link established at 300 bps CONNECT X X X X X X or higher 2 Incoming ring detected RING X X X X X X 3 Link dropped NO CARRIER X X X X X X 4 Command failed ERROR X X X X X X 5 Link established at 1200 CONNECT 1200 X X X X X 6 Dial tone not present NO DIALTONE X X X 7 Line busy BUSY X X X 8 Remote not answering NO ANSWER X X X X X X 9 Ringback detected RINGING X 10 Link established at 2400 CONNECT 2400 X X
154. B silicon m 80 interface to V 29 Fast Connect is not supported on Rev B silicon and can be accomplished only as a patch on Rev C Please contact Silicon Laboratories Inc for latest patch 5 8 Firmware Upgrades on page 121 outlines how to use this patch m When operating as V 22 Fast Connect MS V22 AT U7A 3 the register U80 can be modified to account for unusual server timings The value in U80 should reflect the expected answer tone duration of the NAC The units are in 1 600 s For example if the answer tone duration of the server is 500 ms AT U80 012C m When operating as V 22 Fast Connect MS V22 AT U7A 3 a short answer tone of at least 300 ms is required for proper operation This answer tone be 2100 Hz 2225 Hz or a V 22 Unscrambled Binary Ones USB1 If the server NAC does not have any of these answer tones prior to scrambled data or HDLC flags it is possible to command the modem to operate without these tones by setting bit 15 of U80 The modem then begins transmitting scrambled data or HDLC Flags some time after the end of dialing based on the value in U80 14 0 The units are in 1 600 s For example to command the modem to begin transmitting 3 s after the end of dialing set AT U80 8708 260 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 A V 29 FastPOS Sample Program Introduction In previous versions of the interface to V 29 FastPOS the HDLC layer was assumed to be implemented by the host software Another
155. CE Mode For new designs use of the newer synchronous access mode interface is recommended Otherwise existing software written with the Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode interface can still be used as long as the 5 command settings are not changed from the default value 5 15 V 80 Mode As shown in Table 85 the synchronous access mode is chosen by using the AT ES 6 8 command setting When using the synchronous access mode it is expected that the AT NO command will be used to disable all other error correction protocols that may interfere with V 80 synchronous access mode operation The V 80 Mode has two distinct submodes Switching between these two submodes can be accomplished within the confines of the same connection through the use of In Band commands The submodes are m Transparent Submode m Framed Submode The Transparent Submode creates a direct bit by bit translation from the DTE to and from the DCE Any application that requires a method of reconstructing a serial bit stream at the DCE can use the Transparent Sub mode The Framed Sub mode represents data at the DCE in HDLC SDLC frames This submode is typically used in point of sale terminals A common feature used in conjunction with the Framed Submode is the use of the 16 bit CRC When used with the CRC option the Framed Submode can be used in the same applications currently using the Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode Rev 1 3 125 SILICON LABS AN93 Prior to sending
156. Com amp dcb if bSuccess Handle the error printf SetCommState failed with error d n GetLastError exit 1 printf Serial port 55 successfully initialized n pcCommPort return char SendAndWaitFor char cpCommand char cpInBuffRd char cpResponse int iTimeoutMs unsigned long ulNoOfbytes strcpy cpOutBuffer cpCommand WriteFile hCom long cpOutBuffer strlen char cpOutBuffer amp ulNoOfbytes 0 if iTimeoutMs 266 Rev 1 3 lt SILICON LABS AN93 cpInBuffRd WaitForResponse cpResponse cpInBuffRd iTimeoutMs if cpInBuffRd exit 0 return cpInBuffRd Check for a specific response in the input buffer and return ptr to what follows If this times out or ERRORs before the respons NULL is returned It keeps reading the ser channel while waiting char WaitForResponse char cpResponse char cpInputBuffer unsigned long ulNoOfbytes is found then a int iTimeOutInMs clock_t sStartTime clock clock_t sCurrentTime covert wait time in ms s to clock_t by mutiplying by CLOCKS_PER_SEC 1000 clock_t sWaitTime clock t iTimeOutInMs CLOCKS PER SEC 1000 int iPasses 0 int iCharCnt 0 set to 0 while 1 char cTemp cpInputWr cpInputWr 0 char cpFound strstr cpInputBuffer cpResponse cpInputWr cTemp if cpFound copy the received bytes for late d
157. Commands Provided to Support SIA Level 3 Protocol Communication AT Command Modem Function Remarks AT FO Enable B103 Transmitter for Data Block transmission Modem turns on FSK transmitter and starts marking for the minimum duration required by standard Sends CONNECT message to DTE when that is accomplished Modem will then interpret the first character from DTE as Block Header and use the byte count to allow transmission of the specified number of char acters to the remote modem and then send OK message to DTE to indicate ready for next AT com mand Note1 FSK transmitter remains on DTE is expected to issue either a F2 detect ACK NACK or another F0 to send another data block com mand to the modem Note2 The escape sequence can be used to abort the data block transmission and return the modem to AT command mode Note3 The F0 command can be used to resume SIA protocol communication after a voice listen in or V 32bis interruption SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 225 AN93 Table 142 AT Commands Provided to Support SIA Level 3 Protocol Communication Continued AT Command Modem Function Remarks AT F1 Enable B103 Receiver for Data Block reception Modem enables FSK receiver waits for 12T marks to be detected then sends CONNECT message to DTE to indicate a received Data Block follows Modem will stay in this mode indefinitely until an AT comm
158. DLC flags Until the occur rence of HDLC flags 19 B2 and subsequent data are discarded 19 B2 This pattern has three meanings m f the receiver is looking for HDLC flags 19B2 means that the receiver has found an HDLC flag If 19B2 is received after a packet has started prior data exists the receiver assumes the CRC check does not match the FCS bytes sent by the remote transmitter and declares the packet bad An isolated 19 B2 pattern no preceding data is normal This can occur when the following example data pattern is seen 7E 7E XX 7E 7E where XX can be up to 2 bytes of non FLAG bit patterns at the DCE The data can be analyzed as follows with valid data shown in bold OD OA 43 4F 4E 45 43 54 20 31 32 30 30 OD OA CONNECT 1200 19 BE 20 20 tx 1200 rx 1200 19 B1 Received first flag Beginning of Packet 19 BO A spurious byte received with more than 6 mark bits in a row The modem is looking for HDLC flags 19 B2 HDLC flag detected Beginning of Packet 30 93 Good Packet 19 B1 Beginning of Packet 19 B2 If a 1 bit error is received in an HDLC flag the modem assumes a new single byte packet Since a 1 byte packet is invalid 19 B2 is generated by modem Beginning of Packet 30 93 Good Packet 19 B1 Beginning of Packet 166 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 104 Bit Errors Continued
159. E 1N LnOV m it 253 ic 4x pl PFH nvon a noxuisanro3a i fado suorssTug l Q U91lAS3OO H T 5 1 Nd 8 99 uorido peas amp xo Teuzeaxg 10 oo en LOV 2 L uonoes euejd ON zso oso Rev 1 3 46 SILICON LABS AN93 4 2 Schematic 9neuieuos 0L 8L08 S 61 941614 00451591 O d JO esnj e Jo esn eui uoneuuojur 10 723701 uono s 89 0 8065 uonoes ul euejd ON 299 910N SO33 0V 1nO1M10 20 0533 NVLX NDITO 1234 713934 _371 S9 519 q S14 So3arov Lnow1o za asaa bara 1NI Ty qe 1 1 q osa aoa 47 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 4 3 Bill of Materials Component Value Supplier s C1 C2 33 pF Y2 X7R 20 Panasonic Murata Vishay Holy Stone C3 10 nF 250 V X7R 20 Venkel SMEC C4 1 0 uF 50 V Elec Tant 20 Panasonic C5 C6 C50 C52 0 1 16 V X7R 20 Venkel SMEC C7 2 7 nF 50 V X7R 20 Venkel SMEC C8 C9 680 pF Y2 X7R 10 Panasonic Murata Vishay Holy Stone C10 0 01 16 V X7R 20 Venkel SMEC C40 32 768 kHz 18 pF 16 V NPO 5 Venkel S
160. E is off hook AOUT disabled Tone detectors disabled 4 DCE is on hook AOUT connected to tone generators Tone detectors disabled 5 DCE is off hook AOUT connected to PSTN Tone detectors enabled 13 DCE is off hook V 253 tone event reporting enabled Si3000 sample pass through to DAA is active with options for speakerphone operation 14 DCE is on hook V 253 tone event reporting enabled Si3000 interface VLS lt label gt is active for DTE voice stream pass through 15 DCE is off hook V 253 tone event reporting enabled Si3000 sample pass through to DAA is active with options for handset operation 20 DCE is on hook AOUT disabled Tone detectors enabled 21 DCE is on hook AOUT connected to tone generators Tone detectors enabled Table 117 on page 190 shows the voice mode operation and the signal paths See 10 2 4 2 of V 253 for an explanation of the AT VLS command results If an ATD command is sent while the DCE is in VLS 0 and FCLASS 8 the DCE will automati cally transition to VLS 1 The ATH command will automatically force the DCE to VLS 0 The main options of interest are the 0 13 14 and 5 The VLS 0 setting must be applied first before applying a new VLS value to ensure the mode is exited properly VNH hook Automatic Hangup Control lt hook gt Description 0 The DCE retains automatic hangups as is normal in the other modes such as hanging up the phone when the ISOmodem does not detect a data carrier w
161. ECT response before it sends data Transmission of data before this message can result in loss of information Rev 1 3 237 SILICON LABS AN93 After the host receives CONNECT it sends the frame data followed by lt DLE gt lt ETX gt A frame includes type length payload and checksum The frame data can contain anything including lt DLE gt lt ETX gt DLE shielding is needed lt DLE gt lt ETX gt with no data for about 8ms is treated as the end of frame After a frame has been sent the modem response will be lt CR gt lt LF gt OK lt CR gt lt LF gt On the answer modem side the command AT FRM 200 causes the receiver to look for at least 32 bits of CS and for at least 60 bits of marks The answer modem detects the protocol of the transaction by whether CS comes before the marks AT FRM 200 Receive an SMS frame AT UD2 lt RxTimeout gt Set RxTimeout There can be several responses to AT FRM 200 depending on the received data 9 2 2 2 Response 1 If the frame had not been received within the time specified in RxTimeout the modem response to the host would be lt DLE gt lt ETX gt lt CR gt lt LF gt NO CARRIER lt CR gt lt LF gt 9 2 2 3 Response 2 If the frame had been received with a mark segment at beginning of frame the modem would respond to the host with CONNECT 1 lt CR gt lt LF gt Frame Data Received gt lt DLE gt lt ETX gt lt CR gt lt LF gt OK lt CR gt lt LF g
162. EEPROM with separate serial input and output data wires may also be used with the input and output pins connected to EESD if its SO output is tristated on the last falling edge of EECLK during a read cycle SPI EEPROM CS SCLK EECS SCLK TELEPHONE LINE Si3018 10 Figure 12 Three Wire EEPROM Connection Diagram 2 6 3 Detailed EEPROM Examples Upon powerup if the option is selected the ISOmodem attempts to detect an EEPROM The modem looks for a carriage return in the first 10 memory locations If none is found the modem assumes the EEPROM is not programmed and stops reading it If a programmed EEPROM is detected customer defaults that are programmed into the EEPROM between the optional heading BOOT and the lt gt lt gt delimiter are executed immediately and AT command macros are loaded into the ISOmodem RAM The memory that may be allocated to the commands portion of the EEPROM is limited to 1000 bytes Three CR must be the last three entries in the EEPROM EEPROM Doata are stored and read in hexadecimal ASCII format in eight address blocks beginning at a specified hexadecimal address For example the AT M0000 y0 y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 command writes the hexadecimal values 0 at addresses from 0 to 7 respectively The AT E0000 command reads the hexadecimal values 0 7 from addresses 0 to 7 respectively The following sections give specific examples of EEPROM usage for command macros firmwa
163. Extended results and detect busy only X1 with busy tone detec tion Extended results full CPM X1 with dial and busy tone detec tion X5 Extended results Full CPM enabled including ringback detection X4 with ring back detection Yn Long space disconnect Modem hangs up after 1 5 seconds or more of continuous space while on line YO Disable data memory access by disallowing W and Q Com mands Y1 Enable continuous DTMF tone ATxY1D9 sends continuous 9 tone Y2 Enable continuous answer tone To enable continuous answer tone and answer use ATxY2A Y254 Enables Data Memory Access i e allows W and Q commands Hard reset This command is functionally equivalent to pulsing the RESET pin low Read from serial EEPROM The format is AT Ehhhh where hhhh is the EEPROM address in hexadecimal Interrupt read This command causes the ISOmodem to report the lower eight bits of the interrupt register 070 IOO OCD PPD and RI bits of this register are cleared and the INT pin HIR1 INT flag in parallel or SPI mode is deactivated on this read LPhh Read Quick Connect data hh is a hexadecimal value Data are read as follows Q4 dg LPg ds d1g LP40 d17 do4 do5 d30 Write to serial EEPROM The format is AT Mhhhh xxxx where hhhh is the EEPROM address in hexadecimal and xxxx is the EEPROM data in hexadec
164. F O 111 6F o 16 10 lt DLE gt 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 lt DC1 gt 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 lt DC2 gt 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 lt DC3 gt 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 S 20 14 4 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 lt gt 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u 22 16 SYN 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 V 23 17 lt gt 55 37 7 87 57 W 119 77 w 24 18 lt CAN gt 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 X 25 19 lt EM gt 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A lt SUB gt 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A 2 27 1 lt 5 gt 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C lt FS gt 60 3C 92 5C 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E lt RS gt 62 3E gt 94 5E 126 7E S 31 1F lt US gt 63 3F 95 5F 127 7 Rev 1 3 37 SILICON LABS AN93 3 DAA Line Side Device The Si3018 10 DAA or line side device contains an ADC a DAC control circuitry and an isolation capacitor interface The Si3018 10 and surrounding circuitry provide all functionality for telephone line interface requirement compliance including a full wave rectifier bridge hookswitch dc termination ac termination ring detection loop voltage and current monitoring and call progress monitoring The Si3018 10 external circuitry is largely responsible for EMI EMC safety and surge performance 3 1 Hookswitch and DC Termination The DAA has programmable settings for the dc impedance current limiting minimum operational loop current and Tip to Ring voltage The dc impedance of the
165. F R _Al 148 7 55 1 48 7167 1 37 7 51 fab AT Pf88e 7b53 falf i RF RFUMRF FUR 4 19 3 7 19 7 9 AT P 815 1981 7h4b 96 7 45 1972 747 9468 1 7 1 1947 7 3 1947 169 1 4 23 77 cba BURKE 78 fc58 39M f 1834 1 3 698 4 0 4312 fc4c fctBe RFUNRF R AT Pf838 77be falb f FUR a25 7744 4e1 6b47 217 8913 592 8090 6b1e e111 ac8 3128 PURKE 2007242 Silabs IsoModem eval board Feline WinXL serial transaction log Timestamp of highlighted char Figure 50 Debugging the DTE Interface 256 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 APPENDIX A EPOS APPLICATIONS EPOS applications generally require nearly flawless call connection reliability and a very short overall transaction time The message length of a typical EPOS terminal is between 120 to 260 bytes of information Due to the relatively small message length the need for reliable connections under all line conditions and short connection times the preferred modulations have traditionally been variations of V 22 1200 bps or Bell 212 1200 bps EPOS servers do not strictly follow ITU standards Despite the informal use of the term V 22 fast connect there is no ITU fast connect standard De facto standards with modifications of ITU standards such as V 22 Fast Connect have be
166. GE E E a mE Answer Tone 2225 Hz Repeat DTE sends the calling modem a UA packet Calling modem is receiving to transmit and sends to the DTE lt 0x30 gt 0x73 gt lt EM gt lt 0xB1 gt 1 4 Connect Packet lt gt lt 0 gt lt 0 24 gt lt 0 24 gt lt gt lt 1 gt Then the SNRM Packet Calling modem is receiving lt 0 30 gt lt 0 93 gt lt gt lt 0 1 gt Sends a Tx abort to DTE lt gt lt 0 2 gt Then the received RR packet 30 EM 0xA0 EM B1 S Rev 1 3 271 SILICON LABS AN93 V 29 FastPOS DTE Trace This is recorded while the program listed above is running The patch load is left out for brevity DCE CR JE CB R t 2 CRCRLFO CR LF DTE a t z CR UE DCE A T E 0 CRCRLFO CR LF CR LF C DTE E 0 CR 52422 06 CK DCE b c d 8 CR LE CR LF O CR LF CR LF O CR LF DTE A T SE 0s GR DCE CR LF O CR LF DTE at 44 4 5 By 5 A T amp D 2 x 4 N DCE CR LF O K CR LF DTE Vu 2 ee sb OES VES 488720 2 GR A DCE CR DE K CE DTE OY 48 15 050 14 CR A T 5 U DCE KO CR DTE vof y 8 0 0 4 CR A T F S 6 8 DCE CR LFO CR LF CR DTE CR A T E S A 0 0 0 1 CR DCE LFO K CR LF CR LFO
167. Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result Codes Data Local Modem Actions AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec AT VLS 0 OK Disable voice mode Used as a transition point between non zero VLS voice modes AT VLS 13 OK Setup off hook voice mode See Table 117 on page 190 for details AT U0B1 0500 OK Restore Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path AT U0B5 0200 OK Restore DAA to Si3000 receive gain path AT U72 0110 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Enable speaker driver Disable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Enable MBIAS output AT U72 05B3 OK Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Mute Line In 20 dB MIC input gain Enable MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter AT U72 065C OK Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Disable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR AT U72 0900 OK Configure Si3000 Register 9 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT VSP 0 OK Select handset voice path See Figure 29 on page 188 for details AT U199 amp FFF5 OK Enable the microphone and speaker paths to the codec SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 197 AN93 7 5 3 Call Automatic Tone Dial Table 121
168. I 1 the modem hangs up immediately and will not go off hook and dial when an intrusion is detected without host intervention If 95V commands are set also causes the LINE IN USE result code upon PPD interrupt Bit 9 AOC 0 default disables AutoOvercurrent If enabled and an overcurrent condition is detected the dc termination switches to 800 thus reducing the current If AOC 0 the overcurrent condition is only reported by U70 3 OCD Bits 8 0 OHT set the delay between the time the modem goes off hook and LVCS is read for an overcurrent condition The default value for this register is 30 ms see Table 75 U78 is a bit mapped register that controls intrusion detection blocking and intrusion suspend U78 resets to 0x0000 with a power on or manual reset see Table 76 Bits 15 14 IB controls intrusion blocking after dialing has begun Table 76 defines the bit values and intrusion blocking Bits 7 0 IS set the delay between the start of dialing and the start of the intrusion algorithm when IB 10 see Table 76 Table 75 U77 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 12 IST Intrusion Settling Time 250 ms units 1 second default 11 HOI Hang Up On Intrusion 0 ISOmodem does not automatically hang up after an off hook PPD interrupt 1 ISOmodem automatically hangs up after an off hook PPD interrupt 10 Reserved Read returns zero AOC AutoOvercurrent 0 Disable 1 Enable 8 0 OHT 8 0
169. IFO AT command buffer in command mode or data transmission in data mode If data are available modem data in data mode or command responses such as OK in command mode reading from the HIRO fetches data from the modem s receive FIFO The maximum burst data rate is approximately 350 kbps 45 kBps 2 2 4 2 Hardware Interface Register 1 Hardware Interface Register 1 HIR 1 contains various status and control flags for use by the host to perform data flow control to escape to command mode and to query various interrupt conditions The HIR1 bit map is described in Table 22 This register is reset to 0x63 Table 22 Hardware Interface Register 1 Bit Name R W Reset Function 7 RXF R W 0 Receive FIFO Almost Full 6 TXE R W 1 Transmit FIFO Almost Empty 5 REM R 1 Receive FIFO Empty 4 INTM R W 0 Interrupt Mask 0 INT pin triggered on rising edge of RXF or TXE only 1 INT pin triggered on rising edge of RXF or INT bit below 3 INT R 0 Interrupt 0 No interrupt 1 Interrupt triggered 2 ESC R W 0 Escape 1 RTS R W 1 Request to Send active low Deprecated for flow control use the TXE and REM bits for polling or interrupt based communication This bit must be written to zero 0 CTS R 1 Clear to Send active low Deprecated for flow control use the TXE and REM bits for polling or interrupt based communication Bit 7 RXF is a read write bit that gives the
170. LASS 0 FCLASS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 Kev Abort ON HK OFF HK OFF HK ON HK ON HK ON HK y 4VLS 0 4VLS 0 4VLS 0 DCE Initiated ON HK OFF HK OFF HK ON HK OFF HK OFF HK disconnects FCLASS 8 FCLASS 8 FCLASS 8 Go to IDLE Go to IDLE Go to IDLE VNH 0 VNH 0 Go to IDLE Go to IDLE Go to IDLE FCLASS 0 1 FCLASS 0 1 FCLASS 0 1 Keep HK Keep HK Keep HK Go to IDLE Go to IDLE Go to IDLE sons Keep HK Keep HK Keep HK VNH 0 VNH 0 Notes 1 HK Hook 2 Keep HK Maintain ON or OFF hook status 3 If no VNH x command executed since last FCLASS change Rev 1 3 191 SILICON LA 85 AN93 7 3 Si3000 Configuration 7 3 1 Microphone and Speaker Ports The TAM and Speakerphone applications use two sets of microphones and speakers one for the handset and one for hands free operation For the Si24xxVMB REV 2 0 the handset circuit uses the MIC input and output The Si24xxVMB REV 2 0 allows configuration of the MIC SPKR L and matching ground signals on any handset pinout There is no industry standard for handset pinout For the Si24xx VMB REV 2 0 the speakerphone hands free TAM circuit uses the LINEI input and the LINEO output The LINEO is sent to an external amplifier 7 3 2 Register Settings Figure 30 illustrates the register bit fields and corresponding values used to control the gain attenuation filtering output
171. LICON LABS AN93 5 5 Extended AT Commands The extended AT commands described in Tables 40 42 are supported by the ISOmodem Table 40 Extended AT amp Command Set Command Action amp Display AT amp current settings see text for details amp Dn Escape pin function similar to DTR amp DO Escape pin is not used amp D1 Escape pin escapes to command mode from data mode The escape pin must be enabled by setting bit HES Enable Hardware Escape Pin U70 bit 15 Escape pin assertion during a modem connection causes the modem to go on hook and return to amp D2 command mode The escape pin must be enabled by setting bit HES Enable Hardware Escape Pin 070 bit 15 amp D3 Escape pin assertion causes ATZ command reset and return OK result code The escape pin must be enabled by setting bit HES Enable Hardware Escape Pin 070 bit 15 Line connection rate limit This command sets an upper limit on the line speed that the ISOmodem amp Gn can connect The amp Hn commands may limit the line speed as well amp Gn not used for amp HO or amp H1 Not all modulations support rates given by amp G Improper settings are ignored amp G3 1200 bps max 804 2400 bps amp G5 4 8 kbps max amp G6 7 2 kbps max amp G7 9 6 kbps max amp G8 12 kbps max amp G9 14 4 kbps max default for Si2415 amp G10 16 8 kbps max 80111 19 2
172. Loss of carrier disconnect 801e Long space disconnect 801f Character abort disconnect 802a Rate request failed 802b Answer modem energy not detected 802c V 8 negotiation failed 2d TX data timeout Rev 1 3 87 SILICON LABS AN93 5 6 S Registers S registers are typically used to set modem configuration parameters during initialization and are not usually changed during normal modem operation S register values other than defaults must be written via the ATSn x command after every reset event S registers are specified as a decimal value 81 for example and the contents of the register are also decimal numbers Table 45 lists the S registers available on the ISOmodem their functions default values ranges of values and units Many S registers are industry standards such as 50 number of rings for auto answer S1 ring count and S2 escape character among others However there are usually variations in the function and availability of S registers from one chipset to another or from one chipset manufacturer to another These variations are due to a combination of feature availability and choices made during the chip design It is prudent to verify the compatibility of S register functions defaults ranges and values when adapting the ISOmodem to an existing design that uses another chipset This simple step can save time and help speed product development If a particular S register is not available on the ISOmodem the
173. MEC C41 4 9152 MHz 27 MHz 33 pF 16 V NPO 5 C51 C53 0 22 uF 16 V X7R 20 Venkel SMEC D1 022 Dual Diode 225 mA 300 V 0045 Diodes Inc FB1 FB2 Ferrite Bead BLM18AG601SN1 Murata Q1 Q3 NPN 300 V MMBTA42 Diodes Inc Fairchild Q2 PNP 300 V MMBTA92 Diodes Inc Fairchild Q4 Q5 NPN 80 V 330 mW MMBTAO6 Diodes Inc Fairchild RV1 Sidactor 275 V 100A Teccor Protek ST Micro R1 1 07 kO 1 2 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R2 150 1 16 W 5 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R3 3 65 kO 1 2 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R4 2 49 kO 1 2 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R5 R6 100 1 16 W 5 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R7 R8 20 MO 1 16 W 596 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R9 1 MO 1 16 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R10 536 1 4 W 1 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R11 73 2 O 1 2 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R12 R13 56 O 1 16 W 196 Venkel SMEC Panasonic R15 R16 0 O 1 16 W Venkel SMEC Panasonic U1 Si24xx ISOmodem Silicon Labs U2 Si3018 Silicon Labs 32 768 kHz 12 pF 100 ppm 50 max ESR yis 4 9152 MHz 20 pF 100 ppm 150 Q ESR ECS Inc Siward Abracon 27 MHz from external clock Z1 Zener Diode 43 V 1 2 W BZT84C43 On Semi Notes 1 C52 and C53 should not be populated with the Si2493 16 pin package option 2 Several diode bridge configurations are acceptable For example a single DF04S or four 1N4004 diodes may be used 3 Murata BLM18AG601SN1 may be substituted for R15 R16 0 to decrease emissions 4 T
174. ON LABS AN93 7 3 3 5 TAM PSTN This mode is used to answer an incoming call with OGM playback and ICM recording The caller may perform local TAM operations i e record OGM review ICM via remote DTMF control The modem is off hook routing audio between the DAA and the DTE interface however audio is also available at the Si3000 via UB5 path so call screening is possible via the speaker LINEO while the microphone is muted The modem voice path is configured for half duplex audio with the speakerphone algorithm disabled Side tone is disabled Handset TX RX coefficients are applied The Si3000 is using the LINEI and LINEO signals with speakerphone gain settings This mode is supported by the 512418 29 36 38 parts Speakerphone E rever on aoo Figure 31 System Voice Modes Rev 1 3 193 SILICON LABS AN93 7 4 Initialization The following sequence is used after power up or hardware reset to prepare the modem for voice operations This procedure occurs in the Initialize state presented in Figure 31 After initialization the system will be in the TAM Hands Free mode which is discussed in 7 3 3 1 TAM Hands Free Table 119 Initialization Sequence Modem to Host to Modem Commands Host Result Local Modem Actions Codes Reset 513000 is not reset by this command Disable local AT command echo and ATEO FCLASS 0 OK enter data mode which is necessary for patch loading
175. Pin4 Pin 11 CTS Pin 17 Pin 18 Pin 23 Disabled EEPROM FSYNC Pin 15 AOUT RI SDI EESD DCD Interface Pin 16 INT 32 kHz No No 1 1 0 1 X Yes 0 1 0 1 X Yes No 1 1 0 0 X Yes 0 1 0 0 X 4 9152 MHz No No 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 0 1 1 1 1 Yes No 1 1 1 0 1 Yes 0 1 1 0 1 27 MHz No No 1 1 1 1 0 Yes 0 1 1 1 0 Yes No 1 1 1 0 0 Yes 0 1 1 0 0 2 1 4 2 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP 24 with Parallel Interface Parallel interface options for the 24 pin TSSOP package appear in Table 7 below The EEPROM and autobaud options are not available when the parallel interface is selected Table 7 TSSOP 24 Parallel Interface Options Mode Reset Strap Pins Input Clock Pin 9 RD Pin 11 Pin 15 Pin 10 WR SCLK INT 27 MHz 1 0 0 4 9152 MHz 1 1 0 14 Rev 1 3 j SILICON LABS AN93 2 1 4 3 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP with SPI Interface Table 8 lists the SPl interface options for the 24 TSSOP package Table 8 TSSOP 24 SPI Interface Clock Frequency Options Mode Reset Strap Pins Input Clock Three Wire Pin4 Pin 9 RXD Pin 16 Pin 17 Pin 23 EEPROM FSYNC 11 SCLK INT RI DCD Interface Pin 15 AOUT Pin 18 SDI EESD 32 kHz No 1 1 0 1 1 Yes 0 1 0 1 1 4 9152 MHz No 1 1 0 0 X Yes 0 1 0 0 X 27 MHz No 1 1 0 1 0 Yes 0 1 0 1 0 2 1 5 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts 2 1 5 1 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with UART Operat
176. R causes the modem to go off hook and dial the number 1234 via No change is made to the modem settings during the execution of an action command Configuration commands change modem characteristics until they are modified or reversed by a subsequent configuration command or the modem is reset Modem configuration status can be determined with the use of ATY ATSn or AT Rhh commands where Y is a group of AT command arguments n is an S register number decimal and hh is the hexadecimal address of a U register The AT commands for reading configuration status are listed in Table 35 Each command is followed by a carriage return Table 35 Configuration Status Command Action ATY settings Displays status of a group of settings AT Basic AT command settings AT amp AT amp command settings command settings command settings ATSn Displays contents of S register n ATS Displays contents of all S registers AT Rhh Displays contents of U register hh AT R Displays the current contents of all U registers AT VCID Displays Caller ID setting The examples in Table 36 assume the modem is reset to its default condition Each command is followed by a carriage return Rev 1 3 57 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 36 Command Examples Command Result Comment 001 Configuration status of basic M 000 AT comma
177. RIGPO is output on RI pin when U7C 0 RIGPOEN 1 This allows the RI pin to be configured as a general purpose output pin under host processor control The RI pin must not pulled down Doing so forces the modem to enter an undocumented emulation mode Bit 0 RIGPOEN 0 default allows the RI pin to indicate a valid ring signal When Bit 0 1 RI outputs the value of RIGPO See Table 80 U7D is a bit mapped register with bits 15 13 9 and bits 8 2 reserved U7D resets to 0x4001 with a power on or manual reset Bit 14 NLM 0 default causes the modem to automatically detect loop current absence or loss When bit 14 1 this feature is disabled Bit 12 TCAL 0 default when set to 1 forces the DAA to calibrate at a programmable time after going off hook The time between going off hook and the start of calibration is programmed with U54 15 8 in 32 ms units Bit 11 OHCT 0 default when set to 1 forces the DAA to calibrate at the start of dialing The first dial character should be a delay 47 to prevent interference with the first digit Bit 1 ATZD 0 default allows the command to be active When Bit 1 1 the ATZ command is disabled Bit 0 FDP 0 default FSK data processing stops when the carrier is lost Unprocessed data are lost Setting Bit 0 1 causes FSK data processing to continue for up to two bytes of data in the pipeline after carrier is lost Table 80 U7C Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 5 Re
178. Ring Detect Control U49 Ring Frequency High U4A RGFD Ring Frequency Delta U4B RGMN Ring Cadence Minimum On Time U4C RGNX Ring Cadence Maximum Total Time SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 145 AN93 Table 92 Dial Registers Register Value Function Pulse Dial Control 037 040 Pulse per Digit Definition U42 PDBT Pulse Dial Break Time U43 PDMT Pulse Dial Make Time U45 PDIT Pulse Dial Interdigit Time DTMF Control U46 DTPL Power Level and Twist U47 DTNT On Time 048 DTMF Off Time Table 93 Line Interface Control Registers Register Bit Value Function U4D 10 CLPD CheckLoop Current Before Dialing 1 LLC Low Loop Current Detect set for legacy TBR21 0 LCN Loop Current Needed 050 Loop Current Debounce On Time 051 LCDF Loop Current Debounce Off Time U52 XMTL Transmit Level U67 7 DCR DC Impedance Select 13 12 6 OHS Speed MINI 3 2 DCV 0 Termination Select 9 ILIM RZ Ringer Impedance RT Ringer Threshold Select U68 BTE Billing Tone Protect Enable ROV Receive Overload BTD Billing Tone Detected O N O 6 2 2 3 Special Requirements for India To output a 0 dBm sine wave use the following commands AT PF800 C4DD 7B5C 595F AT Y254 W50 0 5B86 1 046 0 1 1 1 This command string turns off t
179. S registers and U registers are described Instructions for writing to and reading from them are discussed along with any limitations or special considerations A large number of configuration and programming examples are offered as illustrations of actual testable applications These examples can be used alone or in combination to create the desired modem operation The use of S registers and U registers to control the operation features and configuration of the modem is documented The Si24xx ISOmodem chipset family is controller based No modem driver is required to run on the system processor This makes the Si24xx ISOmodem family ideal for embedded systems because a wide variety of processors and operating systems can interface with the ISOmodem through a simple UART driver The modems in this family operate at maximum connect rates of 48 kbps upstream V 92 Si2494 93 56 kbps downstream V 90 Si2457 33 6 kbps V 34 Si2439 34 14 4 kbps V 32b Si2415 and 2400 bps V 22b Si2404 with support for all standard ITU T fallback modes These chipsets can be programmed to comply with FCC JATE ETSI ES 203 021 and other country specific PTT requirements They also support V 42 and MNP2 4 error correction and V 42b and MNP5 compression Fast connect and transparent HDLC modes are also supported The basic ISOmodem functional blocks are shown in Figure 1 on page 1 The ISOmodem includes a controller data pump DSP ROM RAM an oscillator phas
180. T U72 0900 OK Configure Si3000 Register 9 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT UOB1 0 OK Disable Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path This ensures codec tones are not sent to the FDV and DTMF AT UOB5 0 OK Disable DAA to Si3000 receive gain path This ensures line events such as CID and ring tone are not heard via the codec AT U199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for local ring tone alert tones 7 5 Handset 7 5 1 Overview This mode uses the voice pass through connection to route SSI data between the Si3000 and the DAA The modem remains in AT command mode and provides V 253 event notifications The host controller is responsible for detecting the status of the handset position The following sections provides detailed examples of originating and answering a voice call with the handset 7 5 2 Handset Configuration Table 120 contains the initial configuration that is used by all dialing use cases The sequence is also sent for the answer case The user will have been notified of the incoming call through a local VTS ring tone and a raised handset event would prompt the Handset Configuration sequence to answer the call The UB1 UB5 UB6 and Si3000 register configuration vary with the customer s production hardware The UB5 register serves as the general volume control in this mode 196 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 120 Handset Configuration
181. Terminal Host Dials host lt ENQ 0x05 STX data ETX LRC 46 ACK 0x06 4 STX lt data gt E TX LRC ACK 0x06 4 lt EOT 0x04 Disconnects Rev 1 3 257 SILICON LABS AN93 Another consideration for EPOS applications is the method of error detection and error correction Early EPOS terminals adopted the Zilog 85C30 Serial Communications Controller SCC in conjunction with a synchronous modem to implement an HDLC SDLC based data link layer The complexities of the HDLC handling is done by the SCC while the modem performs strict data pump function However given the broad availability of UARTs HDLC handling can be performed by the modem also To facilitate this system partitioning the V 80 protocol is used V 80 allows the multiplexing of data control and status information so that the host processor can specifically control what frames are sent to or received from the modem across the asynchronous UART DTE interface The host performs much of the other layers of the protocol stack beyond this Data Link Layer A discussion of host software is beyond the scope of this appendix Recommendation V 80 The goal of V 80 is the concept of abstracting hardware circuits This is achieved by the addition of a control and status channel alongside the main data channel The main data channel is effectively the informa
182. The ISOmodem also automatically updates ACL with the LVCS value while off hook if an intrusion has not occurred An ACL value can be written by the host and forced to remain unchanged by setting U76 8 FACL 1 If LVCS is lower than by an amount greater than the value set in U76 7 5 DCL 6 mA default for two consecutive samples U70 2 PPD Parallel Phone Detect is set If U70 10 PPDM Parallel Phone Detect Mask is set to 1 default condition the INT pin in UART mode or the INT bit Hardware Interface Register 1 bit 3 in parallel or SPI mode is also triggered The host can monitor PPD or issue ATI to verify the cause of an interrupt and clear PPD The host can take the appropriate action when the intrusion is confirmed The intrusion detection algorithm is as follows if LVCS t 2 LVCS t 40 ms x OHSR and ACL LVCS t lt DCL then ACL LVCS t if ACL LVCS x t 40 ms x OHSR gt DCL and ACL LVCS x t gt DCL then PPD 1 and the INT pin or the INT bit in parallel or SPI mode is asserted PPDM 1 The ISOmodem can also be programmed to go on hook automatically on a PPD interrupt by setting U77 HOI 11 Hang Up On Intrusion to 1 The off hook intrusion algorithm may be suspended for a period defined by U78 15 14 IB after the start of dialing This guards against false PPD detects due to dial pulses or other transients caused by Central Office switching Table 102 lists the U regis
183. U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 Bermuda Defaults Brazil AT GCl 16 AT U67 8 Brunei AT GCl 9C Bulgaria AT GCl 1B AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Canada AT GCl 20 Caribbean Defaults Chile AT GCl 73 AT U49 28 83 ATS007 180 Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 135 AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization China AT GCl 26 AT U67 8 Colombia AT GCl 27 Costa Rica Defaults Croatia AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Cyprus AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Czech Republic AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Denmark AT GCl 31 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 Dominican Republic Defaults Dubai Defaults Egypt 1 6 AT U35 10E0 AT U62 904 33 AT U67 208 ATS006 3 El Salvador Defaults Ecuador 35 Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 136 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued
184. U67 8 Romania AT GCl 73 AT U62 904 33 Russia AT GCl B8 AT U67 4 Saudi Arabia Defaults Singapore AT GCl 9C Slovakia AT GCl 73 AT U35 10E0 AT U47 5A 5A AT U62 904 33 Slovenia AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 South Africa AT GCl 9F AT U63 33 AT U67 A ATS006 3 Spain 0 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 Sri Lanka AT GCl 9C Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 142 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Sweden 5 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Switzerland 6 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 ATS006 3 Syria AT GCl 16 AT U49 22 7A Taiwan AT U67 8 Thailand 1 6 946 240 AT U67 4 Tunisia AT GCl 51 AT U46 680 AT U52 1 ATS007 50 Turkey AT GCl 1B AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 UAE AT GCl 6C AT U67 8 5006 3 USA AT GCl B5 Ukraine AT GCl 73 Note These countries do not have a built in support but ar
185. Used With Between Patch 115 kbaud UART Lines Reset then 0 5 ms 0 694 Embedded systems ATEO and ATQ1 1 ms 0 771 Embedded systems 2 ms 0 925 Embedded systems 5 ms 1 385 Embedded systems 10 ms 2 152 Embedded systems Reset Wait for OK 3 998 Windows or embedded system where time precision is worse than 10 ms Reset 100 ms 15 962 Windows without writing a patch loader Note The delay times do not include the time to empty the UART s possibly long TX buffer The time quoted is between the end of transmission of the last character of a line and the start of transmission of the first character of the next line A CRC can be run on the upgrade file loaded into on chip Program RAM with the AT amp T6 command to verify that the upgrade was correctly written to the on chip memory The CRC value obtained from executing the AT amp T6 command should match the CRC value provided with the upgrade code 5 9 Escape Methods There are four ways to escape from data mode and return to command mode once a connection is established Three of these 9th Bit and the Escape Pin allow the connection to be maintained while one or both modems are in the command mode The fourth method is to terminate the connection The three escape methods that maintain the connection are combined by a logical OR For example if and the Escape Pin are both enabled either returns the modem to the command mode from the data mode In parallel or SPI mode the escape pi
186. XOFF handshaking In this example CTS RTS hardware handshaking is used so it is also possible for the host to have sent this series of bytes instead lt 0x10 gt lt 0x11 gt lt 0x12 gt lt 0x13 gt lt 0x14 gt lt 0x15 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt However if the host does not lt EM gt shield the 0x11 and 0x13 characters XON XOFF software handshaking can no longer be used In either of the above transmit frames the EM flag is used to indicate that a logical frame has completed The modem does not begin transmitting the frame at the DCE until the EM flag is received or the number of bytes sent to the modem exceeds the number of bytes programmed into U87 7 0 In the above example the following transmission lt 0 10 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 0 gt lt 0 12 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt lt 0 14 gt lt 0 15 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt meets both criteria of having 10 bytes received at the DTE and receipt of lt EM gt lt flag gt command In this example the transmission at the DCE begins approximately after the receipt of the lt 0 1 gt byte Once an HDLC frame begins transmitting at the DCE the host must ensure transmit overrun and underrun do not occur It is expected that the ITF command be used to adjust the transmit flow control thresholds so that it is tuned to the system s ability to process the interrupt If a transmit underrun occurs the lt EM gt lt tunder gt indicator always
187. a particu Country Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada China Columbia Czech Republic Denmark Ecuador Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary India Ireland Israel Italy Japan South Korea Luxembourg Malaysia Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Paraguay Philippines Poland Portugal Russia Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom United States default Note U registers are configured to Silicon Laboratories recommended values Changes may be made by writing individual registers after sending the AT GCI command The GCI command resets U registers through U86 and S6 in Japan to default values before setting country specific values Refer to the chart and setup tables beginning with 6 2 2 1 Country Initialization Table on page 134 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 69 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action 4 GCI List current country code setting response is GCl setting GCI List all possible country code settings Specifies the flow control to be implemented A Specifies the flow control method used by the host to control data from the modem 0 None 1 Local XON OFF flow control Does not pass XON XOFF IFC Options character to the remote IFC A modem 2 Hardware flow control RTS B Specifies the flow control method used by the modem to con trol data from the host 0 None
188. able SPKRL Mute SPKRR Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation Set the Si3000 to RS232 receive gain ee for TAM Hands Free Restore Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path to allow voice samples to reach FDV block ATAR LOSON ok for silence detection This allows the driver to automatically end OGM recording AT4VSD 129 OK Set sensitivity level for OGM recording silence detection Select G 711U p law PCM 8 bit 64 kbps AT VSM 4 OK format The voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM PCM file AT VTS 1000 0 100 OK Play user record tone prompt AT U199 8 OK Mute speaker AT U199 amp FFFD OK Enable microphone for OGM recording 204 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 129 TAM Handset Record OGM Continued AT VRX CONNECT Trigger receive operation The first byte after the newline character following the CONNECT message will be the first data stream byte Voice Stream Receive OGM voice stream During voice stream capture the user can adjust the UCO value via the lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjust ments and update the VGR value for future use DLE lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK Terminate the receive operation The modem will respond with lt DLE gt lt ETX gt to mark the end of the data stream The OK denotes the
189. address 0 are 0000 42 4 54 0 41 54 5C 0008 54 31 32 00 41 54 26 48 0010 32 00 0 00 00 00 The value 0x41 corresponds to the display character 0x54 to T 0x42 to B Ox4F etc and the value OxOD for carriage return corresponds to the decimal value 13 stored in S register 3 S3 Table 30 shows the relationship between the decimal values hexadecimal values and display characters 34 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 6 6 2 AT Command Macro Example This example creates the AT command macro ATN lt CR gt to configure the ISOmodem for operation in Norway The AT commands required to do this manually are AT U2C 00B0 0080 CR AT U67 000C 0010 0004 CR 04 001 5 implement this as an AT command macro the contents should be N lt CR gt AT U2C 00B0 0080 CR AT U67 000C 0010 0004 CR 04 001 5 lt CR gt lt CR gt This must be written to the EEPROM as ASCII hexadecimal in eight address blocks The actual AT commands to store this boot command in the EEPROM starting at address 0 are T M0000 4E 0D 41 54 3A 55 32 43 0008 2C 30 30 42 30 0D 0D 30 0010 38 30 0D 41 54 3A 55 36 T M0018 37 2C 30 30 30 43 2C 30 00 00 20 30 31 30 2C 30 30 30 34 28 0D 41 54 3A 55 34 44 2C T M0030 30 30 31 0D 0D 0D With this macro installed in the EEPROM the command configures the modem for operation in N
190. allows two way hands free voice communication over a telephone line but SSP allows communication in only one direction at a time The direction of voice transmission can be done automatically based on the presence of local and remote speech at the modem or manually using a push to talk function Simplex and full duplex speakerphone modes are mutually exclusive SSP supports the Ademco Contact ID and SIA security protocols It also supports DTMF generation and detection DTMF detection is enabled only during VTR Commonality in control registers between SSP and full duplex facilitates programming across platforms SSP supports Type II Caller ID but Caller ID is disabled during VRX DLE R event report is sent to the DTE when a SAS Call Waiting tone is detected If a CAS tone is detected the modem mutes the 513000 speaker while Caller ID Type data are being captured It then reports Caller ID info to the DTE as a DLE shielded complex event This happens automatically without the need for an AT VCIDR command 1 The microphone sample is taken after U19D the speaker sample is taken after U19C However the scale factors are set to 1 0 internally so 019 and U19D will not affect the SSP 2 To mute the local talker set U199 1 to 1 and MUTE DAA TO MIXER 1 To mute the remote talker set U199 3 to 1 and MUTE MIXER TO DAA to 1 212 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 133 Simplex Speakerphone U Registers Register Name Descri
191. and is issued by DTE It is usually a F3 ACK F4 NACK or F5 ACK followed by Data Block transmission command Note1 Modem will wait for up to 1 second to detect gt 12 marks before unclamping RXD After 1 sec ond RXD will be unclamped regardless Note 2 The F1 command can be used to resume SIA protocol communication after a voice listen in or V 32bis interruption AT F2 Enable tonal ACK NACK detection Detect and report ACK or NACK to DTE OK for ACK and ERROR for NACK A NACK will be reported if no valid signal is detected within 2 5 seconds AT F3 Transmit Tonal ACK Transmit Space for 600 ms Send OK prompt to DTE when done AT F4 Transmit Tonal NACK Transmit Mark for 600 ms Send OK prompt to DTE when done AT F5 Transmit Tonal ACK with reverse chan Transmit Space for 600 ms followed by Mark for nel command 180 ms Then send CONNECT to DTE to indicate modem is ready to accept data AT F6 Abort current Data Block Reception This command is useful for exception handling Transmission such as timeout If the FSK transmitter was on F6 shuts it off FSK reception is aborted and modem returns to the AT command mode 226 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 143 lists the definitions of result codes typically expected in an SIA session Table 143 Definitions of Result Codes Typically Expected in an SIA Session Result Code Meaning Remarks OK Ready f
192. and later SERM Special Error Reporting Mode 0 Ignore unrecognized in band commands 1 Generate EM 0x45 E for error in response to any unrecognized in band commands FSMS Framed Sub Mode Startup 0 Upon successful connection enter Transparent Sub Mode An lt EM gt lt FLAG gt is required to enter Framed Sub Mode 1 Upon successful connection immediately enter Framed Sub Mode The first received lt EM gt lt err gt from a successful hunt is transformed into an lt EM gt lt flag gt 7 0 XMTT Transmitter Threshold This value represents the number of bytes before a transmission is started The follow ing values are special 0 The same as ten Upon receipt of ten bytes data are transferred The DTE must supply a closing flag within the required time or an underrun will occur 255 The same as infinity e g never start a packet until the closing flag is received 120 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 22 UAA V 29 Mode Register UAA V 29 MODE Bit Name Function 15 3 Reserved Read returns zero 2 RUDE 0 Disables rude disconnect 1 Enables rude disconnect 1 V29ENA 0 Disables V 29 1 Enables V 29 0 Reserved Read returns zero 5 7 23 UIDA Response and Answer Tone Delay Register This register which is reset to 0 allows the user to add a delay in increments of milliseconds to the time the modem waits bef
193. are or hardware reset the host must wait for the reset recovery time before issuing any subsequent AT commands There is no non volatile memory on the ISOmodem other than program ROM When reset the ISOmodem reverts to the original factory default settings Any set up or configuration data and software updates must be reloaded after every reset This is true whether the reset occurs due to a power down power up cycle a power on reset through a manual reset switch by writing U6E 4 RST 1 or by executing ATZ A suggested reset sequence is as follows 1 Apply an active low pulse to the RESET pin write RST bit or ATZ lt CR gt Wait at least the reset recovery time Load firmware updates if required Set non default DAA interface parameters DCV ACT ILIM OHS2 OHS RZ RT 067 LIM 068 Set non default cadence values Busy Tone Ringback Ring Rev 1 3 11 SILICON LABS AN93 6 Set non default frequency values Ring 7 Set non default filter parameters 8 Set non default S register values The modem is now ready to detect rings answer another modem call or dial out to a remote modem Some key default settings for the modem after reset or powerup include the following V 92 and fall backs enabled Si2494 93 V 90 and fall backs enabled Si2457 V 34 fall backs enabled Si2439 34 V 32bis and fall backs enabled Si2415 V 22bis and fall backs enabled 512404 V 42 42bis enabled
194. arts to ensure that they are the correct value If these steps do not isolate the problem replace the ISOmodem 10 1 4 Host Interface Troubleshooting The methods described in this section are useful as a starting point for debugging a prototype system or as a continuation of the troubleshooting process described previously The procedures presented in this section require a known good ISOModem evaluation board and data sheet This section describes how to substitute the evaluation board for the entire modem circuitry in the prototype system Substituting a known operational modem can help isolate problems quickly The first step is to substitute the evaluation board for the complete modem solution in the prototype system This immediately demonstrates whether any modem functionality problems are in the prototype modem circuitry or in the host processor interface or software Verify ISOModem Evaluation Board Functionality Connect the evaluation board to a PC and a phone line or telephone line simulator Using a program such as HyperTerminal make a data connection between the evaluation board and a remote modem Remove power and the RS232 cable from the evaluation board and proceed to the next step Rev 1 3 243 SILICON LABS AN93 m Connect Evaluation Board to Prototype System Completely disconnect the embedded modem from the host interface in the prototype system Connect the ISOModem evaluation board to the host interface using
195. as serviced rxf_processed 1 BytesReceivedtt Clear the RXF interrupt if fewer than 3 bytes were read If more than 3 bytes were read from the FIFO the interrupt will be cleared automatically if BytesReceived 3 ClearRXF Clear RXF since we didn t empty the FIFO control_update 1 TIMER INTERRUPT If there wasn t an RXF interrupt but the receive FIFO isn t empty the interrupt may have been caused by the receive timer interrupt Note If the host cannot empty its queue fast enough to keep up with the modem or if it is going to have a long period of time gt U6F setting where there won t be room in the FIFO it would be better to completely disable the interrupt until the host has made room for more data The timer interrupt can only be cleared by reading a byte from the FIFO if there is no room in the FIFO the interrupt will not be cleared Alternatively the routine could read a byte to clear the interrupt and then discard the data MODULUS MASK is BUFFERSIZE 1 ile TimerInterrupt amp amp rxBufferSize MODULUS MASK Read a byte readModemByte BytesReceivedtt Check the status to see if the FIFO is empty ReadModemStatus U70 INTERRUPT Check for a software interrupt software refers to any of the interrupts described in U70 in the modem datasheet Only do this if the software interrupt is not masked This is the reason for the bit shift U70Interrupt
196. ase volume or gain during voice stream processing For VRX increase the UBF and UCO receive gains by 3 dB For VTX increase the UB8 and UB3 transmit gains by 3 dB The voice driver should track this command and update the VGR or VGT setting Since this DLE u command affects RS232 DAA RS232 513000 gain registers the voice driver should maintain two sets of VGT and VGR The voice driver will need to know the VLS state to determine if RS232 is connected to the 513000 or the DAA This command is only processed during an active VRX or VTX operation d 0x64 Decrease volume or gain during voice stream processing For VRX decrease the UB3 and UB8 receive gains by 3 dB For VTX decrease the 8 and UB3 transmit gains by 3 dB The voice driver should track this command and update the VGR or VGT setting Since this lt DLE gt lt d gt command affects RS232 DAA and RS232 513000 gain registers the voice driver should maintain two sets of VGT and VGR The voice driver will need to know the VLS state to determine if RS232 is connected to the Si3000 or the DAA This command is only processed during an active VRX or VTX operation 178 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 1 4 DLE Events DCE to DTE 7 1 4 1 Simple Event Reporting Table 112 lt DLE gt Simple Events DCE to DTE Format lt DLE gt Code
197. assing is important for the proper operation of the ISOmodem suppression of unwanted radiation and prevention of interfering signals and noise from being coupled into the modem via the power supply C50 and C52 provide filtering of the 3 3 V system power and must be located as close to the ISOmodem chip as possible to minimize lead lengths The best practice is to use surface mount components connected between a power plane and a ground plane This technique minimizes the inductive effects of component leads and PCB traces and provides bypassing over the widest possible frequency range and minimizes loop areas that can radiate radio frequency energy Two bias voltages used inside the modem chip require external bypassing and or clamping VDA pin 7 is bypassed by C51 VDB pin 19 is bypassed by C53 R12 and R13 are optional resistors that can in some cases reduce radiated emissions due to signals associated with the isolation capacitors These components must be located as close to the ISOmodem chip as possible to minimize lead lengths The Si3018 10 is powered by a small current passed across the ISOcap in the on hook mode and by the loop current in the off hook mode Since there is no system ground reference for the line side chip due to isolation requirements a virtual ground IGND is used as a reference point for the Si3018 10 Several bias voltages and signal reference points used inside the DAA chip require external bypassing filtering and o
198. at the host DTE uses to control the transmission or reception of SMS messages Table 146 AT Commands for SMS AT Command ISOmodem Response Description amp D1 OK ESC pin 22 escapes to command mode from data mode if also enabled by HES Enable Hardware Escape Pin 070 bit 15 amp D2 OK ESC pin 22 assertion during a modem connection causes the modem to go on hook and return to com mand mode The escape pin must be enabled by set ting bit HES 070 bit 15 FCLASS 256 OK Enables SMS mode DTXXXX OK Originate modem dials XXXX then goes back into command mode DT OK Answer modem picks up the line and goes back into command mode FRM 200 CONNECT 1 or Receive modem goes into data mode and waits for CONNECT 2 FSK data from Transmit modem response is deter mined by whether a Protocol 1 or 2 message was received FTM 201 CONNECT Transmit modem goes into data mode and waits for data from the DTE Sends marks when first data byte is received followed by data FTM 202 CONNECT Transmit modem goes into data mode and waits for data from the DTE When first data byte is received modem sends Channel Seizure and marks followed by data SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 235 AN93 9 2 1 SMS User Registers User registers that set up SMS operations are shown in Table 147 The default settings are shown in bold Table 147 User Registers for SMS Operations Register Bits Na
199. ata Tag gt lt Length of Message Data Checksum Type and Il supported TA TB Tone Detector A and B Format is TA lt tonestate gt or TB lt tonestate gt tonestate 3 1 16 millisecond timestamp tonestate 15 2 reserved tonestate 1 Tone B detected tonestate 0 Tone A detected 7 1 5 U Registers This section presents the set of U registers needed for the voice modes Table 114 Voice Mode U Registers Register Address Name Description Default U72 0x0072 CDCCTRL 513000 Audio Codec Control Interface UB1 0 00 1 TXGAIN Si3000 to DAA Transmit Gain 0x1000 UB3 0x00B3 TXGAIN1 RS232 to DAA Transmit Gain 0x1000 UB4 0x00B4 TXGAIN2 VTS to DAA Transmit Gain 0x1000 UB5 0x00B5 RXGAIN DAA to Si3000 Receive Gain 0x1000 UB6 0x00B6 STGAIN Si3000 to DAA Side Tone Gain 0x0000 UB8 0x00B8 TXGAINS RS232 to Si3000 Transmit Gain 0x1000 UB9 0x00B9 TXGAIN4 VTS to Si3000 Transmit Gain 0x0000 UBF 0 00 RXGAIN1 DAA to RS232 Receive Gain 0x1000 UCO 0x00CO RXGAIN2 Si3000 to RS232 Receive Gain 0x1000 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 181 AN93 Table 114 Voice Mode U Registers Continued Register Address Name Description Default U156 0x0156 HTXFIR1 0 4000 0157 0 0157 HTXFIR2 0x0000 U158 0x0158 HTXFIR3 0x0000 U159 0x0159 HTXFIR4 0x0000 U15A 0x015A HTXFIR5 0x0000 U15B 0x015B HTXFIR6 0x0000 U15C 0x01
200. atform The modem status may be queried and modem control flags may be set using the two functions below void setControl char controlCode char action char condition Set modem control Possible control codes are SiESC Set or clear escape flag SiINTM Enable or disable 070 interrupt The action may be ENABLE or DISABLE Control takes effect upon one of two conditions NOW Unconditionally upon entering the function call WHEN TX BUF EMPTY The setControl function loops until the gUARTToModemBuffer is empty This enables for instance setting the escape code after a given data set has been transmitted prior to sending AT commands It is up to the application to ensure the buffer empties within a reasonable amount of time char queryU70IntStatus void Returns the INT flag from the ISOmodem at the same bit position as in the HIR1 register The Application Layer Sample Application Sample code for an application can be found in the modem main c and modem 80C51 h files This code is application and host platform specific By default the program simply passes data back and forth between the modem and the UART using the buffers and function calls described above The minimal application is shown below char gPollingNotInterruptMode 0 Interrupt mode by default void main void EA 0 Disable global interrupt EA 0 Dummy as per MCU data sheet initApplicationBuffer
201. ation board to compare against measurements taken from the prototype system The resistance values and voltages listed in Tables 148 149 and 150 will generally be enough to troubleshoot all but the most unusual problems Start with power off and the phone line disconnected Measure the resistance of all Si3018 10 pins with the Ohmmeter s black lead on pin 15 IGND Compare these measurements with the values in Table 148 Next measure the resistance across the components listed in Table 149 and compare the readings to the values listed in the table Finally using the diode checker function on the multimeter check the polarities of the transistors and diodes as described in Table 150 The combination of these measurements should indicate the faulty component or connection If none of the measurements appears unusual and the prototype modem is not working replace the Si3018 10 244 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Prototype System Host Controller Si3018 Discretes Connect prototype system ground to EVB ground Disable RS232 transceiver outputs check evaluation board data sheet Disconnect prototype modem interface Connect the evaluation board to the target system Figure 40 Test the Host Interface Prototype System Si24xx Host Host Controller UART gt gt Phone Line Connect prototype system ground to EVB ground Remove modem module from EVB Disconnect host outputs from prototype modem
202. be short and direct 24 Provide a minimum of 5 mm creepage or use the capacitor terminal plating spacing as a guideline for small form factor applications from any TNV component pad or trace to any SELV component pad or trace 52 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 34 Layout Checklist Continued P Layout Items Required 25 Minimize the area of the loop formed from U2 pin 4 to R9 to U2 pin 15 26 Cathode marking for Z1 27 Pin 1 marking for U1 and U2 28 Space and mounting holes to accommodate for fire enclosure if necessary 29 IGND does not extend under D1 FB1 FB2 R15 R16 C8 C9 or RV1 30 Size Q1 Q4 and Q5 collector pads to safely dissipate 0 5 W see text 31 Submit layout to Silicon Laboratories for review 4 4 2 Module Design and Application Considerations Modem modules are more susceptible to radiated fields and ESD discharges than modems routed directly on the motherboard because the module ground plane is discontinuous and elevated from the motherboard s ground plane This separation also creates the possibility of loops that couple interfering signals to the modem Moreover a poor motherboard layout can degrade the ESD and EMI performance of a well designed module 4 4 2 1 Module Design Particular attention should be paid to power supply bypassing and reset line filtering when designing a modem modul
203. be used to prompt the user to contact the telephone company to have the billing tones disabled or purchase an external LC filter 42 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 4 Hardware Design Reference This section describes hardware design requirements for optimum Si24xx ISOmodem chipset implementation There are three important considerations for any hardware design First the reference design and components listed in the associated bill of materials should be followed exactly These designs reflect field experience with millions of deployed units throughout the world and are optimized for cost and performance Any deviation from the reference design schematic and components will likely have an adverse affect on performance Second circuit board layouts must follow 4 4 Layout Guidelines rigorously Deviations from these layout techniques will likely affect modem performance and regulatory compliance Finally all reference designs use a standard component numbering scheme This simplifies documentation references and communication with the Silicon Laboratories technical support team It is strongly recommended that these same component reference designators be used in all ISOmodem designs 4 1 Component Functions In spite of the significant internal complexity of the chip the external support circuitry is very simple The following section describes the modem s functions in detail 4 1 1 Power Supply and Bias Circuitry Power supply byp
204. before OK is received and the modem is in command mode The escape pin must be kept active until OK is received In parallel or SPI interface mode the function of the escape pin is replaced by bit 2 in Hardware Interface Register 1 described in 2 2 4 2 Hardware Interface Register 1 on page 25 Setting that bit high causes the modem to escape to the command mode Rev 1 3 123 SILICON LABS AN93 5 10 Data Compression The modem can achieve DTE host to ISOmodem speeds greater than the maximum DCE modem to modem speed through the use of a data compression protocol The compression protocols available are the ITU T V 44 V 42bis and MNP5 protocols Data compression attempts to increase throughput by compressing the information to be sent before actually sending it The modem is thus able to transmit more data in a given period of time Table 83 details the ISOmodem error correction and data compression modes of operation Table 83 Enabling Error Correction Data Compression To Enable Use AT Commands V 44 DS44 argument V 42bis N3 and C1 default V 42 LAPM MNP5 MNP2 4 Wire V 42 and NN4 and 1 V 42bis only V 42 only N4 and 0 MNP2 4 only N2 and 0 MNP2 5 only N2 and 1 No data compression and WO and 0 no error correction Note V 44 is available only on Si2493 5 11 Error Correction The ISOmodem can employ error correction reliable protocols to ensure error fre
205. billing tones The OVL bit should be polled following billing tone detection When the OVL bit returns to 0 indicating that the billing tone has passed the BTE bit should be written to O to return the dc termination to its original state It takes approximately 1 second to return to normal dc operating conditions The BTD and ROV bits are sticky and must be written to O to be reset After the BTE ROV and BTD bits are cleared the BTE bit can be set to reenable billing tone detection Certain line events such as an off hook event on a parallel phone or a polarity reversal may trigger the ROV bit or the BTD bit after which the billing tone detector must be reset Look for multiple events before qualifying whether billing tones are actually present Although the DAA remains off hook during a billing tone event the received data from the line is corrupted or a modem disconnect or retrain may occur in the presence of large billing tones To receive data in the presence of a billing tone an external LC filter must be added A modem manufacturer can provide this filter to users in the form of a dongle that connects on the phone line before the DAA This keeps the manufacturer from having to include a costly LC filter internal to the modem when it may only be necessary to support a few countries or customers Alternatively when a billing tone is detected the host software may notify the user that a billing tone has occurred This notification can
206. ce but note that when PWM is demodulated in this way it carries all the audio spectrum noise that is present in the power supply of the modem minus 6 dB This requires VCC to be as clean as one wants the call progress audio to be An alternative is for the AOUT signal to be buffered to a clean supply domain using a logic gate or transistor buffer The 3 pole low pass filter with a 3 dB point at approximately 2 kHz filters the 32 kHz square wave from AOUT allows only audio signals below 2 kHz to pass See Figure 24 below The amplifier provides differential speaker drive eliminating the need for a large coupling capacitor Some additional design work and optimization must be done to select the optimum gain and frequency response of this circuit depending on speaker efficiency final product enclosure and performance requirements A two or even one pole filter may be adequate in some applications Keep this audio circuitry well away from digital signals and use generous ground fill in the PCB layout gt 1 18Hz 188Hz 1 8KHz 18KHz 188KHz Frequency Figure 24 Audio Filter Response Rev 1 3 55 SILICON LABS AN93 5 Modem Reference Guide This section provides information about the architecture of the modem its functional blocks its registers and their interactions The AT command set is presented and options are explained The accessible memory locations
207. ce to terminate the receive stream The DCE will VRX return a lt DLE gt lt ETX gt followed by OK response for lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt ESC gt followed by an OK response for lt DLE gt lt ESC gt The DCE can be configured to termi nate the stream using the DTE DCE Inactivity Timer which is configured using the VIT command The DTE will need to process any lt DLE gt shielded events present in the data stream Any lt DLE gt lt DLE gt sequences can be preserved to allow less over head during playback of the stream with the VTX command Silence Detection lt sds gt Silence Detection Sensitivity 118 More sensitive lower noise levels considered to be silence VSD lt sds gt lt sdi gt 128 Nominal level of sensitivity 138 Less sensitive higher noise levels considered to be silence sdi Silence Detection Interval The time interval in 0 1 second units which must contain no or little activity before the DCE will report QUIET lt DLE gt lt q gt Default is five seconds Compression Selection Method lt gt Compression Mode 0 Signed linear PCM 8 bit 64 kbps 1 Unsigned linear PCM 8 bit 64 kbps VSM lt cml gt 4 G 711U p law companding PCM 8 bit 64 kbps 5 G 711A A law companding PCM 8 bit 64 kbps 129 G 726 ADPOM 2 bit 16 kbps 131 G 726 ADPOM 4 bit 32 kbps All compression modes use a fixed sampling rate of 8 kHz See 10 2 8 2 of V 253 for an exp
208. ced design provides the system manufacturer with an enhanced ability to determine system functionality during production tests and to support end user diagnostics In addition to local echo a loopback mode allows increased test coverage of system components For the loopback test mode a line side power source is required While a standard phone line can be used the test circuit shown in Figure 45 is adequate TIP 6000 t V 1 Si3018 TR 10 uF 20 mA RING Figure 45 Loop Test Circuit The AT amp Tn command in conjunction with the AT amp Hn command performs a loopback self test of the modem AT amp Hn determines the modulation used for the test V 22bis V 32bis etc If an AT amp Hn command is not issued just prior to the start of the test the default or previously selected modulation is used The modulation options and defaults are listed in Table 40 on page 77 The test is started with an AT amp T2 or AT amp T3 command During the test the modem is in data mode To end the test escape data mode using one of the Escape methods such as and end the test with ATH The AT amp T2 command initiates a test loop from the DSP through the DAA interface circuit of the ISOmodem Transmit data are returned to the DSP through the receive channel In the parallel or SPI mode the transmit data are passed to the receiver via Hardware Interface Register 0 AT amp T2 tests only the Si24xx chip not the Si3018 10 The AT amp T3 command initiat
209. ch there must be no interface UART SPI or parallel activity If this inactivity criterion is met the ISOmodem escapes to the command mode at the end of the S12 time period following the Any activity in the host interface during either the leading or trailing time period causes the ISOmodem to ignore the escape request and remain in data mode Timing for this escape sequence is illustrated in Figure 27 Leading Guard Trailing Guard Time Time Guard Time S12 20 msec units Default Guard Time S12 50 1 0 sec Guard Time Range 10 255 0 2 5 1 sec Figure 27 Escape Timing 5 9 2 9th Bit Escape The 9th Bit escape mode feature is enabled by sending the AT B6 command through autobaud which detects a 9th bit space as 9th bit escape mode If this escape method is selected a 1 detected on the ninth bit in a data word returns the modem to the command mode The 9th bit is ignored when the modem is in the command mode Timing for this escape sequence is illustrated in Figure 28 UART Timing for Modem Transmit Path 9N1 Mode with 9th Bit Escape 9 Bit Data Mode Figure 28 9th Bit Escape Timing 5 9 3 Escape Pin Escape The escape pin is controlled by U70 15 HES This bit is 0 by default which disables the escape pin ESC If HES is set to a 1 a high level on the ESC pin causes the modem to transition to the on line command mode The ESC pin status is polled by the processor and there is a latency
210. components U1 U2 R12 R13 C1 C2 Note Do not use ferrite beads in place of R12 and R13 a U1 and U2 are placed so that the right side of U1 faces the left side of U2 b C1 and C2 are placed directly between U1 and U2 c Keep R12 and R13 close to U1 d Place U1 U2 C1 and C2 so that the minimum creepage distance for the target application is met e Place C1 and C2 so that traces connected to U2 pin 5 C1B and U2 pin 6 C2B are physically separated from traces connected to i C8 R15 FB1 ii C9 R16 FB2 iii U2 pin 8 R7 iv U2 pin 9 R9 4 Place and group the following components around U2 C4 R9 C7 R2 C5 C6 R7 R8 These components should form the critical inner circle of components around U2 a Place C4 close to U2 3 This is best achieved by placing C4 northwest of U2 b Place R9 close to U2 pin 4 This is best achieved by placing R9 horizontally directly to the north of U2 c Place C7 close to U2 pin 15 This is best achieved by placing C7 next to R9 d Place R2 next to U2 pin 16 This is best achieved by placing R2 northeast of U2 e Place C6 close to U2 pin 10 This is best achieved by placing C6 southeast of U2 f Place R7 and R8 close to U2 This is best achieved by placing these components to the south of U2 g Place C5 close to U2 pin 7 This is best achieved by placing C5 southwest of U2 5 Place Q5 next to R2 so that the base of Q5 can be connected to R2 directly 6 Place 04 so that the base of Q4 can b
211. d line Waaaa dddd writes hexadecimal data value dddd to hexadecimal data address aaaa Only one command per line 64 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Y sequence Special Access Mode This command enables special modes and data memory access sequence Description 254 Waaaa dddd Write hexadecimal data value dddd to hexadecimal data address aaaa Only one 254 W command per line 254 Qaaaa Read hexadecimal address aaaa Returns hexadecimal data value Only 254 Q command per line 2 Enable continuous answer tone for the ATA command Use ATZ to clear this mode For example the single line multi ple command is AT Y2A 1 Enable continuous DTMF tone for first digit used in the ATD command Use ATZ to clear this mode For example the single line multiple command for a continuous DTMF 1 digit would be AT Y1D1 0 Exit from 254 W or 254 Q access mode Must reside on a separate line and must be the final sequence be sent after the final 254 W or 254 Q command DR X Data compression reporting x Mode 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If enabled the intermediate result code is transmitted at the point after error control negotiation The format of this result code is as follows Result code Mode DR NONE Data compression is not in use DR V42B Rec V 42bis is in use in both directions DR V42B RD Rec
212. d scalars and have no units These coefficients are programmed as 16 bit two s complement values All 0 values are in 3 12 format where 1 0 0x1000 All other coefficients in 1 14 format where 1 0 000 Default values meet FCC requirements U2E U2F and 030 set the busy cadence minimum total time BMTT busy cadence delta time BDLT and busy cadence minimum on time respectively Settings for busy cadences are specified as a range for ON time minimum ON and maximum ON and a range for OFF time minimum OFF and maximum OFF The three values represented by BMTT BDLT and BMOT fully specify these ranges BMTT minimum total time is equal to the minimum ON time plus the minimum OFF time BDLT allowable delta is equal to the maximum total time maximum ON time plus the maximum OFF time minus the minimum total time BMTT BMOT is the minimum ON time The values stored in the registers are the hexadecimal representation of the times in seconds multiplied by 7200 Default values meet FCC requirements see Figure 26 Cadence Timing on page 100 Table 49 017 030 Busy Tone Detect Registers Register Name Description Default U17 BT1A0 0x0800 U18 BT1B1 0x0000 U19 BT1B2 Busy tone detection filter stage 1 biquad coefficients 0x0000 U1A BT1A2 0x0000 U1B BT1A1 0x0000 U1C BT2
213. d scrambled data visually indis tinguishable from each other Calling modem s Scrambled Binary Ones and Scram bled Data visually indistinguishable from each other This looks the same as the V 22 bis protocol above except for S1 signal used for signaling V 22 bis ness and for start of retrains e 22 Fast Connect wav Adobe Audition Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window DSS 51154 51 11 15151 e 2100 Hz Answer Tone DTMF dialing gt gt 5 4 Caller Responds with SB1s and scrambled data s Caller sends SB1s immediately Saved in 3 28 seconds 5498 6Hz 622019 11025 16bt Mono 1241MB 24 80 GB free Figure 67 Appearance of V 22 Fast Connect Protocols 284 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 As shown in Figure 68 the V 29 FastPOS protocol looks different than the older slower V 22 like protocols It is also half duplex and each participating modem uses the entire spectral space available on the telephone line A receiving modem recognizes that the calling modem is V 29 capable by detecting the V 29 calling tone at 980 Hz Another example with some more SDLC oriented data is provided later in this document 5 first try to brazil 200 hypercom server wav Adobe Audition Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Hel x fa ees Ee E E fe e Fn S 5 415 E
214. d solder side and use vias between them to improve heat transfer for best performance When ambient conditions are a moderate 50 deg or less use 0 05 square inches of copper at the collectors of Q1 Q3 Q4 Q5 Both sides of the PCB can be used to double the available area 9 U2 IGND is the return path for many of the discrete components and requires special mention a Traces associated with IGND should be 20 mils wide b U2 s IGND should not be a large ground plane and should only occupy the space under U2 Beyond this area use traces and avoid getting close to the components on the other side of the diode bridge c C5 C6 C7 IGND return path should be direct 10 The traces from R7 to FB1 and from R8 to FB2 should be well matched This can be achieved by routing these traces next to each other as much as possible Ensure that these traces are not routed close to the traces connected to C1 or C2 11 Minimize all traces associated with Y1 C40 and C41 12 Decoupling capacitors 0 22 uF and 0 1 uF capacitors connected to Vpp must be placed next to those pins Traces of these decoupling capacitors back to the Si24xx GND pin should be direct and short E ne m El mim est FB1 RIS o 9 L au io Te 8 oF R5 QL LL 02 kis SE sh M 3 Lug 4 M Figure 20 Reference Placement 50 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93
215. dem with automatic data generation Modulation data rate and amp T5 symbol rate are set by amp H amp G and S41 Data pattern is set by the S40 register Continues until the ATH command is sent after an escape into command mode Data are also demodulated as in The test can be ended by escaping and issuing the ATH command amp T6 Compute checksum for firmware upgradeable section of program memory If no firmware upgrade is installed amp T6 returns C 4474 amp Xn Automatic determination of telephone line type 0 Abort amp x1 or amp x2 command Notes 1 The initial number attempted to test for an outside line is controlled by S51 default 1 2 AT amp reflects the last AT amp P command issued but does not reflect any subsequent changes made by writing U registers with AT U 78 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 40 Extended AT amp Command Set Continued Automatic determination of telephone line type Result code WXYZn W 0 line supports DTMF dialing 1 line is pulse dial only X 0 line supports 20 pps dialing amp X1 1 line supports 10 pps dialing only Y 0 extension network present PBX 1 outside line PSTN connected directly Z 0 continuous dial tone 1 make break dial tone n 0 9 number required for outside line if Y 0 amp X2 Same as amp X1 but Y result PBX is not tested Produce a constant answer tone ITU T and
216. depict the same wave files but with 256 bands versus 2048 bands One can see better timing details in one graph compared with the other The 256 band spectral display shown in Figure 60 shows the fine timing details of the protocol but with poor frequency resolution The 2048 band spectral display shown in Figure 61 allows more precise frequency measurements and signal separation but at the cost of obtaining a coarser time resolution 280 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 v22b rev C waves wav Adobe Audition EINE Edit View Multitrack View CD Project View Diss posl e Lo Opened in 0 36 seconds 70Hz 239 1 02 11025 16 bit Mono 11 46 MB 24 38 GB free Length pong EH eee s v22b w rev C waves wav Adobe Audition DSS ACARA d Edit View Multitrack View CD Project View 237 4 00 Sel 237 4 00 0 0 00 Opened in 0 36 seconds 3252 2Hz 237 3 01 11025 16bit Mono 11 46 MB 24 39 GB free Figure 61 2048 Band Spectral Display s Rev 1 3 281 SILICON LABS AN93 Audio Recording Pitfalls To facilitate communications protocol debugging it is imperative that audio recordings be made properly The two most common conditions that degrade the quality of audio recordings are m Waveform clipping due to excessive recording level m Time varying levels due to use of AGC automatic gain control Ti Untitied 4
217. difed har control_update 0 Tracks whether control register was modified needs updating nt BytesSent nt BytesReceived 0 har SFRPAGE SAVE char rxf processed 0 i i EA 0 Disable global interrupt EA 0 Dummy operation required by MCU as per MCU data sheet SFRPAGE SAVE SFRPAGE Save Current SFR page ReadModemStatus Read HIR1 to get current status Set default write value Always write the RXF and TXE bits to 1 by default to avoid inadvertently clearing those interrupts modem_control modem_status SiTXE SiRXF Clear the RTS bit if it s set The part comes out of reset with RTS set RTS will have no effect unless the modem gets the AT Q3 command Tf RTS isn t needed this code can be removed if RTSIsSet ClearRTS Clear the RTSb so data enters FIFO control_update 1 300 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 This is the main ISR handler loop stay in it until all interrupts are cleared while if wh if RXFInterrupt TXEInterrupt TimerInterrupt U70Interrupt RXF INTERRUPT Separate RXF interrupt from timer interrupt to reduce the number of reads RXFInterrupt MODULUS MASK is BUFFERSIZE 1 while rxBufferSize lt MODULUS MASK amp amp BytesReceived lt 10 readModemByte Set a flag to know that RXF w
218. drivers and signal selection From the software driver perspective the Si3000 has three configuration groups that are applied for the given system states handset speakerphone and hands free TAM For applications requiring handset recording of the OGM the software may use a fourth configuration for handset TAM These configuration groups define the digital gains analog gains and control bit settings for registers 1 5 6 7 and 9 of the 513000 Speakerphone algorithm includes input and reference gains that require a lower gain in the Si3000 For Hands Free TAM the speakerphone voice path is disabled so a higher analog gain can be used 7 3 3 System Voice Modes A system voice mode consists of the Si24xx ISOmodem and Si3000 settings combined with the PSTN status to achieve a desired function These modes describe the status of the hook switch the modem voice path Si3000 configuration input output and gains and the allowed operations Figure 31 illustrates the transition events among these modes 7 3 3 1 TAM Hands Free This is the general idle mode for recording an OGM local message VRX and reviewing an ICM local message 4 VTX All detectors are functional and incoming rings are indicated on the speaker via a tone or a melody modem is on hook routing audio between the Si3000 and the DTE interface The modem voice path is configured for half duplex audio with speakerphone algorithm disabled The Si3000 audio transmit and receive
219. ds with a lt CR gt lt CR gt The final entry in the EEPROM ends with an additional to provide the lt CR gt lt CR gt lt CR gt delimiter indicating the end of the EEPROM AT command macros can have a name consisting of any string of characters but must be the only command on a line 2 6 6 Firmware Upgrades Firmware upgrades patches are typically executed upon boot up and stored between the heading BOOT and the first CR CR delimiter A firmware upgrade has the format BOOT firmware upgrade CR The firmware upgrade ends with a CR which in combination with the finaleCR provides the lt CR gt lt CR gt delimiter which marks the end of the EEPROM contents A firmware upgrade can also be stored as an AT command macro in a system where using the firmware upgrade is optional The following are examples of boot commands AT command macros and automatically loaded firmware upgrades 2 6 6 1 Boot Command Example On power up or reset it is desired to set the UART rate to 115 2 kbps and limit the ISOmodem to V 34 and lower operation The AT commands required to do this manually are AT T12 lt CR gt AT amp H2 lt CR gt To implement this as a boot command the commands are BOOT lt CR gt AT T12 lt CR gt AT amp H2 lt CR gt lt CR gt This must be written to the EEPROM as ASCII hexadecimal in eight address blocks The actual AT commands to store this boot command in the EEPROM starting at
220. e od cg de 56 5 2 JOD quss Eo A LEA dA A eK C 57 53 amari buc s 57 54 AT Gommand Seu SE un a ke Ru bE Seius 57 5 5 Extended AT Commands atte BARR eRe esas 77 5 6 S RegISLIerSr na satu diues lt duck e B male idu wet 88 5 7 U BedisIBIS u s uuu dea ESTE UEBER S 91 U Register Summarny sores d us uu ures Ete y Secs Ci 96 5 7 2 U00 U16 Dial Tone Detect Filter 97 5 7 3 017 030 Busy Tone Detect Filter Registers 98 5 7 4 031 033 Ringback Cadence Registers 101 5 7 5 U34 U35 Dial Tone Timing 101 5 7 6 U37 U45 Pulse Dial 101 5 7 7 046 048 DTMF Dial 102 5 7 8 049 04 Ring Detect 103 5 7 9 U4D Modem Control Register 1 1 103 5 7 10 U4E Pre Dial Delay Time 105 4 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 5 7 11 U4F Flash Hook Time Register 105 5 7 12 050 05
221. e L1 Low L2 Medium L3 High 14 Very High Mn Speaker operation via AOUT MO Speaker is always off M1 Speaker is on while dialing and handshaking off in data mode M2 Speaker is always on M3 Speaker is off while dialing on during handshaking and retraining On Return to data mode from command mode O0 Return to data mode O1 Return to data mode and perform a full retrain at any speed except 300 bps 2 Return to data mode and perform rate renegotiation Qn Response mode Q0 Enable result codes See Table 43 Q1 Disable result codes enable quiet mode R Initiate V 23 Reversal U53 bit 15 must be set Sn S register operations see Table 45 5 List contents of all S registers Sn Display contents of S register n Sn x Set S register n to value x n and x are decimal values Vn Result code type See Table 43 VO Numeric result codes 62 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action V1 Verbal result codes Xn Call Progress Monitor CPM This command controls which CPM signals are monitored and reported to the host from the ISOmo dem See Table 43 X0 Basic results disable CPM Blind dial does not wait for dial tone CONNECT message does not include speed X1 Extended results disable CPM Blind dial CONNECT message includes speed X2 Extended results and detect dial tone only X1 with dial tone detec tion X3
222. e Trace routing is normally very short on modules since they are generally designed to be as small as possible Care should be taken to use ground and power planes in the low voltage circuitry whenever possible and to minimize the number of vias in the ground and power traces Ground and power should each be connected to the motherboard through only one pin so as not to create loops Bypassing and filtering components should be placed as close to the modem chip as possible with the shortest possible traces to a solid ground It is recommended that a pi filter be placed in series with the module Voc pin with a filter such as the one shown in Figure 22 on the reset line This filter also provides a proper power on reset to the modem Careful module design is critical since the module designer often has little control over the motherboard design and the environment in which the module will be used 4 4 2 2 Motherboard Design Motherboard design is critical to proper modem module performance and immunity to EMI and ESD events First and foremost good design and layout practices must be followed Use ground and power planes whenever possible Keep all traces short and direct Use ground fill on the top and bottom layers Use adequate power supply bypassing and use special precautions with the power and reset lines to the modem module Bypass right at the modem module connector Be sure the modem module is connected to through a single pin Likewi
223. e using the settings of other countries as a shortcut SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 143 AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization United Kingdom AT GCl B4 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Uruguay Defaults Uzbekistan Defaults Venezuela Defaults Yemen Defaults Zambia AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 144 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 2 2 2 Country Setting Register Tables Table 91 International Call Progress Registers Register Value Function Dial Tone Control 00 014 Dial Tone Detect Filter Coefficients U15 DTON Tone On Threshold U16 DTOF Tone Off Threshold U34 DTWD Dial Tone Detect Window U35 DMOT Dial Tone Minimum On Time Busy Tone Control U17 U2B Busy Tone Detect Filter Coeffi cients U2C BTON Busy Tone On Threshold U2D BTOF Busy Tone Off Threshold U2E BMTT Busy Tone Minimum Total Time U2F BDLT Busy Tone Delta Time U30 BMOT Busy Tone Minimum On Time Ringback Cadence Control U31 RMTT Ringback Tone Minimum Total Time U32 RDLT Ringback Tone Delta Time 033 RMOT Ringback Tone Minimum On Time
224. e and does not reflect loop polarity See U6C LVS 15 8 for 1 V bit resolution and signed two s complement format and U63 LCS 15 8 for 1 1 mA bit loop current measurement The values for loop voltage and loop current in U79 are calculated by the modem from the values in U6C and U63 respectively Table 77 Monitor Mode Values On Hook Voltage Monitor Mode Off Hook Current Monitor Mode 00000 No line connected 00000 No loop current 00001 Minimum line voltage VMIN 2 5 V 0 5 V 00001 Minimum loop current 11111 Maximum line voltage 87 V 20 11110 Maximum loop current 11111 2 Overload more than 60 mA in legacy TBR21 mode or more than 155 mA in other modes Table 78 U79 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 6 Reserved Read returns zero 5 0 LVCS Line Voltage Current Sense On Hook Voltage Monitor 2 75 V bit Off Hook Loop Current Monitor 3 mA bit U7A is a bit mapped register U7A resets to 0x0000 Bits 12 10 8 and 5 3 are reserved Bit 7 DOP is used in a method to determine whether a phone line supports DTMF or only pulse dialing See 6 10 Pulse Tone Dial Decision on page 169 for details 116 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Bit 6 ADD attempts DTMF dial then falls back to pulse dialing if unsuccessful The first digit is dialed as DTMF If a dial tone is still present after two seconds this suggests that the DTMF digit was not taken into account by t
225. e default delay is 16 ms When the modem is off hook in an overload condition LVCS 11111 full scale overload error condition an X is sent to the DTE and the OCD bit is set The Overcurrent Detection feature is controlled by changing U register settings The registers and bits that control these features are shown in Table 105 Table 105 Overcurrent Detection Register Bit Value Function 067 7 DCR DC Impedance Select U70 11 Overcurrent Detect Mask U70 3 OCD Overcurrent Detect 077 8 0 OHT Off Hook Time U79 4 0 LVCS Line Voltage Current Sense 6 10 Pulse Tone Dial Decision There are three methods to detect whether a telephone line supports DTMF dialing or pulse dialing only The first method which is the simplest may require the modem to go off hook more than once The second method is slightly more complicated but does not require the modem to go off hook multiple times 6 10 1 Method 1 Multiple Off Hook Transitions Use DTMF to dial the desired number with the ATDT command If the line accepts tone dialing the call is completed and connection to the remote modem proceeds as usual If the line only allows pulse dialing the modem hangs up and reports UN OBTAINABLE NUMBER This indicates that the modem detected a dial tone after the DTMF dial attempt Dial the number again using the ATDP command instead of ATDT to use pulse dialing Rev 1 3 169 SILICON LABS AN93 6
226. e delivery of data sent between two modems The error control methods are based on grouping data into frames with checksums determined by the contents of each frame The receiving modem checks the frames and sends acknowledgments to the transmitting modem When it detects a faulty frame the receiving modem requests a retransmission Frame length varies according to the amount of data transmitted and the number of retransmissions requested from the opposite end The ISOmodem supports V 42 and MNP2 4 error correction protocols V 42 LAPM is most commonly used and is enabled in the N3 and N4 modes In the default mode N3 the ISOmodem attempts to connect with V 42 error correction and V 42bis data compression 2457 34 15 and falls back to either V 42 only MNP 2 5 or no error correction wire mode if necessary In N4 mode the ISOmodem hangs up if a V 42 connection cannot be established If the 1 5 hangs up in V 42 mode after all data are successfully sent the result code is OK the modem hangs up before all data are successfully sent the result code is NO CARRIER If the modem connects without a protocol NO CARRIER is always sent The V 42 specification allows an alternate error correction protocol MNP2 4 MNP2 4 is enabled in N2 mode In 2 mode the ISOmodem hangs up if an MNP2 or 4 connection cannot be established 5 12 Wire Mode Wire mode NO is used to communicate with standard non error correcting mod
227. e device is powered up for SPI interface the modem becomes an SPI slave and the pins are configured to SS chip select input active low MOSI serial data input to modem MISO serial data output from modem and SCLK serial data clock input The HIRO and HIR1 registers described above are also available in SPI mode Each SPI operation consists of a control and address byte and a data byte The bit definitions of the control and address byte are shown in Table 24 The timing diagrams that follow show SPI read and write waveforms Refer to the device data sheet for timing characteristics Table 24 SPI Control and Address Bit Definitions Bit Function Meaning when High Meaning when Low 7 Address Access 1 Access HIRO 6 Read Write Read register Write register 5 0 Reserved Not allowed Must be all zeroes NSS 9 J SPI 2 Byte Write Protocol sk JUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUL NSS SPI 2 Byte Read Protocol Figure 9 SPI Read and Write Timing Diagrams 2 2 4 5 Interface Communication Modes Data flow control is implemented in the SPI and parallel interfaces differently from UART mode When parallel or SPI mode is selected data communication may be driven by interrupts or by polling Refer to Appendix C Parallel SPI Interface Software Implementation on page 290 for implementation details for both methods The parallel and SPI interfaces have four sources of interrupts and only one inte
228. e gain AT U19A 01E0 OK Set AEC filter length AT U19B 001F OK Set AEC adjustable delay AT U04F 01F4 OK Set flash hookswitch period AT U156 FF10 FFA2 FFD7 FF35 FEF3 FE68 FB7E OK AT U15D F90C FDDF 091D 4F51 091D FDDF F90C OK Set Handset Transmit FIR coefficients AT U164 FB7E FE68 FEF3 FF35 FFD7 FFA2 FF10 OK AT U16B 0041 00B1 OOAA 0001 FF92 0042 0183 OK 0172 0165 0 05 3940 05 0 0165 OK Set Handset Receive FIR coefficients AT U179 0183 0042 FF92 0001 00AA 00B1 0041 OK AT U1A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK AT U1A7 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 OK AT U1AE 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 4000 OK AT U1B5 0173 0273 045A 043B 0121 FD54 FE41 OK AT U1BC 0197 0543 FD03 30D6 FD03 0543 0197 OK AT U1C3 FE41 FD54 0121 043B 045A 0273 0173 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver AT U72 0108 OK Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 20 dB Line In gain Enable Line In AT U72 05D7 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 AT U72 065E OK 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 195 AN93 Table 119 Initialization Sequence Continued AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR A
229. e locked loop PLL timer UART interface a parallel interface option an SPI interface option and a DAA interface An optional voice mode is supported through an SSI interface and an external Si3000 voice codec The modem software is permanently stored in the on chip ROM Only modem setup information other than defaults and other software updates need to be stored on the host or optional external EEPROM and downloaded to the on chip RAM during initialization There is no nonvolatile on chip memory other than program ROM The following memory notation conventions are followed in this document m Single variable U registers are identified in this document as the register type i e U followed by the register s hexadecimal address and finally the register identifier in parenthesis e g U4A RGFD Once the full register reference is made continuing discussion refers to the register name to simplify the text The address and value of a single variable U register are always read from or written to the ISOmodem in hexadecimal m Bit mapped U registers are identified in this document at the top level as the register type i e U followed by the register s hexadecimal address and finally the register identifier in parenthesis e g U67 ITC1 Once the full register reference is made continuing discussion of the register at the top level refers to the register name to simplify the text The address and value of a bit mapped U register is always read fr
230. e loop current is stable prior to the measurement LCDN is used in conjunction with U4D 10 CLPD U4D 0 LCN Loop current debounce off time LCDF is used conjunction with LCN to delay the modem going on hook if loop current is interrupted during a connection The values are stored in the registers in milliseconds The default value for LCDN is 350 ms The default value for LCDF is 200 ms The range of values for both registers is 0 65535 ms 5 7 13 U52 Transmit Level Register 052 XMTL adjusts the modem transmit level referred to a 600 Q line see Table 60 The default value of 0x0000 results in a 9 85 dBm transmit level U52 can be used to decrease this level in 1 dBm steps approximately to the minimum modem receive threshold of 48 dBm with a register value of 0x0026 Table 57 Pre Dial Delay Timer Register Register Name Description Default U4E PRDD Pre dial delay time after ATD command that modem waits to dial ms 0x0000 units The ISOmodem stays on hook during this time Table 58 Flash Hook Time Register Register Name Description Default U4F FHT Flash hook time ms units 0x01F4 Table 59 Loop Current Debounce Registers Register Name Description Default U50 LCDN Loop current debouncing on time ms units 0x015E U51 LCDF Loop current debouncing off time ms units 0x00C8 Table 60 Transmit Level Register
231. e method used to analyze it Here the modem is an Si2404 configured with the following initialization string after reset A ES 6 8 gt gt gt OD 19 19 BE 29 ESA 0 0 0 1 0 ITF 0383 0128 U87 010A S V22 U7A 3 The following data stream was received over a noisy line OA 43 4F 4E 4E 45 B1 19 B2 30 93 19 BO 19 B2 29 C6 19 C6 07 EA D8 31 C2 19 0 19 B2 05 49 First the data will be analyzed to point out the 45 52 0 OA 43 B1 BO 05 14 54 19 1 9 9F 20 B2 B2 FA 7C 31 30 FF C8 2D 32 93 98 86 19 30 19 89 C4 BO occurrence 30 B1 18 40 19 OD 19 1 9 E6 B2 0A B2 BO 19 19 19 30 19 AO B2 BE 93 B2 CA 19 20 19 92 19 19 EF F9 0A Bl B2 14 19 4E 19 19 65 B2 4 of bit errors and spurious data algorithm to filter the data will be proposed Finally the resulting valid data will be presented Table 104 lists an initial analysis of some recurring data patterns BO B2 1 9 8D 20 19 B6 BO 00 43 B2 9E 19 Sd 41 30 F7 B2 A5 52 93 46 DA 43 52 Secondly a simple SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 165 AN93 Table 104 Bit Errors Data Meaning 19 BO Is an indication the modem has detected a pattern with more than 6 marks in a row Once this occurs the receiver begins looking for H
232. e operates with 8 bit data transfers using a single address bit When the parallel or SPI interface mode is selected the modem must be configured for a DTE interface or 8N1 only The host processor must calculate parity for the MSB The modem sends bits as received by the host and does not calculate parity Refer to Appendix C Parallel SPI Interface Software Implementation on page 290 for detailed parallel or SPI interface application information The parallel or SPI interface uses the FIFOs to buffer data in the same way as in UART mode with the addition of Hardware Interface Registers 0 HIRO and Hardware Interface Register 1 HIR1 The Hardware Interface Registers were formerly called Parallel Interface Registers PIRO and PIR1 in older products because those products would support only a parallel interface Flow control must be implemented by monitoring REM and TXE in HIR1 There is no protection against FIFO overflow Data transmitted when the transmit FIFO is full are lost Figure 6 shows the interaction of the transmit and receive FIFOs with the Hardware Parallel Interface Registers in the case of a parallel interface The arrangement is similar when the SPI interface is selected Table 21 on page 25 shows bit map of HIRO and HIR1 UART oriented control lines such as RTS and CTS are not used in Parallel and SPI Interface mode They are replaced by bits in the HIR1 register SPI and parallel operation only supports 8 bit data words
233. e routed to pin 13 of U2 easily and the emitter of Q4 be routed to U2 pin 12 easily Route these two traces next to each other so that the loop area formed by these two traces is minimized 7 Place and group the following components around the RJ11 jack FB1 FB2 RV1 R15 R16 C8 and C9 a Use 20 mil wide traces on this grouping to minimize impedance b Place C8 and C9 close to the RJ11 jack recognizing that a GND trace will be routed between C8 and C9 back to the Si24xx GND pin through a 20 mil wide trace The GND trace from C8 and C9 must be isolated from the rest of the Si3018 10 traces trace from C8 to GND and the trace from C9 to GND must be short and of equal lengths Rev 1 3 49 SILICON LABS AN93 8 After the previous step there should be some space between the grouping around U2 and the grouping of components around the RJ11 jack Place the rest of the components in this area given the following guidelines a Space U2 Q4 Q5 R1 R3 R4 R10 and R11 away from each other for best thermal performance b The tightest layout can be achieved by grouping R6 C10 Q2 R5 and Q1 c Place C3 next to D1 d Make the size of the Q1 Q3 Q4 and Q5 collector pads each sufficiently large for the transistor to safely dissipate 0 5 W under worst case conditions See the transistor data sheet for thermal resistance and maximum operating temperature information Implement collector pads on both the component an
234. e set if CWCID data are received The CWCID data are collected using the VCIDR command The data message is displayed in hexadecimal format using ASCII text The modem will return NO DATA if no Caller ID is available The VCIDR response is listed below for the following example CWCID message Date amp Time 09 11 16 21 ICLID Number 512 555 1234 Calling Name JOHN DOE VCIDR 3 0 20 01 08 30 39 31 31 31 36 32 31 02 0A 35 31 32 35 35 35 31 32 33 34 07 08 4A 4 48 4E 5F 44 AF 45 40 OK Table 99 defines the Multiple Data Message Format MDMF parameters in the example response Table 99 MDMF Parameters Character Description Hexadecimal Value ASCII Value Message Type MDMF 80 Message Length 20 Parameter Type Date Time 01 Parameter Length 08 Month 30 39 09 Day 31 31 11 Hour 31 36 16 Minutes 32 31 21 Parameter Type Number 02 Parameter Length 0A Number 35 31 32 35 35 35 31 32 33 34 5125551234 Parameter Type Name 07 Parameter Length 08 Name 4A 4F 48 4E 5 44 4 45 JOHN DOE Checksum 40 The SAS tone varies between countries and requires configuration of user registers U9F to UA9 The SAS FREQ U9F register sets the expected SAS tone frequency as shown in Table 100 The default SAS frequency is 440 Hz The expected cadence is set in cadence registers SAS CADENCEO through SAS 9 9 Rev 1 3 151 SILICON LABS AN93
235. e the tolerance and temperature drift of the load capacitor values For optimal V 92 performance it is recommended to increase the oscillator stability to 25 ppm For all the above three modes of operation the CLKIN XTALI pin Pin 1 can accept a 3 3 V external clock signal meeting the accuracy and stability requirements described above The CLKOUT AO pin outputs a signal derived from the 4 9152 MHz clock If the frequency of the output is controlled via register UGE CK1 using the 512404 512415 this signal is programmable from 2 64 MHz to 40 96 MHz If using the Si2434 or Si2457 this signal is programmable from 3 17 MHz to 49 152 MHz There are two special cases for the value of R1 1 00000 CLKOUT is disabled and R1 11111 default CLKOUT 2 048 MHz On older parts the CLKOUT pulse starts immediately after RESET goes high but on the most recent versions those including SPI and 32 kHz operation there is a small delay after RESET goes high The delay is of approximately 200 us when using 4 91592 MHz or 27 MHz and approximately 8 ms when using a 32 kHz clock 4 1 4 Ringer Network R7 and R8 comprise the ringer network These components determine the modem s on hook impedance at Tip and Ring These components are selected to present a high impedance to the line and care must be taken to ensure the circuit board area around these components is clean and free of contaminants such as solder flux and solder flakes Leakage on RNG1
236. e vertical scale In the frequency display the color of the wave indicates the energy at that combination of elapsed time and frequency The color scheme is programmable It is typical in the temporal view to see a dc offset until one applies a high pass filter a step that is rarely necessary 5 Untitled 4 wav Adobe Audition Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Window Help 2 25 204 Se 0 25 204 0 00000 View 0 00 000 0 51 083 0 51083 5 3dB 0 06 781 11025 16bit Mono 1100 K 24 45 GB free Figure 58 Adobe Audition Temporal View of a Good V 22 Transaction Rev 1 3 279 SILICON LABS AN93 23 Untitled 4 wav Adobe Audition View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help DSS SSS E E E po e n n S SEES E E e s MAA LEX ciu u _ __ __ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ 180 180 200 220 24 CEAN A 154211 AAA A 25 204 30244Hz amp 051109 11025 16bit Mono 110 2445GBfee Figure 59 Adobe Audition Spectral View of a Good V 22 Transaction An important parameter that is not obvious at first glance is the resolution in bands of the spectral display There is a tradeoff that must always be considered This is set up in the Options gt Settings Display tab in the Adobe Audition product This parameter allows for finer and coarser vertical frequency resolution at the cost of time domain uncertainty Figures 60 and 61
237. eceive gain regis SS ter UBF for TAM PSTN Set the RS232 to DAA transmit gain regis Avere Tan ter UB3 for TAM PSTN AT4VSD 129 OK Set sensitivity level for ICM recording silence detection Select G 711U 8 bit 64 kbps 5 4 format The voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM POM file 208 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 131 TAM PSTN Normal Answer OGM Playback with ICM Record Continued AT VLS 0 OK Disable voice mode Used as a transition point between non zero VLS voice modes 15 15 Setup off hook voice to PSTN See Table 117 on page 190 for details AT VTX CONNECT Trigger transmit operation lt DLE gt lt u gt TX Underrun Appears at the start of VTX before transmit data are seen Voice Stream Transmit OGM voice stream During voice stream capture the user can adjust the value via the lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjust ments and update the VGT value for future use lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK Terminate the transmit operation The modem will respond with OK to denote the return to command mode AT VSM 131 OK Select G 726 ADPCM 4 bit 32 kbps for mat AT VTS 1000 0 100 OK Play user record tone prompt AT U0B5 0200 OK Restore DAA to Si3000 receive gain pa
238. ed End of Message QUIET Ox6C Loop current interruption b 0x62 Busy tone detected d 0x64 Dial tone detected r 0x72 Ringing tone detected p Ox70 Line voltage increased parallel phone goes on hook DCE monitors loop current when off hook and line voltage when on hook P 0x50 Line voltage decreased parallel phone goes off hook DCE monitors loop current when off hook and line voltage when on hook a 0x61 Fax or data answer DCE has detected T 30 2100 Hz or V 21 1650 Hz answer tone f 0x66 Data answer DCE has detected 2225 Hz USB1 or AC answer sequence 0x28 Negative decreased loop current drift detected 0x29 Positive increased loop current drift detected 180 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 1 4 2 Complex Event Reporting Table 113 DLE Complex Event Reports DCE to DTE Format lt DLE gt lt X gt Response lt DLE gt lt gt Response Description Tag DRON Distinctive Ring Cadence On time tag See VDR for details DROF Distinctive Ring Cadence Off time tag See VDR for details DATE CID DATE tag Full format is DATE HHMM Type and II supported TIME CID TIME tag Full format is TIME MMDD Type and II supported NMBR CID NMDR tag Full format is lt gt or P or O Type and II supported NAME CID NAME tag Full format is NAME lt Listing gt Type and Il supported MESG CID MESG tag Full format is MESG lt D
239. ed immediately upon writing 065 13 PDN 1 Once in the Power Down mode the modem requires a hardware reset via the RESET pin to become active again 2 4 2 Wake on Ring Mode The ISOmodem can be set to enter a low power wake on ring mode when not connected Wake on ring mode is entered using the command AT amp Z The ISOmodem returns to the active mode when one of the following happens There is a 1 to 0 transition on TXD in the UART mode There is a 1 to 0 transition on CS in the parallel mode There is a 1 to 0 transition on SSS in the SPI mode An incoming ring is detected A parallel telephone is picked up m Line polarity reversal 2 4 3 Sleep Mode The ISOmodem can be set to enter a low power sleep mode when not connected and after a period of inactivity determined by the S24 register The ISOmodem enters the sleep mode S24 seconds after the last DTE activity after the transmit FIFO is empty and after the last data are received from the remote modem The ISOmodem returns to the active mode when one of the following happens There is a 1 to 0 transition on TXD in the UART mode There is a 1 to 0 transition on CS in the parallel mode There is a 1 to 0 transition on SSS in the SPI mode An incoming ring is detected A parallel telephone is picked up Line polarity reversal The delay range for S24 is 1 to 255 seconds The default setting of 524 0 disables the sleep timer and keeps the modem in the normal power mode regardless of act
240. em is done via the controller The controller uses AT ATtention commands S registers and U registers to configure and control the modem 56 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 2 DSP The DSP data pump is primarily responsible for modulation demodulation equalization and echo cancellation Because the ISOmodem is controller based all interaction with the DSP is via the controller through AT commands S registers and or U registers 5 3 Memory The user accessible memory the ISOmodem includes the S registers accessed via the ATSn command and the U registers accessed via the AT Rhh and AT Uhh commands These memory locations allow the modem to be configured for a wide variety of functions and applications and for global operation 5 4 AT Command Set AT commands begin with the letters AT end with a carriage return and are case insensitive However case cannot be mixed in a single command The only exception to this format is the A command This command is neither preceded by nor followed by a carriage return but re executes the previous command immediately when the 4 character is typed Generally AT commands can be divided into two groups control commands and configuration commands Control commands such as ATD cause the modem to perform an action in this case dialing The value of this type of command is changed at a particular time to perform a particular action For example the command ATDT1234 C
241. ems When optioned with the ISOmodem falls back to Wire mode if it fails in an attempt to negotiate a V 42 or MNP2 4 link with the remote modem Error correction and data compression are not active in wire mode 124 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 13 EPOS Electronic Point of Sale Applications EPOS applications are discussed in Appendix A EPOS Applications on page 257 5 13 1 EPOS Fast Connect The ISOmodem supports several fast connect modes of operation to reduce the time of a connect sequence in originate mode 5 13 2 EPOS V 29 Fast Connect In addition to the low modulation speed fast connect modes the modem only Si2493 57 34 15 also supports a fast connect mode based on the 9600 bps V 29 fax modulation standard V 29 Fast Connect is available as a patch Please contact Silicon Laboratories for additional details 5 14 Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode V 80 Synchronous Access Mode The ISOmodem supports two different DTE interfaces to implement an Asynchronous DTE to Synchronous DCE conversion Table 84 provides high level options to choose between the Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode and the newer V 80 synchronous access mode Table 84 Synchronous Mode Overview Mode U Register 5 Settings Neither 2 0 ES D D Legacy Synchronous U7A 2 1 ES D D DCE Mode Synchronous Access ES 6 8 Mode The synchronous access mode has more features than the Legacy Synchronous D
242. en adopted to reduce the transaction time Some server manufacturers make changes to the modem with the intent of making it difficult for competing terminals to connect Many EPOS servers have out of specification clocks and use reduced handshake timing V 22bis 2400 bps is occasionally used in EPOS terminals as well The primary method by which V 22bis terminals achieve a shorter connection time has been through the use of a shorter answer tone V 29 FastPOS is a Hypercom proprietary protocol based on the V 29 Fax standard For these reasons EPOS applications often require some amount of reverse engineering and fine tuning of the ISOmodem performance typically with a patch Recently improvements to the overall user experience have necessitated the storage of transaction information within the EPOS terminal based on some predefined criteria These stored transactions are typically sent as part of a larger transaction at a later time This effectively increases the message length to over 2 kB necessitating the use of higher speed modulations such as V 29 FastPOS or V 32bis The choice of either V 29 FastPOS versus V 32bis is a tradeoff between transaction message length and connection times It is common for a terminal to support both of these modulations Modulation Typical Connect Time Sec V 90 25 V 34 10 7 V 32b 7 8 V 22b 5 0 V 22 3 0 V 22 FastConnect 0 6 V 29 FastPOS 0 5 Note Does not include dial delay VISA II 7 1
243. ent The 5 bit LVCS register U79 LVCS 4 0 reports line voltage measurements when on hook and loop current measurements when off hook Using the LVCS bits the user can determine the following m When on hook detect if a line is connected m When on hook detect if a parallel phone is off hook m When off hook detect if a parallel phone goes on or off hook m Detect if enough loop current is available to operate 3 7 Billing Tone Detection Billing tones or metering pulses generated by the central office can cause connection difficulties in modems The billing tone is typically a 12 kHz or 16 kHz signal and is sometimes used in Germany Switzerland and South Africa Depending on line conditions the billing tone may be large enough to cause major modem errors The ISOmodem chipset can provide feedback when a billing tone occurs and when it ends Billing tone detection is enabled by setting the BTE bit 068 bit 2 Billing tones less than 1 1 Vp the line are filtered out by the low pass digital filter on the ISOmodem The ROV bit 068 bit 1 is set when a line signal is greater than 1 1 indicating a receive overload condition The BTD bit is set when a line signal billing tone is large enough to excessively reduce the line derived power supply of the line side device Si3018 10 When the BTE bit is set the dc termination is changed to an 800 O dc impedance This ensures minimum line voltage levels even in the presence of
244. er is ignored when writing to the HIRO Interrupt Service and Polling Layer Sample code for this layer can be found in the ISR and Polling c file This code can be ported to other applications with minimal changes needed to compile on the host platform This block contains the interrupt service routines for both modem access MCU to PC UART access Except for modemCommunicationUpdate the application layer typically does not need to access these functions directly The access mode is interrupt driven by default In order to select polling mode the system must set the global variable po11ingNotInterruptMode toa nonzero value The software is designed to allow switching back and forth between polling and interrupt modes If only one mode is ever used the code can be simplified accordingly The next two sections detail out the functioning of the polling and interrupt modes 292 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Polling HIR1 Method Transmitting and receiving data to and from the modem is accomplished by polling HIR1 status bits and REM Polling is implemented by the following code fragment excerpted from modemCommunicationUpdate which must run in an infinite loop static char bytesToSend 12 Declared in modemCommunicationUpdate if readModem HIR1 amp SiREM 0 66 rxBufferSize lt MODULUS MASK readModemByte if gUARTToModemBufferSize gt 0 If there are data to be sent i
245. erphone operation employs an acoustical echo canceller AEC acoustical echo suppressor AES double talk detector DTD and line echo canceller LEC This solution provides the following performance m Programmable echo tail filter length up to 64 ms m Convergence speed white noise less than 1 6 s m Single talk echo suppression better than 48 dB m Double talk echo suppression better than 30 dB The software reference section presents the implemented V 253 AT Commands V 253 DLE commands V 253 lt DLE gt events and U registers The voice reference section covers the functional operation of handset and speakerphone modes and includes use cases with programming examples 7 1 Software Reference 7 1 1 AT Command Set In Voice Command State AT commands are used to control the DCE The DCE responds with verbose response strings during Voice Command State During the Voice Transmit Voice Receive and Voice Duplex States the DLE shielded commands are used The lt DLE gt events can appear in all states 7 1 2 Extended Commands Table 110 Extended AT Command Set Command Action Data Voice Mode Selection mode Description FCLASS lt mode gt Data default Voice mode 256 SMS mode Note An ATH command will automatically transition the DCE to FCLASS O Fixed DTE Rate lt rate gt Description 0 Automatically detect the baud rate IPR lt rate gt BPS The decimal value of the
246. ers that control international configuration settings such as dc and ac termination ringer impedance and detection current limit and billing tone protection U67 is a bit mapped register with bits 5 4 8 11 10 and 15 14 reserved see Table 67 U67 resets to 0x0008 with a power on or manual reset Bit 7 DCR is used to set the dc line termination of the modem DCR 0 is the normal mode of operation with dc impedance selected by U67 3 2 DCV When DCR 1 the device presents a dc line impedance of 800 which can be used to enhance operation with a parallel phone for improved low line voltage performance and for overload This bit must be set to 0 when the modem is on hook See 6 2 1 DC Termination on page 133 for details Bit 6 OHS is used to control the speed with which the modem drops the line The default setting OHS 0 causes the modem to go from the off hook state drawing loop current to the on hook state not drawing loop current quickly This operation is acceptable in many countries However some countries such as Italy South Africa and Australia have spark quenching requirements Spark quenching can be accomplished by placing a resistor and a capacitor across the hookswitch or by controlling the off hook to on hook transition speed to prevent excessive voltage buildup Slowly reducing the loop current to zero fulfills the spark quenching requirement without the extra components Setting OHS 1 causes the hooksw
247. ers the three major TAM related system voice modes Some modes offer multiple operations The TAM Hands Free mode is the general voice idle mode It is used for OGM recording review and local ICM recording review via hands free operation The TAM Handset mode is similar to TAM Hands Free except that the audio is handled over the handset The TAM PSTN mode is for playback of the OGM and recording the ICM The TAM PSTN mode also permits remote OGM and ICM record review via DTMF tone control The VTX command is used to play voice menu options prompts All the use cases in this section start with the modem in TAM Hands Free mode which is configured in the initialization sequence in Table 119 on page 194 7 6 2 Hands Free Idle The modem will use the events listed in Table 112 on page 179 to communicate status The lt DLE gt lt R gt event indicates ring detection The VTS command can be used to play one or more single dual tone sequences If enabled Type CID is decoded after the first ring and sent via a complex DLE event report See Table 126 for details Table 126 Local Ring Notification with Type CID Event Modem to Host Result Host to Modem Commands Data Codes Data Local Modem Actions lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone lt DLE gt lt X gt CIDM DATE 0101 TIME 0110 Receive Type CID DLE complex report 102 NAME JONES JENNIFER lt DLE gt
248. es a test loop from the DSP through the DAA interface the ISOcap interface the 813018 10 and the hybrid circuit This test exercises the Si24xx the Si3018 10 and many external components A phone line termination with loop current and no dial tone is required for this test since it involves the line side chip Si3018 10 and the hybrid The modem is off hook during this test The AT amp T3 mode is useful during emitted and conducted radiation testing To test the ISOcap link only set U62 DL 1 1 and issue the AT amp T3 command The command is also useful as a production test This command places 25 ms low pulse on the and DCD pins It also makes INT the inverse of ESC and RTS the inverse of CTS Sending the command can be used to verify the connection of these pins to the circuit board This command is terminated by resetting the ISOmodem Rev 1 3 249 SILICON LABS AN93 10 3 Board Test The modem and DAA chips come from Silicon Laboratories 10096 functionally tested on automatic test equipment to guarantee compliance with the published chip specifications The functionality of a finished product containing an ISOmodem chipset depends not only on the functionality of the modem chipset after assembly but also on discrete components and product related software Finished product test requirements and procedures depend on the manufacturer and on the product Consequently no universal final test procedure can be de
249. es for IGND 10 C3 should be placed across the diode bridge and the area of the loop formed from Si3018 pin 11 through C3 to the diode bridge and back to Si3018 pin 15 should be minimized 11 FB1 FB2 and RV1 should be placed as close as possible to the RJ11 12 C8 and C9 should be placed so that there is a minimal distance between the nodes where they connect to digital ground 13 Use at least a 20 mil wide trace from RJ11 to FB1 FB2 RV1 C8 and C9 14 The routing from Tip and Ring of the RJ11 to the ferrite beads should be well matched 15 The traces from the RJ11 through R7 and R8 to U2 Pin 8 and Pin 9 should be well matched These traces may be up to 10 cm long 16 The distance from Tip and Ring through EMC capacitors C8 and C9 to digital ground must be short 17 There should be no digital ground plane in the DAA Section 18 Minimize the area of the loop from U2 pin 7 and pin 10 to C5 and C6 and from those components to U2 pin 15 IGND 19 R2 should be placed next to the base of Q5 and the trace from R2 to U2 pin16 should be less than 20 mm 20 Place C4 close to U2 and connect C4 to U2 using a short direct trace 21 The area of the loop formed from U2 pin 13 to the base of Q4 and from 02 pin 12 to the emitter of Q4 should be minimized 22 The trace from C7 to U2 pin 15 should be short and direct 23 The trace from to the 01 02 node should
250. esent go to the next step m Checkthe Phone Line Check the phone line with a manual telephone to be sure that there is a dial tone and that dialing is possible The dc voltage across Tip and Ring should read approximately 40 52 V with the phone on hook m Resetthe Modem Do a manual reset on the modem Hold ISOmodem 12 RESET low for at least 5 ms return to 3 3 V and wait for at least 300 ms before executing the first AT command m Checkthe DTE Setup UART Mode Be sure the DTE host serial port is configured the same as the modem The default condition is eight data bits no parity bit one stop bit and a DTE rate of 19 2 kbps m Checkthe DTE Connection UART Mode zu 2 Check the DTE interface connection Be sure the RTS ISOmodem pin 8 and CTS ISOmodem pin 11 signals are low m Check the Pulldown Configuration Resistors m Checkthe Modem Configuration Read back the modem register settings and correct any inconsistencies The ATS command lists the contents of all S registers and the AT R command lists the contents of all U registers If the problem was not located with these basic troubleshooting steps it is time to narrow the problem down to the host system hardware and software the ISOmodem chip and associated components or the Si3018 10 associated components 242 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 AT OK The modem responds with an OK to the command AT lt CR gt This indicates that the host p
251. ets are placed after the and separated by commas Note Host DTE driver must per form these substitutions Octet B as Octet C as Octet D as A Octet E as B Octet F as C Note OK is sent at end of trans mission 16 Wait for Kissoff tone 17 1 25 s has elapsed But modem still has not reported lt DLE gt lt c gt to DTE AT Y254 Q83FB 01AF Check to see if start of a Kissoff Tone has been detected A non zero response i e not 0000 from modem denotes start of tone is detected Modem will send lt DLE gt lt c gt to DTE after it has verified that the Kissoff Tone burst duration is valid DLE c Acknowledgement from RECEIVER detected Note DLE c is sent at end of tone burst 20 Delay 250 ms before sending next Data Tone Message Repeat from Step 15 for sending more Data Codes ATH OK Hang up at end of session 232 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 145 Ademco Mode of Operation Continued Step DTE to Modem Command Modem to DTE Remarks Indication AT U48 64 OK Restore DTMF parameters to comply with normal dialing requirements Repeat from Step 6 for next call SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 233 AN93 9 Chinese ePOS SMS 9 1 Introduction An ePOS transaction normally begins with the ePOS terminal calling the server and transmitting data first In this instance the ter
252. f bytesToSend 12 Check TXE only every twelve bytes sent status readModem amp SiTXE if status If transmit FIFO empty writeModem HIRO pullByteForModem OxFF bytesToSend else No need to check TXE because transmit FIFO is twelve deep writeModem HIRO pullByteForModem OxFF bytesToSend If the bytes to send count 0 reset the count if bytesToSend bytesToSend 12 Interrupt Service Routine ISR Method Transmitting and receiving data to and from the modem is accomplished by servicing the interrupts generated by the modem The interrupt sources are described below Whenever new communication is initiated after a period of idling with respect to the TXE interrupt the interrupt must be jump started by calling the interrupt service routine manually RXF Interrupt Receive FIFO Almost Full The RXF bit indicates the status of the receive FIFO If this bit is set the FIFO is either full contains 12 bytes or almost full contains 10 or 11 bytes There are two ways to clear this interrupt the RXF bit in HIR1 can be cleared by the host or enough bytes can be read from the receive FIFO to leave 9 bytes or less thus removing the condition for the interrupt If the host clears the RXF bit the interrupt is disabled The interrupt can be rearmed only when the receive FIFO drops below the ten byte threshold The interrupt can then trigger again when the
253. f it is supposed to be in V 29 Long Train vs V 29 Short Train The primary host responsibility is to take care of RTS 6 Data to from the modem is expected to be in V 80 format Example Program in C C This program shows how to establish an SDLC V 29 FastPOS link and keep the loop alive How to use the program This program is meant to run for only a few minutes for testing It is run after a reset is done loads a patch from patch txt and calls using the line it finds in tel no txt Both files need to terminate in CR LF The tel no txt file must contain a complete telephone number dialing line followed by a CR e g ATDT8 5551212 N29 test cpp 2005 Silicon Labs Inc Copyright Rev 0 0602 finclude stdafx h include windows h finclude stdlib h include lt stdio h gt include lt time h gt char fnamePatch patch txt char fnameTelno Tel_no txt char SendAndWaitFor char cpCommand Defines the entry point for the console application All rights reserved char cpInBuffRd char cpResponse int iTimeoutMs char WaitForResponse char cpResponse char cpInputBuffer int iTimeOutInMs void SetupSerPort void void AssertRTS bool bAssert void AssertDTR bool bAssert void Delay long iMs bool GetFileTextLine char cpIn void LoadAndSendPatch void char cpInBuffer char cpOutBuffer char cpInputWr char cpErrorStrin
254. f operation cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor at tgci B5 r cpInputRd amp D2 enables escape pin X4 nabl OK r n 300 OKNrNn 300 Get the patch Display the patch CRC KKK KKK ck ck kk kk kk k MODIFY to your 300 xtended result codes NV2 report connect message only 0 disable data compression 841 Auto line status detection mode is the fixed method 41 0 2 No data flow control Hardware flow control cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT amp D2x4 V2 Sc0SV1 IFC 0 2 r cpInputRd OK r n 300 NNO wire mode FCLASS 1 cpInputRd cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT UAA 8004Nr cpInputRd ES 6 8 HDLC mumbo jumbo SendAndWaitFor AT NO FCLASS 1 r cpInputRd OK r n 300 OK r n 300 enabled synch access 6 enables synch access on initiating a connect 2 lt Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 263 AN93 The enables synch access on answering a connect cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT ES 6 8 r cpInputRd OK r n 300 AT ESA 0 0 0 1 synch access mode control modem transmits SYN if underrun during transparent mode 0 modem tx s flags after underrun after flag happens in framed sub mode 0 modem tx s abort on underrun in frame middle during framed sub mode srr enables CRC generation and checking cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor AT ESA 0 0 0 1
255. fined Testing the modem in a finished product is done for several reasons First it is important to be sure the modem chipset and peripheral components were installed correctly during assembly and were not damaged Second it is necessary to be sure the correct component values were installed and that there are no manufacturing problems such as solder bridges cold solder joints or missing components Functional testing can be used to test special features such as intrusion detection Caller ID and overcurrent detection An intrusion can be simulated by placing a 1 kO resistor across Tip and Ring through a relay Caller ID testing requires special test equipment such as the Rochelle 3500 or Advent Al 150 Many manufacturers choose to use built in self test features such as the amp T3 Loopback test described above Others do a complete functional test of the modem by originating and answering a call and successfully passing a data file in each direction This process tests the modem and line side chip functionality the associated external components and the software controlling the modem This test can be done with a modem under test MUT and a known good reference modem or between two modems under test Testing two modems under test at once reduces test and setup times Modem operational testing is time consuming and adds to product cost It is up to the manufacturer to determine whether operational testing is warranted Analog modems Bell
256. from the PSTN 7 6 3 4 Review ICM The Review ICM is identical to the Review OGM procedure provided in Table 130 on page 206 The main difference is that one of the ADPCM formats is generally used to conserve message space 7 6 4 TAM PSTN This system voice mode differs from the TAM Hands Free and TAM Handset modes in that the modem is off hook and connected to the PSTN Due to the paired nature of the VGR and VGT the voice driver should maintain two copies of each one for RS232 to Si3000 and another for RS232 to DAA See Figure 29 on page 188 for details 7 6 4 1 Normal Answer OGM Playback with ICM Record Table 131 TAM PSTN Normal Answer OGM Playback with ICM Record Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Codes Data lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone lt DLE gt lt X gt CIDM DATE 0101 TIME 0110 Receive Type CID DLE complex report NMBR 102 NAME JONES JENNIFER lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Ring Detection The voice driver will use a lt DLE gt lt R gt rings to answer count This example uses three rings before answer AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Mute the speaker so the OGM is not heard AT U199 8 OK locally The user may remove this com mand to allow local review 2 Set the DAA to RS232 r
257. g FILE hpPatchFile FILE hpTelNoFile DCB dcb HANDLE hCom char pcCommPort COMI COMMTIMEOUTS sCOMMTIMEOUTS int iCharCount char cpInputRd cpInputRd temp cpInput test 255 8 262 Rev 1 3 e SI ICON LABS AN93 char PKT STR char 0x30 char 0x73 char 0x19 char Oxbl char O char caRR PKT 5 char 0x30 char 0x19 char 0xa0 char 0x19 char Oxb1 char 0 17 char caSNRM PKT 5 char 0x30 char 0x93 char 0x19 char Oxb1 char 0O 17 char caRX PKT STR char 0x19 char Oxb1 0 1 void AlternateCall void int main int char argv Initialize these buffers cpInBuffer char malloc 100000 cpOutBuffer char malloc 100000 cpErrorString char malloc 100000 for int i 0 i 10000 i cpInBuffer i 0 cpOutBuffer i ll cpErrorString i cpInputRd cpInBuffer cpInputWr cpInBuffer unsigned long ulNoOfbytes SetupSerPort LoadAndSendPatch AssertDTR true Leave DTR asserted for calling cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor atzNr cpInputRd OKNrNn 300 soft reset Just in case Delay 300 Important AN93 implies this delay must be done after ATZ cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor ATEONr cpInputRd cpInputRd temp SendAndWaitFor AT amp T6Nr cpInputRd printf 55 Mn cpInputRd cpInputRd cpInputRd temp setup county o
258. h OGM playback gt oTones 814 record message using RS232 Si3000 RS232 DTE voice stream pass gt Si3000 gt RS232 gt Si3000 through with audio monitor ing using Si3000 Ring CID1 Await call 20 S On Hook FDV DTMF 2Tones 190 Rev 1 3 e SI ICON LABS AN93 Table 117 Voice Mode Operations FCLASS 8 Continued Active VLS Mode Primitive DAA Detectors Description VTX VRX VSP VTS Ring CID1 Await call with tone genera RS232 21 S On Hook FDV DTMF tor connections to AOUT for 5 gt 2Tones control beeps ring tone etc 2Tones Detector for 2 pro grammed tones Table 118 FCLASS and IDLE State Transitions Expected Response Input Current Modem Settings Command or FCLASS 0 1 FCLASS 8 Eveni VNH 0 VNH 1 VNH 2 VNH 0 VNH 1 VNH 2 ON HK ON HK OFF HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ATH or VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 DTR off amp D2 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK AT amp F VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 FCLASS 0 4FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 VLS 0 ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ON HK ATZ or VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 VNH 0 DTR off 803 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FCLASS 0 FC
259. he central office In that case the ISOmodem redials the first digit and remaining digits as pulses If a dial tone is not present after two seconds the ISOmodem assumes that the first digit was recognized and dials the remaining digits as DTMF However in a typical PBX environment where dialing a DTMF digit typically 8 or 9 is required to obtain an outside line this method does not give any indication that the outside line can accept TDMF dialing Bit 1 HDLC controls whether the normal asynchronous mode default is used or the transparent HDLC mode is enabled See 5 14 Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode V 80 Synchronous Access Mode on page 125 for more details on these modes Bit 0 controls whether the normal ITU Bellcore modem handshake default or a special fast connect handshake is used Fast connect is typically used in specialized applications such as point of sale terminals where it is important to connect and transfer a small amount of data rapidly see Table 79 Table 79 U7A Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 V29FC Enable V29 Fast Connect used in conjunction with AT FCLASS 1 1 Enable 0 Disable 14 CNSMS Chinese EPOS SMS enable 1 Enable 0 Disable 13 V29EM Use EM shielding to change direction of half duplex V 29FC 0 EM shielding 1 lt EM gt lt rrn gt lt 0x19 gt lt 0xBC gt to receive a V29FC packet 2 lt EM gt lt rtn gt lt 0x19 gt lt 0xBD gt to send a V29FC packet 1 RTS
260. he default settings Bit 4 PDL 0 default enables the device for normal operation PDL 1 powers the Si3018 10 down This is test mode typically used for board level debugging not normal modem operation 065 resets to with a power on or manual reset Table 65 U65 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 Reserved Read returns zero 14 PWMG gain 0 No gain 1 6 dB gain applied to AOUT 13 PDN Power Down 0 Normal 1 Power Down Rev 1 3 107 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 65 U65 Bit Map Continued 12 7 Reserved Read returns zero 6 5 Reserved Do not change use read modify write 4 PDL Line Side Chip Power Down 0 Normal operation 1 Places the Si3018 10 in Power Down mode 3 2 Reserved Read returns zero 1 0 Reserved not change use read modify write 066 5 is a bit mapped register with all bits except bit 6 reserved see Table 66 Bit 6 FDT is a read only bit that reports whether or not an isolation capacitor frame lock is established FDT is typically used for board level debugging and is not used during normal modem operation 066 resets to 0 40 with a power on or manual reset assuming framelock is established The upper byte is variable 5 7 17 U67 U6A International Configuration Registers International Configuration Registers include U67 through U6A These are bit mapped regist
261. he INT pin The ISOmodem then searches for the Idle State Tone Alert signal and when detected echoes STAS to the host After the Idle State Tone Alert Signal is completed the ISOmodem goes off hook then on hook to apply the 15 ms wetting pulse to the local loop Next the ISOmodem prepares to detect the CID preamble After 50 continuous mark bits 1s are detected the CIDM response is echoed to the host indicating that the mark sequence was received and that FSK modulated CID data will follow and INT is again triggered Then the CID algorithm looks for the start bit assembles the characters and sends them to the host as they are received When the CID burst is finished the carrier is lost and NO CARRIER is echoed to the host The ISOmodem detects ring bursts echoes RING to the host increments the ring counter S1 and automatically answers after the number of rings specified in SO If the wetting pulse is not required VCDT 0 or 1 can be used in the UK 6 3 4 Japan Caller ID The ISOmodem detects a line polarity reversal and a brief ring burst then goes off hook and triggers the INT pin CID data are sent using the V 23 specification After detecting 40 mark bits 1s the ISOmodem searches for a start bit CIDM is echoed to the host when a start bit is received The ISOmodem then begins to assemble characters and sends them to the host When the CID signal ends the ISOmodem hangs up and echoes NO CARRIER to the host The modem then waits f
262. he high frequency DTMF tone leaving only the low frequency DTMF tone when ATDT is sent The tone is output continuously until any key is pressed To restart the tone output type AT Y1DT1 To change the tone power level type ATU46 00X0 where X is a hexadecimal value 0 representing output power in 1 dBm steps from 0 to 15 dBm 146 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 2 2 4 Special Requirements for Serbia and Montenegro The following are special network requirements for Serbia and Montenegro These specifications are based on the best information available and are believed to be correct m DC Feed 48 or 60 V Feeding Bridge 2 x 400 O or 2 x 500 Q Network Impedance 600 resistive On Hook Idle State Noise 60 dBm ac Ringer impedance gt 2 5 DTMF Transmit 11 to 9 dBm and 8 to 6 dBm Data Transmit Level 0 dBm to 15 dBm in 1 dB steps average 13 dBmo Out of band energy not specified Pulse Dial 1 6 1 15 96 pulse pause e Rep Rate 10 pps e Interdial Pause 250 ms x 800 ms 510 96 m Ring signal 25 Hz 80 90 Vans m Dial Tone 425 Hz 15 e Level 8 dBm x 12 dBm e Cadence 200 ms 10 ON 300 ms 10 OFF 700 ms 10 ON 800 ms 10 OFF m Busy Tone 425 Hz 15 96 e Level 8 dBm x 12 dBm e Cadence 500 ms 10 ON 500 ms 10 OFF 6 2 3 Blacklisting Blacklisting prevents dialing the same phone number more than three times in three minutes Any attempt to d
263. her conditions Updating ACL reduces the probability of false intrusion detection by ensuring the ACL reference reflects the most recent off hook conditions If FACL 1 a value can be written into ACL by the host This value is not updated and remains in the ACL register until overwritten by the host or until FACL is returned to 0 and updates from LVCS overwrite the stored value Writing an initial value to ACL eliminates the possibility of the modem going off hook for the first time simultaneously with an intrusion and storing the intrusion loop current in ACL Bits 7 5 DCL set the differential level between ACL and LVCS that triggers an off hook PPD interrupt DCL is adjustable in 3 mA units The default value is 2 6 mA Bits 4 0 ACL ACL provides a means of detecting a parallel phone intrusion during the time between the modem going off hook and the 077 15 12 IST time value If ACL 0 the ISOmodem has no reference and must use the loop current sample from the first off hook event as a reference for parallel phone intrusion detection Typically the host sets ACL to an approximate value and FACL 0 before the first off hook event after powerup or reset This allows the updated ACL value to be used for subsequent calls and eliminates a potential detection problem if an intrusion occurs simultaneously when the modem goes off hook for the first time after a powerup or reset If ACL 0 it is ignored by the off hook intrusion algorithm A PPD i
264. hone Disabled section Use calibrated value from Receive Gain Calibration ee ok Speakerphone Disabled section Setup off hook voice mode See Table 122 on page 198 AT VLS 13 OK for details This command will switch the modem to off hook state Enable speakerphone voice path See Table 136 for AT VSP 1 OK details Dial Number 218 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 7 4 Speakerphone Configuration This section covers the speakerphone call and answer cases and the switching between the handset mode and speakerphone mode Table 136 contains the initial configuration that is used by all dialing use cases The sequence is also sent for the answer case The user will have been notified of the incoming call through a local VTS ring tone and a SP Button On Event would prompt the Speakerphone Configuration sequence to answer the call The UB1 UB5 UB6 and Si3000 register configurations vary with the customer s production hardware The UB5 register serves as the general volume control in this mode Table 136 Speakerphone Configuration Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Local Modem Actions Result Codes Data AT U199JA OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec Disable voice mode Used as a transition Ok point between non zero VLS voice modes Setup off hook voice mode See Table 117 AT VLS 13 OK on page 190 for details This command
265. ial a fourth time within three minutes results in a BLACKLISTED result code If the blacklisting memory is full any dial to a new number results in a BLACKLIST FULL result code The number of allowable calls may be adjusted in S43 If S43 3 the third call in S44 seconds is blacklisted The blacklisting time may be adjusted with register S44 second units A number is added to the blacklist only if the connection fails The S42 register controls blacklisting Any number that is currently blacklisted is reported with the B command 542 Blacklisting 0 default Disabled 1 Enabled AT Command Function B Report blacklisted number if any followed by OK Example 5121234567 OK Rev 1 3 147 SILICON LABS AN93 6 3 Caller ID The ISOmodem supports all major Caller ID CID types CID is disabled by default VCID 0 Setting VCID 1 via the AT VCID 1 command enables decoded formatted CID while setting VCID 2 causes raw Caller ID data to be output The specific CID mode is selected by VCDT which is set to the US Telcordia standard by default The AT VCDT n command is used to define the CID mode according to the decimal values of n defined in Table 94 U70 4 CID is a sticky bit that is set when CID preamble is received and cleared with an Interrupt read command Table 94 Caller ID Modes n VCDT Settings 0 After ring only default
266. iations It also shows evidence of a microphone being used instead of the Radio Shack adapter This is visible in the frequency domain graph as horizontal striations an undulating frequency response during the scrambled portion of the V 22 communication One can also see third harmonic distortion 282 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Details of Some Low Speed Protocols The following annotated recordings give basic ideas of what to expect the EPOS modem transactions will look like There are many possible variations of these examples both in and out of compliance with published standards in common use There are also very unusual variations that Silicon Labs has made efforts to support in order to allow customers to connect to non standard and essentially broken modems Some of these are described in a later section t V22 misc captures wav Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window ENE PSS IS 2 Adobe Audition Bell 212 2225 Hz Answer Tone DTMF dialing 3 14 0 pamoga ejeje lie Sel 3 14 156 234 Le ou o View 308091 3 18669 doa pepe ppp w 5 4 ES 2 29 26 2590 27 24 AS 422 5 End Length 3 14 156 20 99MB 24 80GBfree 11025 16bit Mono LEE 33 3 Saved in 4 92 seconds 54014Hz 3 10 637 000000 0 10 577 Figure 64 Appearance of Bell 212 Protocol 23 22 misc captures wav Adobe Auditio
267. ice mode See Table 117 on page 190 for details 7 6 4 2 Interrupted Answer OGM Playback with DTMF Menu Entry The procedure listed in Table 132 uses a remote access password of 1234 DTMF decoding is asynchronous The host voice driver will need to employ a timer or timestamp to validate the consecutive DTMF digits that comprise the remote password Table 132 TAM PSTN Interrupted Answer OGM Playback with DTMF Menu Entry Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Codes Data lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone lt DLE gt lt X gt CIDM DATE 0101 TIME 0110 Receive Type CID DLE complex report 102 NAME JONES JENNIFER DLE lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Ring Detection The voice driver will use a lt DLE gt lt R gt rings to answer count This example uses three rings before answer AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Mute the speaker so the OGM is not heard AT U199 8 OK locally The user may remove this com mand to allow local review Set the DAA to RS232 receive gain regis a Sis ten VIS ter UBF for TAM PSTN 210 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 132 TAM PSTN Interrupted Answer OGM Playback with DTMF Menu Entry Continued Host to Modem Commands Data Modem to Host Result L
268. ility is possible because most of the differences between standards is handled by the host in the data stream itself The ISOmodem performs the necessary data modulation and provides two options for message packet structure Protocol 1 and Protocol 2 as defined in ETSI ES 201 912 The rest of the data link layer and transfer layer are defined by the host system The ISOmodem uses a V 23 half duplex modulation to transmit and receive the data over the PSTN Protocol 2 differs from Protocol 1 in that a packet is preceded by a 300 bit long channel seizure preamble ETSI ES 201 912 describes the other differences between Protocols 1 and 2 but the host processor handles these when structuring the data within the packet Table 96 Protocol 1 80 bits of mark constant ones Message Table 97 Protocol 2 Channel seizure 300 bit 80 bit stream Message stream of alternating ones of ones and zeroes Four commands control the behavior of the SMS feature as described in Table 98 below Table 98 SMS Commands Command SMS Feature Behavior AT FCLASS 256 Prepares the modem for handling SMS calls ATDT Goes off hook and returns to command mode If a phone number is provided it is dialed prior to returning to command mode Rev 1 3 149 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 98 SMS Commands AT FRM 200 Returns to data mode prepared to receive an SMS message AT FTM 201 Retu
269. ill respond with OK to denote the return to command mode Rev 1 3 211 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 132 TAM PSTN Interrupted Answer OGM Playback with DTMF Menu Entry Continued Modem to Host Result Host to Modem Commands Data Codes Data Local Modem Actions AT VTS 500 0 100 OK Play special administrator tone Using the VTX command the voice driver can playback a menu and monitor DTMF digit events to perform operations remotely Playback Menu Options 7 6 4 3 Speakerphone Transition A SP Button On Event will trigger the transition to Speakerphone system voice mode Based upon the point at which the event is received the voice driver will vector to a user answer state to gracefully exit the TAM PSTN mode 7 6 4 4 Handset Transition A Handset Raised Event will trigger the transition to Handset system voice mode Based upon the point at which the event is received the voice driver will vector to a user answer state to gracefully exit the TAM PSTN mode 7 7 Speakerphone 7 7 1 Overview The Si2494 39 speakerphone consists of the following function components as shown in Figure 29 on page 188 Acoustical echo canceller AEC Acoustical echo suppressor AES AEC double talk detector DTD Line echo canceller LEC Howling controller HC m High pass filter HPF 7 7 2 Simplex Speakerphone Simplex Speakerphone SSP is a special case of speakerphone operation Like Speakerphone it
270. imal SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 63 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action Program RAM write this command is used to upload firmware supplied by Silicon Labs to the ISOmodem The format for this command is AT Phhhh xxxx yyyy where hhhh is the first address in hexadecimal and xxxx yyyy is data in hexadecimal Only one P command is allowed command line No other command can be concatenated in the P command line This com mand is only for use with special files provided by Silicon Labora tories Do not attempt to use this command for any other purpose Use amp T6 to display checksum for patch verification Qaaaa reads hexadecimal address aaaa Returns hexadecimal data value dddd Only one command per line U register read This command reads U register values in hexa decimal The format is AT Rhh where hh A particular U register address in hexadecimal AT R command displays all U register values Only one R command is allowed per AT command line U register write This command writes to the 16 bit U registers The format is AT Uhh ooo yyyy Zzzz where hh user access address in hexadecimal Xxxx data hexadecimal to be written to location hh yyyy data in hexadecimal to be written to location hh 1 2222 data in hexadecimal to be written to location hh 2 etc Only one U command is allowed per AT comman
271. in troubleshooting with the isolation capacitor at the ISOmodem First check all solder joints on the isolation capacitors Si3018 10 and associated external components If no problems are found proceed to 10 1 5 Isolation Capacitor Troubleshooting to verify whether the problem is the ISOmodem or the Si301 8 10 side of the isolation capacitor If the problem is found to be on the ISOmodem side check C50 C51 C53 the corresponding PCB traces and the ISOmodem pins Correct any problem found If no problems are found with the external components replace the ISOmodem If the problem is found to be on the Si3018 10 side of the isolation capacitor go to Si3018 10 Troubleshooting If the modem does not respond with an OK to the command AT lt CRs this indicates that the host processor software is not communicating with the modem controller and the problem can be isolated as follows ISOmodem Clock is Oscillating First be sure the ISOmodem is properly reset and RESET pin 12 is at 3 3 V Next check the DTE connection with the host system If this does not isolate the problem go to 10 1 4 Host Interface Troubleshooting ISOmodem Clock is Not Oscillating Check the voltage on the ISOmodem pins 5 and 21 to be sure the chip is powered Also check that pins 6 and 20 are grounded Next check the solder joints and connections PCB traces on C40 C41 Y1 and the ISOmodem Pin 1 and Pin 2 Measure C26 and C27 or replace them with known good p
272. ination The digit dialed to determine 10 pps vs 20 pps is programmable through S51 The amp X2 command works as described above however only DTMF 20 pps 10 pps determination is made no PBX The amp X1 and amp X2 commands may be aborted by sending the command AT amp XO The result code will be OK 170 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 11 Telephone Voting Mode The telephone voting mode TVM of operation monitors the line to detect polarity reversals after dialing It waits for a busy tone to be detected and reports POLARITY REVERSAL or NO POLARITY REVERSAL followed by OK To enable TVM use the G character in the dial string eg ATDTG1 The G character must be used for each TVM call The S7 timer operates during TVM and indicates NO CARRIER if a timeout occurs before the busy tone is detected Polarity reversal monitoring begins after the last digit is dialed and ends at the detection of the busy tone Any loss of line side power drop out is considered a polarity reversal if loop current is restored within U51 milliseconds 6 12 V 92 Quick Connect The Si2493 supports ITU T V 92 shortened Phase 1 and Phase 2 to decrease the time required to connect to a server modem using the V 90 modulation After the first call the Si2493 will retain line parameters that allow it to use shortened Phase 1 and 2 to reduce the total negotiation time If line conditions change or the remote server does not support the shortening of these phases
273. ine This can result in load times as short as 0 7 seconds for a 6235 byte patch at 115 kbaud UART interface mode The file transfer should be preceded by ATZ or reset and followed by ATEO and ATQ1 After the transfer perform ATE1 ATQO as needed The delay between lines must be increased when using the parallel or SPI interface 1 Low pulse on RESET signal for at least 5 0 ms 2 Wait the reset recovery time 3 Send ATEO 4 Wait for OK 5 Send ATQ1 to the modem 6 Wait 20 ms 7 Send first line of the patch 8 Wait 20 ms 1 5 Send AT PICO last Line of Patch n 4 Wait 20 ms n 3 Send ATQO to the modem Rev 1 3 121 SILICON LABS AN93 n 2 Wait for OK n 1 Send AT amp T6 to the modem n Wait for OK 5 8 2 Method 2 Send the entire file using a program that waits for OK after every line This will require 3 98 seconds for a 6235 byte patch at 115 kbaud or longer if the OS has latency 5 8 3 Method 3 For development purposes send the entire patch file using a program that allows a timed preprogrammed pause between lines e g HyperTerminal or ProComm This will give times of around 16 seconds for a 6235 byte patch at 115 kbaud Due to the granularity of a typical desktop operating system be sure to set the time delay between lines to 100 ms Table 82 Load Technique and Speed Table Start Condition Delay Load time 6235 Byte Approach
274. ing ATDT12345 CONNECT 1200 PROTOCOL NONE 0x19 0OxBE 0x20 0x20 0x19 lt 0 1 gt The first lt EM gt lt rate gt indicator shows that the modem connected with a transmit rate of 1200 bps and a receive rate of 1200 bps The lt EM gt lt flag gt that occurs immediately after the lt EM gt lt rate gt indicates that a non flag to flag transition has occurred and that the receiver has now been synchronized An lt EM gt lt flag gt indicator is applicable only to the first occurrence of a non flag to flag transition Future occurrences of non flag to flag transitions are indicated with an lt EM gt lt err gt instead Also this feature is unique to the U87 8 1 option Also with U87 8 1 the Framed Submode is entered immediately upon connection Otherwise if U87 8 0 the Transparent Submode is entered instead and the host is expected to send an lt EM gt flag to switch to the Framed Submode After a connection has been established the modem is ready to transmit and receive frames For example if it is desired to send a frame whose contents are lt 0 10 gt lt 0 11 gt lt 0 12 gt lt 0 13 gt lt 0 14 gt lt 0 15 gt The host software sends the following lt 0 10 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 0 gt lt 0 12 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt lt 0 14 gt lt 0 15 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 1 gt Note the bytes lt 0 11 gt 0x13 are EM shielded because these bytes could have been used for XON
275. inger thresholds 15 V 10 and 21 5 V 10 These two settings satisfy ringer threshold requirements worldwide The thresholds are set so that a ring signal is guaranteed to be detected above the maximum and not detected below the minimum 3 4 Pulse Dialing and Spark Quenching Pulse dialing is accomplished by going off and on hook at a certain cadence to generate make and break pulses The nominal rate is ten pulses per second Some countries have strict specifications for pulse fidelity that include make and break times make resistance and rise and fall times In a traditional solid state dc holding circuit there many problems in meeting these requirements The ISOmodem holding circuit actively controls the on hook and off hook transients to maintain pulse dialing fidelity Spark quenching requirements in countries such as Italy the Netherlands South Africa and Australia deal with the on hook transition during pulse dialing These tests provide an inductive dc feed resulting in a large voltage spike This spike is caused by the line inductance and sudden decrease in current through the loop when going on hook The traditional solution to the problem is to put a parallel resistive capacitor RC shunt across the hookswitch relay However the capacitor required is bulky 71 uF 250 V and relatively costly In the ISOmodem the loop current can be controlled to achieve three distinct on hook speeds to pass spark quenching tests without
276. initialization sequence defined in Table 119 Initialization Sequence on page 194 Si24xx VMB Line Simulator Microphone amp Speaker Wiring gt AN ee Remote White Noise Reference Telephone Source Hardware Shell System Offline Meter Tip amp Ring 15 dBm Figure 36 AEC Gain Calibration Rev 1 3 217 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 135 AEC Gain Calibration Dial Remote Telephone Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data ATZ OK Reset the modem AT FCLASS 8 OK Enter voice mode AT U199 4 OK Set SPCAL U199 2 to enable calibration AT Y254 W59 1 OK Enable the SSI interface to the Si3000 Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver AT U72 0108 OK Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Enable Line In AT U72 0597 OK 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation AT U72 065E OK AT U72 075E OK Use calibrated value from Transmit Gain Calibration Ok Speakerp
277. ion Table 9 lists the reset strapping options for QFN parts with UART operation Table 9 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with UART Operation Input Auto Baud Three Wire FSYNCH CTS AOUT EECLK INT RI SDI DCD Disable EEPROM Interface Pin2 Pin21 Pin 15 Pin 13 Pin35 Pin 19 Pin 8 Pin 28 32 kHz No No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes No 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 Yes 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 4 9152 MHz No No 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 X Yes 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 X Yes No 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 X Yes 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 X 27 MHz No No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Yes 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Yes No 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Yes 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Rev 1 3 15 SILICON LABS AN93 2 1 5 2 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with SPI Operation Table 10 lists the reset strapping options for QFN parts with SPI operation Table 10 Reset Strapping Options for QFN parts with SPI Operation Input Three Wire FSYNCH AOUT EECLK INT RI SDI DCD MISO EEPROM Interface Pin 2 Pin 15 Pin 13 Pin 35 Pin 19 8 Pin28 Pin 22 32 kHz No 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Yes 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 4 9152 MHz No 1 1 1 0 0 1 X 1 Yes 0 1 1 0 0 1 X 1 27 MHz No 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 Yes 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 2 1 5 3 Reset Strapping Options for QFN Parts with Parallel Operation Table 11 lists the reset strapping options for QFN parts with parallel operation Table 11
278. ions Data Codes Data The user is free to dial manually using the VTS com mands to create the DTMF digits AT VTS 697 1209 20 OK Generate DTMF 1 digit for 200 ms Generate DTMF 0 digit for 200 ms AT VTS 941 1336 20 OK Generate DTMF 2 digit for 200 ms AT VTS 697 1336 20 OK The user will not receive lt DLE gt events for dial tone ring back busy and quiet since the detectors are dis abled See Table 117 on page 190 for details on active detectors Rev 1 3 221 SILICON LABS AN93 7 7 8 Call Automatic Pulse Dial Table 140 lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 136 Table 140 Speakerphone Automatic Pulse Dial Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data Perform automatic pulse dial of 102 Modem will return OK The user will not receive DLE events for dial ATDP102 OK tone ring back busy and quiet since the detectors are disabled See Table 122 on page 198 for details on active detectors 7 7 9 Answer A ring event will prompt the user to press the speakerphone button This will generate a SP Button On Event and the Speakerphone Configuration procedure defined in Table 136 on page 219 should be used to answer the call For ring detection and local ring tone melody generation see 7 6 2 TAM Hands Free ldle 7 7 10 Handset Transition For a SP Button Off Event Handset
279. is to determine what the modem sends to the DTE when the modem receives back to back occurrences of the special characters 0x19 0x99 0x11 and 0x13 at the DCE As an example if the following string is received at the DCE lt 0 19 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 11 gt lt 0 11 gt If U87 10 0 this is what the host software will receive at the DTE lt 0 19 gt lt 0 5 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 2 gt If U87 10 1 this is what the host software will receive at the DTE lt 0 19 gt lt 0 5 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 5 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 0 gt lt 0 19 gt lt 0 0 gt The choice of how to program 087 10 is based on whether or not it is desired to simplify the host receive parsing algorithm or to guarantee that the receive throughput is not overly affected by the lt gt shielding In the worst case if there is a large frame consisting only of special characters the required throughput at the DTE will have to be at least 2x that of the DCE rate to account for the EM shielding overhead There are two methods of ending a call One is to use the lt EM gt lt eot gt command followed by an ATH Sending the lt EM gt lt eot gt command will cause the modem to go to command mode and stop the transmitter however the modem does not go back on hook until ATH The other method is to use the lt EM gt lt esc gt command to escape to command mode and then issue the ATH command The main difference is that the lt EM gt lt esc
280. ision 0 5 to Revision 0 6 Added 512493 to title Added V 92 information Added V 44 information Added and expanded several AT commands Added U71 and U9F UAA registers Corrected CTS trigger points Added note for U70 configuration for Australia and Brazil m Expanded 5 14 Legacy Synchronous DCE Mode V 80 Synchronous Access Mode m Added 2 5 POM Voice Mode 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN Only Added 6 4 SMS Support Added 6 5 Type II Caller ID SAS Detection Added 6 7 Modem On Hold Added 6 12 V 92 Quick Connect Revision 0 6 to Revision 0 7 m Added V 29 FC to Table 1 Updated part numbers in 4 3 Bill of Materials Updated EE section and example code Updated Table 46 U Register Descriptions on page 91 Updated U63 bit map m Updated U7D bit map m Updated 22 1 Country Register Settings for CTR TBR21 ATAAB and CTR21 Type Countries on page 138 m Corrected New Zealand Pulse dial settings in 22 20 Country Register Settings for New Zealand on page 147 m Updated Table 102 on page 163 m Deleted references to U69 now for internal use only Revision 0 7 to Revision 0 8 m Updates to Registers CALT and GEND Revision 0 8 to Revision 0 9 Document format changes Minor text edits Deleted Legacy Synchronous mode Updated layout guidelines Updated country configuration tables Added Appendix C Si3008 Supplement Added Appendix D EPOS Application Revi
281. isolation capacitor interface The following sections describe the reset sequence the host interface the isolation interface low power modes SSI voice mode and the EEPROM interface 2 1 Resetting the Device Reset is required after power on or brownout conditions the supply dropping to less than the data sheet minimum The supply must be stable throughout the minimum required reset time described here and thereafter A reset is also required in order to come out of the power down mode Some operational choices including the crystal oscillator frequency used and the command interface used e g UART vs SPI is made during the reset time according to pull down resistors placed on some modem pins These pins are modem output lines but during reset the modem places them into a high impedance mode with weak internal pull ups then reads the user s strapping choices It is important that the resultant state changes of these pins during reset are not misinterpreted by the host For example the INT output pin of the modem and perhaps others can be strapped low with a 10 resistor to request SPI operation If that mode is chosen the host should take care not to enable this interrupt input before the modem reset since the INT signal will transition from high to low and back up during reset in this case and can generate an unexpected interrupt If an external clock signal is provided instead of a crystal attached to the modem it is important
282. isplay strncpy cpInput test cpInputBuffer iCharCnt cpInput_test iCharCnt 0 return cpFound strlen cpResponse Setup a 50 ms timeout for reads SCOMMTIMEOUTS ReadIntervalTimeout 0 SCOMMTIMEOUTS ReadTotalTimeoutMultiplier 0 SCOMMTIMEOUTS ReadTotalTimeoutConstant 50 SCOMMTIMEOUTS WriteTotalTimeoutMultiplier 0 SCOMMTIMEOUTS WriteTotalTimeoutConstant 0 SetCommTimeouts hCom amp sCOMMTIMEOUTS Read the serial port cpInputWr has char from the port BOOL bError ReadFile cpInputWr 1 amp ulNoOfbytes iCharCount ulNoOfbytes iCharCnt ulNoOfbytes if bError strcat cpErrorString Read Error r n exit 10 implement a write to file before exit 0 cpInputWr ulNoOfbytes check for a timeout 0 2 e Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 267 AN93 sCurrentTime clock if sCurrentTime gt sStartTime sWaitTime strcat cpErrorString Timeout of strcat cpErrorString cpResponse printf n s n cpErrorString strncpy cpInput test cpInputBuffer iCharCnt cpInput_test iCharCnt 0 copy the received bytes for late display return cpInputBuffer we exit with the same input string we came in with because we time out void AssertRTS bool bAssert BOOL bSuccess if bAssert dcb fRtsCon
283. ister U70 listed in Table 20 The RI PPD OCD CID and RST bits are sticky and the command reads and clears these signals and deactivates the INT pin if INT is enabled Rev 1 3 21 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 20 Register U70 Signals INT Can Monitor Signal U70 Bit Function DCD 0 Data Carrier Detect active high inverse of DCD pin RI 1 Ring Indicator active high inverse of RI pin PPD 2 Parallel Phone Detect OCD 3 Overcurrent Detect CID 4 Caller ID Preamble Detect 1024 Character Elastic Tx Buffer SRAM CTS CTS Deasserts 796 Characters Tx Data Hardware Transmit Buffer 128 Characters CTS Asserts Figure 3 Transmit Data Buffers 1024 Character Elastic Rx Buffer SRAM 796 Characters bit Mode REM bit 12 Character Hardware Receive Rx data Buffer 128 Characters Figure 4 Receive Data Buffers 22 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 A block diagram of the UART in the serial interface mode is shown in Figure 5 11 Bits to Data Bus MUX TX FIFO RX FIFO TX Shift CONTROL RX Shift Register Register TXD CTS RTS INT RXD 10 01 8 16 9 Figure 5 UART Serial Interface 2 2 4 Parallel and SPI Interface Operation Refer to 2 1 Resetting the Device on page 11 for interface selection The parallel interface has an 8 bit data bus and a single address bit The SPI likewis
284. itch to turn off the loop current with a ramp instead of a step Bits 3 2 select the dc termination for the modem DCV 00 is the lowest voltage mode supported on the ISOmodem 01 is the next lowest voltage mode See 6 2 1 DC Termination on page 133 for details Bit 1 RZ 0 default allows ringer impedance to be determined by external components This impedance is typically 800 900 RZ 1 enables on chip synthesis of a lower ringer impedance for countries such as Poland South Africa and South Korea Bit 0 RT Ring Threshold is used to satisfy various country ring detect requirements RT 0 default sets the ring threshold for 11 22 Vans RT 1 sets the ring threshold for 17 33 Vans Signals below the lower level of the range are not detected Signals above the upper level of the range are always detected 108 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 66 U66 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 7 Reserved Read returns zero 6 FDT Frame Detect 0 ISOcap frame lock not established 1 2 ISOcap frame lock established 5 0 Reserved Read returns zero Table 67 U67 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 14 Reserved Read returns zero 13 12 MINI 1 0 Minimum Operational Loop Current Adjusts the minimum loop current at which the DAA can operate Increasing the minimum oper ational loop current can improve signal headroom at lower Tip Ring voltages
285. ith a given time interval 1 The DCE shall disable automatic hangups in the other non voice modes 2 The DCE shall disable all hang ups in other non voice modes The DCE shall only perform a logical hangup return the OK result code VRA interval Ringing Tone Goes Away Timer The DCE only uses this command in call origination transactions This command sets the amount of time in 0 1 second units the DCE shall wait between Ringing Tone before it can assume that the remote modem has gone off hook Default time is five seconds Repeat Caller ID lt rmode gt Description VRID lt rmode gt Display Caller ID information of the last incoming call in formatted orm 1 Display Caller ID information of the last incoming call in unformatted form Rev 1 3 175 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 110 Extended AT4 Command Set Continued Command Action Ringing Tone Never Appeared Timer This command sets the amount of time in seconds the DCE will wait looking for Ring VRN ing Tone If the DCE does not detect Ringing Tone in this time period the DCE shall assume that the remote station has gone off hook and return an OK result code Default time is 0 seconds Receive Voice Stream Enable DTE receive of voice stream The DCE will return a CONNECT response fol lowed by the voice stream as defined by the VSM command The DTE can issue a lt DLE gt lt gt or lt DLE gt lt ESC gt sequen
286. ivity level Rev 1 3 29 SILICON LABS AN93 2 5 SSI Voice Mode 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN Only Voice mode is supported in the Si2439 and the Si2494 Table 25 lists the pin connections for the ISOmodem SSI interface This interface enables Voice Mode operation See 7 Handset TAM and Speakerphone Operation on page 173 for additional information Table 25 SSI Interface Pin Connection Signal Pin Number Pin Number TSSOP 24 38 CLKOUT 3 3 FSYNC 4 2 SDI 18 8 SDO 24 9 RESET 12 16 The Si3000 is used in conjunction with the ISOmodem to transmit and receive 16 bit voice samples to and from telephone lines as shown in Figure 10 AT commands Responses Si24xx Modem FSYNC SDO CLKOUT TDMA Interface FSYNC SDO SDI Si3000 Voice Codec Figure 10 Voice Mode Block Diagram 30 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 6 EEPROM Interface 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN Only The 24 pin TSSOP and 38 pin QFN packages feature an optional three wire interface EESD EECS and EECLK that may be directly connected to SPI EEPROMs An EEPROM may contain custom default settings firmware upgrades and or user defined AT command macros for use in custom AT commands or country codes Firmware upgrades may also be automatically loaded into the ISOmodem using the BOOT format 2 6 1 Supported EEPROM Types The EEPROM must support SPI mode 3 with a 16 bit 8 64 kbit range addres
287. l an SMS call using the command ATDTxxxx where xxxx is the number to be dialed or answer an SMS call with ATDT The semi colon at the end of the command places the modem into command mode after dialing The modem responds to the host with OK The host then puts the modem into transmit or receive SMS data mode Many SMS POS protocols perform handshaking using CAS and CAS ACK CAS is a two tone signal 2130 Hz 2750 Hz CAS ACK is a DTMF D The terminal modem connects to the server which sends CAS tones until it times out or the terminal modem replies to the server with CAS ACK The threshold for the modem s CAS tone energy detector is set by CTDT which has a default value of 500h The CAS tone must have a minimum duration of 30 ms to guarantee detection CAS detection is enabled by setting the detector threshold UD4 to a value other than 7FFFh When the CAS detector is enabled FSK CS MARK detection will run after CAS is detected The modem will time out if CAS is not detected When implementing SMS POS protocols that don t use CAS and CAS ACK the CAS tone detector must be disabled with the command AT UD4 7FFF Once CAS is detected the modem responds with CAS ACK The duration of CAS ACK is 60 ms CASRPT selects Auto or Manual mode for transmitting CAS ACK Auto mode CASRPT 0 Auto mode reduces the delay between CAS and CAS ACK After an 200 command the modem detects the CAS tones and sends CAS ACK without reporti
288. lanation of the VSM command results Voice Speakerphone State mode Description 0 Speakerphone AEC AES and LEC disabled Handset FIR filter VSP mode coefficients are selected 1 Speakerphone AEC AES and LEC enabled Speakerphone FIR filter coefficients are selected VLS 13 command must be used in combination with this setting DTMF Tone Duration Timer VTD This command sets the default DTMF tone generation duration in 10 ms units for the VTS command Default time is 1 second lt dur gt 100 176 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 110 Extended AT4 Command Set Continued Command Action VTS lt freq1 gt lt freq2 gt lt dur gt DTMF and Tone Generation This command can be used to produce single frequency tones and double frequency tones i e DTMF digit All three parameters are required for correct operation lt freqi gt Frequency one which has a range of 0 200 3200 Hz lt freq2 gt Frequency two which has a range of 0 200 3200 Hz lt dur gt Duration of the tone s in 10 ms units For only a single tone use freq1 with zero value for lt freq2 gt Bracket syntax can be used to group sets of tones to generate simple melodies e g VTS 500 0 10 600 200 20 700 250 30 VTX Transmit Voice Stream Enable DTE transmit of voice stream to DCE The DCE will return a CONNECT response The DTE sends the voice stream as defined by the
289. ld and stop bits The interface is designed to accommodate character lengths of 8 9 10 and 11 bits giving data fields of 6 7 8 or 9 bits Data width can be set to 6 7 or 8 bits with the AT Bn command Parity can be set to odd even mark or space by the AT Pn command in conjunction with AT B2 or AT B5 Other AT Bn settings have no parity Table 18 DTE Rates Ideal DTE Rate bps Actual DTE Rate bps Approximate Error 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 2400 2400 7200 7202 0 01 9600 9600 12000 12003 0 02 14400 14400 19200 19200 38400 38400 57600 57488 0 2 115200 115651 0 4 230400 228613 0 8 245760 245760 307200 307200 MARK START BIT DO D1 D2 D3 D4 1 5 6 D7 2 n O a GE ROC MAGASIN BIT SAMPLING MARK START No BIT DO 01 02 x D3 D4 X D5 1 6 07 08 d aris pf ff F 4 m m T BITSAMPUNG Figure 2 Asychronous UART Serial Interface Timing Diagram 2 2 3 2 Autobaud When set in UART interface mode the ISOmodem includes an automatic baud rate detection feature that allows the host to start transmitting data at any standard DTE rate from 300 bps to 307 2 kbps This feature is enabled by default When autobaud is enabled it continually adjusts the baud rate and the ISOmodem always echoes result codes at the same baud rate as the most recently received character from
290. le 123 lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 120 Table 123 Handset Automatic Pulse Dial Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data Perform automatic pulse dial of 102 Modem will return OK Depending on the number of rings the host may ATDP102 OK receive lt DLE gt lt r gt events for ring back notifications If the line is busy a lt DLE gt lt b gt event will be sent to the host After connection the host will receive lt DLE gt lt q gt events during quiet periods of no voice 7 5 6 Answer A ring event will prompt the user to lift the handset This will generate a Handset Raised Event and the Handset Configuration procedure defined in Table 120 should be used to answer the call For ring detection and local ring tone melody generation see 7 6 2 TAM Hands Free ldle 198 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 5 7 Terminate Upon detection of the Handset Lowered Event the host should issue the commands in Table 124 to transition to the TAM Hands Free mode Table 124 Handset to TAM Hands Free Transition Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Commands Data Codes Data AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec AT VSP 0 OK Select handset voice path See Figure 29 on page 188 for details VSP must be zero when exiting from VLS 13 Disable voice mode Used
291. le the modem is off hook SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 163 AN93 6 7 Modem On Hold The Si2494 93 supports modem on hold as defined by the ITU T V 92 specification This feature allows a connected Si2494 93 to place a server modem on hold while a second call typically a voice call uses the phone line The maximum time the modems will remain on hold is controlled by the modem receiving the modem on hold request Once the second call has ended the Si2494 93 will reinitiate the data connection if the time elapsed has not exceeded the time negotiated by the two modems The Si2494 93 can also be placed on hold itself by a remote modem allowing a far end user to make or receive a voice call Modem on hold is only supported on the Si2494 93 for V 34 14400 33600 bps and higher speed modulations The command is used to enable PMH 0 or disable PMH 1 modem on hold 6 7 1 Initiating Modem On Hold Modem on hold is typically initiated when a connected client modem receives a subscriber alert signal SAS tone as described 6 5 Type Caller ID SAS Detection on page 151 However it may be initiated any time the modem is on line in command mode AT PMHR command is used to initiate a modem on hold request After this command is issued the modem will place a modem on hold request to the server and the PMHR command response will indicate the server s response to the request The possible responses are sho
292. lf The purpose of going through this explanation is to allow the easier reading of the V 80 standard and to provide the proper framing of the use of V 80 in an EPOS application It is important to note that the usage of V 80 for HDLC function does not use many of the other aspects of V 80 For example the data transferred across the UART is assumed to be 8 bits even though V 80 also provides the ability to transfer 7 bit ASCII data Also it is rare for XON XOFF handshaking to be used in an EPOS application but the transparency rules of EM Shielding are burdened with these extra EM codes in any case 258 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 In the end the only thing that matters in an EPOS application is the ability to send and receive HDLC frames across the DTE For this the ability of the host to tell the modem end of transmit frame and the ability for the modem to tell the host CRC successful is in essence the kernel of V 80 use in an EPOS application One final note before showing an example the V 80 standard refers to a Transparent Sub Mode and a Framed Sub Mode The main idea behind the Transparent Sub Mode is to allow the host to specifically decide what bits are being sent across the DCE In the Transparent Sub Mode nothing is left out and the host is responsible for every single bit that is transmitted to and from the modem In the Framed Sub mode the HDLC handling is performed by the modem and therefore there are
293. lish a modem connection 2 The NLIU register is updated every 1 ms with the minimum non zero value of LVCS in the last 30 ms This allows the ISOmodem to eliminate errors due to 50 60 Hz interference and also adapt to relatively slow changes in the on hook dc reference value on the telephone line This algorithm does not allow any non zero values for NLIU below 0x0007 The host may also initialize NLIU prior to issuing the V2 command Once the call has begun the off hook intrusion algorithm described in 6 6 2 Condition on page 162 operates normally In addition the ISOmodem reports NO LINE if the telephone line is completely disconnected If the HOI U77 bit 11 bit is set LINE IN USE is reported upon intrusion Table 42 Extended AT Command Set Command Action Display command settings see text for details Bn Character length is automatically set in autobaud mode BO Reserved 7N1 Seven data bits no parity one stop bit one start bit nine bits total only B2 7P1 Seven data bits parity optioned by P one stop bit one start bit ten bits total B3 8N1 Eight data bits no parity one stop bit one start bit 10 bits total default 185 8P1 Eight data bits parity optioned by one stop bit one start bit 11 bits total NO only This mode is not allowed with a parallel or SPI interface 8X1 Eight data bits one escape bit one stop bit one start bit 11 bits total enables nin
294. lt gt lt DLE gt lt R gt Ring Detection AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Ring Detection The voice driver will use a lt DLE gt lt R gt rings to answer count This example uses three rings before answer AT VTS 700 500 80 OK Play local ring tone Based upon the TAM answer function settings a ring counter will validate the number of rings before answer If the TAM Answer function is disabled or the number of rings before answer has not been reached the user has the opportunity to answer the call via handset or speakerphone Rev 1 3 201 SILICON LABS AN93 7 6 2 1 Record OGM The Si3000 to RS232 gain register UCO in the ISOmodem can be used to adjust the voice stream gain Use the VGR command to adjust the UCO value in command mode It is best to maintain two versions of VGR one for Si3000 to RS232 and another for DAA to RS232 Table 127 TAM Hands Free Record OGM Host to Modem Commands Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Data Codes Data 128 OK Set the Si3000 to RS232 receive gain UCO for TAM Hands Free Restore Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path to allow AT UOB1 K voice samples to reach FDV block for silence detection 50810880 9 This allows the driver to automatically end OGM recording AT VSD 129 OK Set sensitivity level for OGM recording silence detec tion Select G 711U PCM 8 bit 64 kb
295. me Description Default Hex 070 15 5 Enables ESC 22 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled UAA 2 RUDE 0 Disables rude disconnect 0 1 Enables rude disconnect UCA 0 SMSMOD Modulation for SMS data 0 0 Bell202 1 V 23 UCB 15 0 TXCS Number of channel seizure bits 2580 0 no Channel Seizure 1 to 65535 number of continuous alternating spaces and marks in Channel Seizure UCC 7 0 TXMK Number of mark bits in message header 2580 UCD 0 CASRPT Respond to CAS don t report to the host Auto or do 0 report to the host Manual 0 z Auto Mode 1 Manual Mode 11 0 TXDEL Time the Originate modem waits before transmitting a 0000 frame in 10 ms units Timed from the termination of the previous signal UD2 11 0 RXTO Time that the Answer modem waits for the received sig 0000 nal after it receives the FRM command 10 ms units UDS3 15 0 V 29FC Answer Tone Detector Threshold in ms 0000 Range 50 180 ms 004 14 0 CTDT CAS Tone Detector Threshold 0000 UD7 15 0 SMS Mark Length Threshold 0578 236 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 9 2 2 Procedure To enable the SMS features on the Si24xx the host sends AT FCLASS 256 to the modem prior to an SMS call To enable the hardware escape pin functions the host would set HES with the command AT U70 8000 After setting the other U registers according to the configurations of the Originate and Answer modems the host can dia
296. minal initiates the call so it is known as the Originate modem while the server is the Answer modem After the modems connect go through handshake and complete the first data transmission the two modems alternate being the transmitter and receiver until the completion of the call The Si24xx ISOmodems support SMS Short Message Service in an ePOS electronic point of sale connection An SMS message is delivered in frames using the format shown in Figure 37 Data Frame Channel Seizure Mark Signal Mark Protocol 1 0 bits Protocol 1 80 bits 25 Signal Protocol 2 300 bits Protocol 2 80 bits 25 Type Length Payload Checksum Figure 37 SMS Message Format As shown in the figure an SMS frame follows one of two protocols Protocol 1 or Protocol 2 Protocol 1 frames begin with the Mark signal while Protocol 2 frames start with the Channel Seizure CS signal Otherwise the two protocols are identical The Originate modem is configured to transmit in one of the two protocols at the beginning of a call The Answer modem recognizes which protocol is being sent and processes the incoming message accordingly The modem strips off the Channel Seizure and Marks at the beginning and end of the data and provides the Data Frame to the host processor It does not provide frame content verification of any kind 234 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 9 2 SMS AT Command Set Table 146 shows the AT commands th
297. n Edit View Effects Generate Analyze Favorites Options Window Help 2100 HZ Answer Tone Ed Answering modem s Scambled Binary Ones and Scrambled Data visually indis tinguishable from each other Calling modem s Scrambled Binary Ones and Scrambled Data visually indis tinguishable from each other Unscrambled Binary Ones USB1 signal Two tones at 2250 and 2850 Hz Scrambled Binary Ones and Scrambled Data visually indis tinguishable from each DTMF dialing other hms 4 440 4 46 0 4 48 0 4 5 Begin Calling modem s Abe EE m 4 49859 58 449859_ Scrambled Binary View 441625 Ones and Scrambled EN Data visually indis 59 g fs 4 0 tinguishable from Stopped 52789Hz 453610 11025164 Mono 2062 8 24806 f each other Figure 65 Appearance of V 22 Protocol Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 283 AN93 Unscrambled Binary Ones USB1 signal Two tones at 2250 and 2850 Hz 2100 Hz Answer Tone w The three short horizontal lines are the S1 signal that triggers V 22bis train ing The S1 signal is an unscrambled double digit 00 01 Sel 7 48 515 0 00 000 i rjo J ei 9 View 7503469 0 06 758 Saved in 2 55 seconds 53682Hz 756 449 11025 16bt Mono 1133 24 78GBfree Figure 66 Appearance of V 22 bis Protocol Answering modem s scrambled binary ones an
298. n Mao UE C LUI RM Ad M CAL M 212 Fa a QOVerVISW as act rm oo den DEVE WI er vl qu 212 7 7 2 Simplex Speakerphone 212 7 7 3 External Microphone Speaker Calibration 213 7 7 3 1 Transmit Gain Calibration Speakerphone Disabled 213 7 7 3 2 Receive Gain Calibration Speakerphone Disabled 216 7 7 3 3 Speakerphone Calibration AEC Gain Calibration 217 7 7 4 Speakerphone Configuration 219 7 7 5 Simplex Speakerphone Configuration 220 7 7 6 Call Automatic Tone 221 7 7 7 Call Manual Tone Dial 221 7 7 8 Call Automatic Pulse 222 X59 ADSWOL rina red hate iens dd iod ah ars 222 71 10 Handset Transition y ee tut EX Sree weak FK ERES OP BE RV 222 T1211 Termination Rusa h ue du 223 TO Glossary gee eR ee 223 1 9 68 54 0 DP 223 8 Security Protocols 2 2 44456454 UE 68 eee S ER AC EE 224 8 1 Implementing the SIA Protocol 224 8 1 1 Modem Specific Implementation Details
299. n is not available Instead the system can set the ESC flag in Hardware Interface Register 1 HIR1 While in data mode an escape to command mode occurs if an escape command is sampled as negated for at least 60 ms then sampled asserted for at least 60 ms The modem is then prepared to accept AT commands regardless of whether OK has been sent to the host If the modem is already in command mode the modem does not send OK The host should always wait for OK before entering the next command after an escape When making a new connection the host must not try to escape between the connect message and the protocol message An escape attempt in this interval may fail because the modem is not in data mode until after the protocol message In practice it is difficult to determine the exact boundary between command mode and data mode The recommendation is to time the escape command 100 ms low and 100 ms high and expect that the modem has transitioned to command mode 122 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 The system should then flush the receive buffer 100 ms after the escape command has been removed send AT and wait for OK This ensures that the modem is in command mode because OK is caused by the AT command and not by the escape command 5 9 1 Escape The escape is enabled by default and is controlled by U70 13 TES There are equal guard time periods before leading and after trailing the set by the register S12 during whi
300. n resistor to ground m 1 means the pin is left open If a pin is left open the internal pullup resistor is normally sufficient as long as the pin is not driven externally during reset If there is noise or special power sequencing situations then an external pullup resistor may be needed 12 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 1 3 Reset Strap Options for 16 Pin SOIC Package The clock frequency and interface on the 16 pin SOIC package are selected according to Table 5 below The parallel interface EEPROM and autobaud options are not available in the 16 pin SOIC package Table 5 SOIC 16 Reset Strap Options Mode Reset Strap Pins Interface Input Clock Pin 3 Pin 5 RXD MISO Pin 7 CTS SCLK Pin 11 Pin 15 RI INT DCD UART 32 kHz 0 X 1 1 X 4 9152 MHz 1 X 1 1 1 27 MHz 1 X 1 1 0 SPI 32 kHz 1 1 X 0 1 4 9152 MHz 0 1 X 0 X 27 MHz 1 1 X 0 0 2 1 4 Reset Strap Options for 24 Pin TSSOP Package The pin strapping options for the 24 pin TSSOP package are described in the three subsections below depending on the interface mode selected Rev 1 3 13 SILICON LABS AN93 2 1 4 1 Reset Strapping Options for TSSOP 24 with UART Interface UART interface options for the 24 pin TSSOP package are shown in Table 6 below Table 6 TSSOP 24 UART Interface Options Mode Reset Strap Pins Input Clock Autobaud Three Wire
301. nd REM is recommended for polling and interrupt based communication 2 2 4 3 Parallel Interface Operation When the device is powered up for parallel interface the pins include eight data lines 07 00 a single address A0 a read strobe RD a write strobe WR an interrupt line INT and chip select CS Table 23 summarizes the parallel interface signals Table 23 Parallel Interface Signals Signal Function Direction CS Chip Select active low Input 0 Register address Input RD Read strobe active low Input WR Write strobe active low Input D 7 0 Data bus Bidirectional INT Interrupt active low Output Refer to the device data sheet for timing characteristics Address pin AO allows the host processor to choose between the two interface registers HIRO and HIR1 The timing diagrams below show typical parallel interface operation Refer to the respective product data sheets for timing specifications 26 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 ADDRESS D or 1 X D 7 0 VALID DATA VALID DATA Figure 7 Parallel Interface Read Timing tcss 5 tas NND 158413 twosu Figure 8 Parallel Interface Write Timing Rev 1 3 27 SILICON LABS AN93 2 2 4 4 SPI Interface Operation SPI interface operation is supported in the 2493 57 34 15 04 Revision D or later and the Si2494 39 Revision A or later When th
302. nd data m Wait for the central station to indicate that data was received The central station also has a block that handles communication Its functions are m Answer calls m Acknowledge that it is ready to receive data m Receive data m Acknowledge that data was received While performing their security functions the communication part of the alarm panel always sends data while the communication part of the central station always receives data They are called the transmitter and receiver respectively Data could flow the other way for instance to download new firmware to the alarm panel but this isn t covered by the Contact ID Protocol A transaction begins with the transmitter calling the receiver The receiver goes off hook and acknowledges that it is ready to receive data by producing the handshake tone sequence m 1400 Hz tone for 100 ms m Pause for 100 ms m 2300 Hz tone for 100 ms The frequency tolerance on the handshake tones is 3 The tolerance on tone and pause times is 5 Transmitters have a frequency tolerance of 5 to account for older receivers After the communication channel has been established the transmitter sends data to the receiver in Message Blocks Data is transmitted as DTMF codes The frequency tolerance of the DTMF tones is 1 5 Twist is not specified by the Contact ID protocol standard After sending the message the transmitter waits for the receiver to send an acknowledgement Kissoff tone The
303. nd in the modem s DUT negotiation with the device on the other side of the phone line When to Use Audio Recording This technique is best used when the modem appears to connect normally against some servers but does not connect well when calling a specific server or modem This implies the hardware is functional and the issues most likely involve the negotiations between the modems during connect and retrain One way to rule out the possibility of a hardware problem is to call the server or modem where the connect issue is found using the Silicon Labs EVB module Times When Audio Recording May Not Help Some signals are exceptions and cannot be monitored in this way due to the limits of the bandwidth examined Examples are the dc voltage and currents that exist during both on and off hook conditions precise details of the pulse dialing waveforms and most EMI signals EMI signals which are not visible during the recordings may produce in band demodulated and cross product signals in the modem Some in band signals cannot easily be monitored this way because they are common mode signals While they may be less visible to the recording apparatus they can be received by the modems in some cases An example of this is a strong common mode 50 or 60 Hz hum with its harmonics a 50 or 60 Hz buzz Hardware Setup The Radio Shack Recorder Control contains a transformer that bridges the phone line with a dc blocking capacitor plus a voice operated
304. ndow 2 Select the red record button to start recording then File Save when done 4 Sound Sound Recorder m x Edit Effects Help Position Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec 44 gt gt i Figure 56 Sound Recorder Making the Recording with Adobe Audition or WaveSurfer These applications provide more recording options than the Window Sound Recorder application They should be set up for monophonic recordings at a sample rate of about 11 000 samples per second in order to save recording space while still retaining reasonable fidelity The number of bits per word should be 16 bits to allow the full dynamic range available in the sound card The larger resolution size of 32 bits floating point would be a waste of space and computing power i Untitled 4 Adobe Audition PSS 12111011 1218 ER MN Wis New Waveform Channels Resolution Mono C 8 bit C Stereo 16 bit C 32 bit float inf dB 1 1 00 11025 16bit Mono 24 19 GB free Figure 57 Adobe Audition Example 278 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Audio Playback and Analysis Below are two displays showing the results of recording a good V 22 transaction using Adobe Audition We need to examine the signal both in the time domain and the frequency domain with the frequency domain being a much more useful view The graphs below show time on the horizontal axis and either wave energy in dB or Frequency in Hz on th
305. nds Q 000 V 001 004 Y 000 amp amp D 001 Configuration of amp AT amp G 017 commands amp H 000 Si2457 amp P 000 ATS2 043 S register 2 value Escape code character AT R2C 00A0 Value stored in register U2C The modem has a 48 character buffer which makes it possible to enter multiple AT commands on a single line The multiple commands can be separated with spaces or linefeed characters to improve readability AT space and linefeed characters are not loaded into the buffer and are not included in the 48 character count The command line must end with carriage return for the modem to begin executing it The modem ignores command lines longer than 48 characters and reports ERROR Table 37 shows examples of multiple AT commands on a single line Table 37 Multiple AT Commands on a Single Line Command Result 50 4 1 1 lt gt The modem auto answers on the fourth ring The speaker is on during dial and handshake only Blind dial ing is enabled AT 50 4 M1 X1 CR Same as above spaces do not mat ter 50 4 lt gt 1 lt gt ATX1 lt CR gt Same as above When concatenating commands on the same line the following must also be taken in to account A semicolon is used to append to U or R commands For example AT U42 0022 R43 S6 4 The command IPR cannot be on the same line as a U or R command The commands
306. nds gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt Start of Custom AT Command 1 lt CR gt lt Custom AT Command Name 2 gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt End of Custom AT Command 1 Start of Custom AT Command 2 lt CR gt lt Custom AT Command Name 3 gt lt CR gt End of Custom AT Command 2 Start of Custom AT Command 3 lt commands gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt lt CR gt End of Custom AT Command 3 lt CR gt End of EEPROM Contents 36 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 30 ASCII Chart dec hex Display dec hex Display dec hex Display dec hex Display 0 00 32 20 lt space gt 64 40 96 60 1 01 lt SOH gt 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 2 02 lt 5 gt 34 22 66 42 B 98 62 b 3 03 lt gt 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 4 04 lt gt 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 5 05 37 25 90 69 45 101 65 6 06 38 26 8 70 46 F 102 66 f 7 07 BEL 39 27 71 47 G 103 67 g 8 08 BS 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 9 09 lt gt 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 0A lt LF gt 42 2A 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B lt VT gt 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C lt FF gt 44 2C 76 4 L 108 6 13 CR 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 0 lt 5 gt 46 2 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 Sl 47 2F 79 4
307. ng CAS detection to the host Manual mode CASRPT 1 Manual mode allows the host processor to have more control A modem reports to its host with the string CAS when it detects CAS tones The modem waits for the host to reply with the ASCII character D then it responds to the other modem with CAS ACK If the host sends any character other than D the modem returns to the command mode immediately without sending CAS ACK and replies to the host with lt DLE gt lt ETX gt This allows the host to send any digit The host can then send command or AT FRM command If the host doesn t send any characters or commands the modem will time out as set by UD2 and go back on hook without sending CAS ACK 9 2 2 1 Example The host could use this sequence to set up the modem for Protocol 1 SMS 0 1 0 4 This sets up the modem for V 23 modulation Protocol 1 78 Mark bits in the message header 201 Transmit a Protocol 1 SMS frame lt CR gt lt LF gt CONNECT lt CR gt lt LF gt Modem response to the host To set up the modem for Protocol 2 SMS AT UCA 0 12C 4E This sets up the modem for Bell 103 modulation Protocol 2 300 bit Channel Seizure 78 Mark bits in the message header 202 Transmit a Protocol 2 SMS frame lt CR gt lt LF gt CONNECT lt CR gt lt LF gt Modem response to the host In either protocol the host must wait for the CONN
308. ns Please contact Silicon Labs to obtain a complete C8051F12xx project bundle Macros for modem ISR readability define RXFInterrupt modem status amp SiRXF define TXEInterrupt modem status amp SiTXE amp modem control define TimerInterrupt modem status amp SiREM amp amp RXFInterrupt amp amp rxf processed modem status amp SiINT amp modem status gt gt 1 modem status amp SiRTSb modem control amp SiRTSb modem control amp SiRXF modem control amp SiTXE modem control amp SiINTM define U70Interrupt define RTSIsSet define ClearRTS define ClearRXF define ClearTXE define ClearINTM define rxBufferSize gModemToUARTBufferSize define ReadModemStatus modem status readModem define readModemByte pushByteToUART readModem HIRO Interrupt service routine modemInterrupt Invoked whenever the modem issues interrupt this is meant as reference code for parallel port SPI interrupt service Parameters None Return value None void modemInterrupt void interrupt 2 har modem_status har modem_control Modem control before writing written only if mo
309. nsmitter should assume the handshake mode of an originating V 32bis modem AT O1 if it should assume the handshake mode of an answering modem 224 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 4 Issuing ATO to modem will start the V 32bis handshake The host then waits for the CONNECT message before sending data For an originating modem the ATO command must be sent as soon as possible so the modem will be ready when the remote answering modem starts For an answering modem the ATO should be delayed a little to give the remote originating modem a chance to get ready first 5 The host disconnects the V 32bis session using either followed by ATH or with DTR if it has previously been enabled with AT amp D2 6 The host issues AT VNH 2 to the modem again to maintain off hook status for next cleardown 7 AT NO removes error correction if it was used during the V 32bis period 8 SIA protocol communication resumes by starting up the transmitter in Bell 103 SIA mode with AT F0 8 1 1 3 Considerations when Disconnecting the Session Because AT VNH 2 keeps the modem off hook during a cleardown the first ATH or DTR desertion will not put modem back on hook but only force AT VNH 0 per V 253 The host must issue a second ATH to put the modem back in on hook idle state Alternatively the host could issue AT VNH 0 then ATH or AT VNH 0 H Table 142 lists the AT Commands provided to support SIA Level 3 Protocol communication Table 142 AT
310. nterrupt is generated if U79 4 0 LVCS is DCL less than ACL for two consecutive samples The ISOmodem writes ACL with the contents of LVCS after an intrusion with the last LVCS value before the intrusion The default value for ACL is 0 U76 resets to 0x3240 with a power on or manual reset see Table 74 114 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 74 U76 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 9 OHSR Off Hook Sample Rate for Intrusion Detection 40 ms units 1 second default 8 FACL Force ACL 0 While off hook ACL is automatically updated with LVCS value 1 While off hook ACL saves previously written value 7 5 DCL Differential Current Level 3 mA units 6 mA default 4 0 ACL Absolute Current Level 3 mA units 0 mA default U77 is a bit mapped register that controls parameters relating to intrusion detection and overcurrent detection U77 resets to 0x401E with a power on or manual reset see Table 75 Bits 15 12 IST set the delay between the time the modem goes off hook and the intrusion detection algorithm begins This register has 250 ms increments and the default value is 4 1 sec Bit 11 determines whether the host or modem responds to an intrusion HOI 0 default prevents the modem from hanging up in response to an intrusion without host intervention In this case the host monitors U70 2 PPD and takes the appropriate action when PPD is asserted indicating an intrusion If HO
311. ntry specific register values are presented in 6 2 Country Dependent Setup on page 133 All default settings are chosen to meet FCC requirements Table 46 U Register Descriptions Register Address Name Description Default Hex Value 000 0 0000 DT1A0 Dial tone detection filters stage 1 biquad coefficients 0x0800 001 0 0001 DT1B1 0x0000 002 0 0002 DT1B2 0x0000 003 0 0003 DT1A2 0x0000 004 0 0004 DT1A1 0x0000 005 0 0005 DT2A0 Dial tone detection filters stage 2 biquad coefficients 0x00A0 006 0 0006 DT2B1 Ox6EF1 007 0 0007 DT2B2 OxCAFA 008 0 0008 DT2A2 0 000 009 0 0009 DT2A1 0x0000 UOA 0x000A DT3A0 Dial tone detection filters stage 3 biquad coefficients 0x00A0 UOB 0 000 DT3B1 0 78 0 UOC 0x000C DT3B2 0xC305 UOD 0x000D DT3A2 0x4000 UOE 0x000E DT3A1 0xB50A 1 3 91 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 46 U Register Descriptions Continued Register Address Name Description Default Hex Value UOF 0x000F DT4A0 Dial tone detection filter stage 4 biquad coefficients 0x0400 U10 0x0010 DT4B1 0 7002 U11 0x0011 DT4B2 0xC830 U12 0x0012 DT4A2 0x4000 U13 0x0013 DT4A1 0 80 2 U14 0x0014 DTK Dial tone detection filter output scaler 0x00
312. o P D R Waiting Tone 425 0 4 0 4 U9F 0 0003 0x0028 UA1 0x0028 Lithuania Waiting Tone 950 1400 1800 3x 0 333 1 0 U9F 0x0007 Macau Call Waiting Tone 425 0 2 0 6 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x0014 UA1 0x003C Madagascar Call Waiting Tone 440 0 1 1 9 U9F 0x0000 UAO 0x000A 1 0 00 Malaysia Waiting Tone 425 1 0 10 0 0 5 0 25 0 5 10 0 0 5 0 25 U9F 0x0003 UAO 0x0064 UA1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 UAS 0x0019 UA4 0x0032 5 0x03E8 UA6 0x0032 UA7 0x0019 Maldives Call Waiting Tone 400 1 0 10 0 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x0064 1 0x03E8 Montserrat Waiting Tone 440 0 5 10 0 0 5 U9F 0x0000 UAO 0x0032 1 0x03E8 UA2 0x0032 Netherlands Waiting Tone 425 0 5 9 5 U9F 0x0003 0x0032 1 0x03B6 New Zealand Waiting Tone 400 450 0 5 U9F 0x0001 UAO 0x0032 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 157 AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers Waiting Tone li 400 0 25 0 25 0 25 3 25 U9F 0x0001 0x0019 1 0x0019 UA 0 0019 0x0145 Waiting Tone lii 523 659 3 0 2 3 0 0 2 U9F 0x0008 UAO 0x0014 UA1 0x012C UA2
313. o control the receive gain at the DTE from either the Si3000 Codec or the DAA The purpose is to adjust the DTE receive gain for the TAM voice stream during idle state See the lt DLE gt lt d gt and lt DLE gt lt u gt commands discussed in Table 111 on page 178 for information on how to control the receive gain during active voice stream processing VGT gain Transmit Gain Selection The gain parameter has a range of 112 134 with 128 marking the nominal value The default is 128 which represents 0 dB Step size is 3 dB This represents a range of 48 dB to 18 dB This command is used to control the transmit gain at the DTE to either the Si3000 Codec or the DAA The purpose is to adjust the DTE transmit gain for the TAM voice stream during idle state See the lt DLE gt lt d gt and lt DLE gt lt u gt commands discussed in Table 111 on page 178 for information on how to control the transmit gain during active voice stream processing VIP Load Voice Factory Defaults VIT lt timer gt DTE DCE Inactivity Timer The lt timer gt parameter has a range of 0 255 with units of seconds The default is 0 disable 174 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 110 Extended AT4 Command Set Continued Command Action Analog Source Destination Selection lt label gt Description 0 DCE is on hook AOUT disabled Tone detectors disabled Si3000 sample pass through to DAA is inactive 1 DC
314. o ensure compliance with ITU specifications frequency tolerance must be less than 100 ppm including initial accuracy 5 year aging 0 to 70 C and capacitive loading For optimal V 92 PCM upstream performance the recommended crystal accuracy is 525 ppm 48 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 4 4 Layout Guidelines The key to a good layout is proper placement of the components It is best to copy the placement shown in Figure 20 Alternatively follow the following steps referring to the schematics and Figure 21 It is strongly recommended to complete the checklist in Table 34 on page 51 while reviewing the final layout 1 All traces open pad sites and vias connected to the following components are considered to be in the DAA section and must be physically separated from non DAA circuits by 5 mm to achieve the best possible surge performance R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R15 R16 U2 Z1 D1 FB1 FB2 RJ11 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 RV1 C1 pin 2 only C2 pin 2 only C8 pin 2 only and C9 pin 2 only 2 The isolation capacitors C1 C2 C8 and C9 are the only components permitted to straddle between the DAA section and non DAA section components and traces This means that for each of these capacitors one of the terminals is on the DAA side and the other is not Maximize the spacing between the terminals between pin 1 and pin 2 of each of these capacitors 3 Place and group the following
315. ocal Modem Actions Codes Data gt Set the RS232 to DAA transmit gain regis 95 ter UB3 for TAM PSTN AT VSD 129 OK Set sensitivity level for ICM recording silence detection Select G 711U u law 8 bit 64 kbps AT VSM 4 OK format The voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM PCM file Disable voice mode Used as a transition AT VLS 0 OK point between non zero VLS voice modes Setup off hook voice to PSTN See T VLS 1 K 9 Table 117 on page 190 for details Trigger transmit operation lt DLE gt lt u gt TX Underrun Appears at the start of V TX before transmit data are seen Transmit OGM voice stream During voice stream capture the user can adjust the UB3 value via the lt DLE gt lt u gt and Voice Stream lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjust ments and update the VGT value for future use lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt 1 gt 1 digit detected lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt 2 gt DTMF 2 digit detected lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt gt lt DLE gt lt 3 gt DTMF 3 digit detected DLE lt DLE gt lt gt DTMF 4 digit detected The password of lt DLE gt lt 4 gt 1234 has been matched Abort answer lt DLE gt lt gt sequence Terminate the transmit operation The lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK modem w
316. oes not affect INT 1 CID low to high transition triggers INT OCDM Overcurrent Detect Mask 0 Change in OCD does not affect INT X result code is not generated in command mode 1 OCD low to high transition triggers INT result code is generated in command mode 10 PPDM Parallel Phone Detect Mask 0 Change in PPD does not affect INT 1 PPD low to high transition triggers INT RIM Ring Indicator Mask 0 Change RI does not affect 1 RI low to high transition triggers INT DCDM Data Carrier Detect Mask 0 Change in DCD 070 bit 0 does not affect INT 1 DCD high to low transition triggers INT 7 5 Reserved Read returns zero CID Caller ID sticky 1 Caller ID preamble detected data to follow Clears on l read OCD Overcurrent Detect sticky 1 Overcurrent condition has occurred Clears l read PPD Parallel Phone Detect sticky 1 Parallel phone detected since last off hook event Clears on l read RI Ring Indicator sticky 1 Ring event has occurred ISOmodem on hook Clears on l read DCD Data Carrier Detect status 1 carrier detected inverse of DCD pin SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 113 AN93 071101 Bit D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D1 DO PRT
317. of the maximum ring frequency the difference between the highest and lowest valid ring frequency minimum ring time and maximum ring cadence time time on plus time off respectively U49 is set as the hexadecimal equivalent of 2400 divided by the highest valid ring frequency in Hz is set as the hexadecimal equivalent of 2400 divided by the minimum valid ring frequency in Hz minus 2400 divided by the maximum valid ring frequency in Hz U4B and U4C are set as the hexadecimal equivalents of the times in seconds multiplied by 2400 The default high ring frequency RGFH U49 is 70 6 Hz The default ring cadence minimum on time RGMN is 250 ms The default ring cadence maximum total time is 11 seconds Table 55 Ring Detect Registers Register Name Description Default U49 RGFH Ring frequency high 2400 maximum valid ring frequency in Hz 0x0022 U4A RGFD Ring frequency delta 2400 minimum valid ring frequency in Hz 0x007A 2400 maximum valid ring frequency in Hz U4B RGMN Ring cadence minimum on time in seconds multiplied by 2400 0x0258 U4G RGNX Ring cadence maximum total time in seconds multiplied by 2400 0x6720 5 7 9 U4D Modem Control Register 1 MOD1 U4D is a bit mapped register that controls various telephony functions including the enabling of calling and guard tones and loop current verification prior to dialing All bits in this register are read write except for bits 1
318. of the microphone holding time m U1D8 less than U1D6 the break through threshold U1D8 takes over and the speaker level threshold U1D6 becomes inactive m The default value for U1D8 is 7FFFh A typical value for U1D8 is 0x1000 Adjust U1D8 according to the needs of the application 220 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 137 Simplex Speakerphone Configuration Host to Modem Command Modem to Host Local Modem Actions Result Code AT U1CD 40 10 OK Set LEC Filter Length Set LEC Delay AT U1D5 C8 400 400 7FFF OK Set Holding Time ms Set Speaker Threshold Set Microphone Threshold Disable break through 9199 40 Enable SSP configure for automatic switch mode 7 7 6 Call Automatic Tone Dial Table 138 lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 136 Table 138 Speakerphone Automatic Tone Dial Host to Modem Modem to Host Result Commands Data Codes Data Local Modem Actions Perform automatic tone dial of 102 Modem will return OK The user will not receive DLE events for dial tone ring back busy and quiet since the detectors are disabled See Table 117 for details on active detectors ATDT102 OK 7 7 7 Call Manual Off Hook Tone Dial Table 139 lists the commands that occur after the configuration defined in Table 136 Table 139 Speakerphone Manual Off Hook Dial Host to Modem Commands Modem to Host Result Local Modem Act
319. oice mode AT U199 4 OK Set SPCAL U199 2 to enable calibration AT Y254 W59 1 OK Enable the SSI interface to the Si3000 AT U72 0108 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output AT U72 0597 OK Configure Si3000 Register 5 10 dB Line In gain Enable Line In 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter AT U72 065E OK Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR AT U72 0900 OK Configure Si3000 Register 9 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation 15 13 Setup off hook voice mode See Table 115 on page 186 for details This command will switch the modem to off hook state The default value is VSP 0 for disabled speakerphone Dial Number SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 215 AN93 7 7 3 2 Receive Gain Calibration Speakerphone Disabled Figure 34 illustrates the reference setup where the commercial speakerphone is active with speaker set to maximum volume Using the reference commercial speakerphone call the remote telephone and establish a voice call Place a sound source such as a PC speaker at a distance of one foot fr
320. ol Tone Transmission AT Commands DTMF Digit Low Tone Hz High Tone Hz Contact ID Contact ID AT Command Digit Digit Value 0 941 1336 0 10 AT VTS 941 1336 10 1 697 1209 1 1 AT VTS 697 1209 10 2 697 1336 2 2 AT VTS 697 1336 10 3 697 1477 3 3 AT VTS 697 1447 10 4 770 1209 4 4 AT VTS 770 1209 10 5 770 1336 5 5 AT VTS 770 1336 10 6 770 1477 6 6 AT VTS 770 1477 10 7 852 1209 7 7 AT VTS 852 1209 10 8 852 1336 8 8 AT VTS 852 1336 10 9 852 1477 9 9 AT VTS 852 1477 10 1 941 1209 B 11 AT VTS 941 1209 10 941 1477 C 12 AT VTS 941 1477 10 A 697 1633 D 13 AT VTS 697 1633 10 B 770 1633 E 14 AT VTS 770 1633 10 C 852 1633 F 15 AT VTS 852 1633 10 D 941 1633 not used N A N A 1400 KISSOFF AT VTS 1400 0 85 Rev 1 3 229 SILICON LABS AN93 8 2 1 1 Handshake Tone Detection Two tone detectors are reconfigured for detection of the 1400Hz and 2300Hz tones When a valid tone burst is detected the modem reports it to the host DTE in the V 253 event format as follows Event Modem to DTE indication Remarks 1400 Hz tone burst detected 0x10 0x63 Character pair lt DLE gt lt c gt is sent to DTE at the end of the valid tone burst 2300 Hz tone burst detected 0x10 0x65 Character pair lt DLE gt lt e gt is sent to DTE at the end of the valid tone burst 8 2 1 2 Session Example Table 145
321. om or written to the ISOmodem in hexadecimal m Bits within bit mapped registers are identified in this document as the register type i e U followed by the register s hexadecimal address the bit or bit range within the register in brackets and finally the bit or bit range identifier in parenthesis Example U67 6 OHS or 067 3 2 Once the full register reference is made continuing discussion of the bits or bit range refers to the bit or bit range name to simplify the text The bit or bit range inside the bracket represents the actual bit or bit range within the register The value of a bit or bit range is presented in binary for clarity However the address and value of a bit mapped U register is always read from or written to the ISOmodem in hexadecimal m SOmodem S registers are identified with a decimal address e g 538 and the number stored in an S register is also a decimal value 5 1 Controller The controller provides several vital functions including AT command parsing DAA control connect sequence control DCE data communication equipment protocol control intrusion detection parallel phone off hook detection escape control Caller ID control and formatting ring detection DTMF dual tone multi frequency control call progress monitoring error correction and data compression The controller also writes to the control registers that configure the modem Virtually all interaction between the host and the mod
322. om the remote telephone microphone Play out white noise as the far end speech through the sound source and adjust the white noise level so that the level at the speakerphone s Tip Ring is 15 dBm Next measure the speaker loudness by using a sound meter preferred or a PC microphone to record the sound level at a distance of one foot from the speakerphone s speaker Record the white noise level and speaker level loudness and then disconnect the call Line Simulator gt AQ Meter Reference P ad n White Noise Hardware p Source System Online Sy Tip amp Ring 15 dBm Figure 34 Receive Gain Reference Measurements Figure 35 illustrates the setup used to set the transmit gain Here the modem has the AEC AES disabled with AT VSP 0 Using the Si24xx VMB call the remote phone and establish a voice call Use the command sequence in Table 135 Send the same white noise as the far end speech from the remote phone and adjust the receive gain UB5 so that the speaker loudness is the same as that of the reference speakerphone Record the calibrated UB5 value Si24xx VMB Line Simulator on Sound D D Remote j i Met White Noise eter Reference Telephone Bisa Hardware Shell System Offline Sy me amp Ring 15 dBm Figure 35 Receive Gain Configuration 8 216 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 7 3 3 Speakerphone Calibration AEC Gain Calibration Figure 36 illustrates the setup
323. on hook AOUT disabled Tone detectors enabled 21 ISOmodem on hook AOUT connected to ISOmo dem tone generators Tone detectors enabled VNH hook Automatic Hangup Control gt lt hook gt Hook control description 0 The ISOmodem retains automatic hangups as is normal in the other modes such as hanging up the phone when the ISOmodem does not detect a data carrier with a given time interval 1 The ISOmodem shall disable automatic hangups in the other non voice modes 2 The ISOmodem shall disable all hang ups in other non voice modes The ISOmodem shall only per form a logical hangup return the OK result code 74 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Action Ringing Tone Goes Away Timer The ISOmodem only uses this command in call origination trans actions This command sets the amount of time in 0 1 second units the ISOmodem shall wait between Ringing Tone before it can assume that the remote modem has gone off hook Default time is five seconds Repeat Caller ID n Description 0 Display Caller ID information of the last incoming call in formatted form 1 Display Caller ID information of the last incoming call in unformatted form Ringing Tone Never Appeared Timer This command sets the amount of time in seconds the will wait looking for Ringing Tone If the ISOmodem does not detect Ringing Tone in this
324. ook and again before dialing V1 uses the fixed method and V2 uses the adaptive method 9e VO default disables this feature 9eVn 0 Disable automatic line in use detection Automatic Line Status Detection Fixed Method Description Before going off hook with the ATD ATO or ATA commands the ISOmodem compares the line voltage via LVCS to registers NOLN U83 and LIUS U84 Loop Voltage Action PAVE 0 lt LVCS x NOLN Report NO LINE and remain on hook NOLN x LVCS x LIUS Report LINE IN USE and remain on hook LIUS lt LCVS Go off hook and establish a modem connection Once the call has begun the off hook intrusion algorithm described in 6 6 2 Off Hook Condition on page 162 operates normally In addition the ISOmodem reports NO LINE if the line is com pletely disconnected If the HOI bit U77 bit 11 is set LINE IN USE is reported upon intrusion 80 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 41 Extended AT Command Set Continued Automatic Line Status Detection Adaptive Method Description Before going off hook with the ATO or ATA commands the ISOmodem compares the line voltage via LVCS to the NLIU U85 register Loop Voltage Action 0 lt LVCS lt 0 0625 x NLIU Report NO LINE and remain on hook 0 0625 x NLIU LVCS x 0 85 x NLIU Report LINE IN USE and remain on hook 0 85 x NLIU LCVS Go off hook and estab
325. or next command or ACK When it comes as a response to the 2 command OK means ACK CONNECT Physical handshake is completed In SIA FSK mode CONNECT means that the modem is in the data passing state ready to receive or transmit data Note there is an extra space character between the letter T and the carriage return delimiter In V 32bis mode CONNECT is followed by the DCE connection speed e g CONNECT 14400 RING Incoming ring Modem should answer the incoming call the host can command this with ATA NO CARRIER Connection is terminated ERROR Invalid AT command or NACK As a response to the F2 command ERROR means NACK otherwise it means invalid com mand BUSY Dialed number is Busy SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 227 AN93 8 2 Implementing the Ademco Contact ID Protocol Contact ID is a communications protocol for security applications It is a de facto standard which was developed and is owned by the Ademco Group The following is a brief overview of the Contact ID protocol The complete standard is available at the following web site http webstore ansi org RecordDetail aspx sku SIA DC 05 1999 09 Communication is between an alarm panel and a central station The part of the alarm panel that handles communication has the following functions m Call the central station m Wait for the central station to indicate that it is ready for data m Se
326. or the normal ring signal Table 95 shows the AT command strings that configure the ISOmodem for Japan Caller ID 148 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 95 Japan Caller ID Command _ Function AT VCID 1 Enables Caller ID AT VCDT 3 Selects Japan CID mode 6 3 5 DTMF Caller ID DTMF Caller ID is supported in the Si2493 57 34 15 04 Revision D or above and Si2494 39 Revision A or above DTMF Caller ID detection is needed to provide complete CID support for Brazil China and other countries The ISOmodem detects the preamble and start code 0x41 or ASCII then echoes to the host The ISOmodem assembles the rest of the characters in the message and sends them to the host It detects the stop code 0x44 or ASCII D and proceeds with the rest of the call processing For ISOmodems that support voice mode detection of DTMF CID is done automatically FCLASS 8 mode after being enabled by a VLS 14 command The user can also enable FSK CID with the AT VCID and AT VCDT commands This gives simultaneous support of DTMF and FSK modes This is useful in countries like Brazil China and Taiwan where the use of DTMF or FSK varies from region to region 6 4 SMS Support Short Message Service SMS allows text messages to be sent and received from one telephone to another via an SMS service center The ISOmodem provides a flexible interface that can handle multiple SMS standards This flexib
327. ore responding to an answer tone This is useful in dealing with non standard answering modems 5 8 Firmware Upgrades The Si24xx ISOmodem family contains an on chip program ROM that includes the firmware required for the features listed in the data sheet Additionally the ISOmodem contains on chip program RAM to accommodate minor changes to ROM firmware This allows Silicon Labs to provide future firmware updates to optimize the characteristics of new modem designs and those already deployed in the field Firmware upgrades patches provided by Silicon Labs are files loaded into the ISOmodem program RAM after a reset using the AT P command see Table 39 on page 59 Once loaded the upgrade status can be read using the ATI1 command to verify the firmware revision number The entire firmware upgrade RAM is always cleared on reset To reload the file after reset or power down the host processor rewrites the file using the command during post reset initialization Patch files may be more than 6000 characters in some cases They come in a txt file containing multiple lines that are sent serially to the ISOmodem Several patch loading techniques can be used in different environments See the description and Table 82 Whichever technique is used it is suggested to do AT amp T6 to verify the CRC of the loaded patch 5 8 1 Method 1 Fastest Send the entire file in quiet mode using a program that waits for a set amount of time after every l
328. orway 2 6 6 3 Autoloading Firmware Upgrade Example This example stores a firmware upgrade in EEPROM that is automatically loaded into the modem after power up or hardware software reset if the EEPROM option is selected The AT commands required to load the firmware upgrade manually are AT Y254 W0050 0000 CR AT PF800 08D5 To implement this as a boot command macro the commands are BOOT lt CR gt AT Y254 W0050 0000 CR AT PF800 08D5 This must be written to the EEPROM as ASCII hexadecimal in eight address blocks The actual AT commands to store this boot command in the EEPROM starting at address 0 are T M0000 42 4F 54 OD 41 54 2A T M0008 59 32 35 34 3A 57 30 30 T M0010 35 30 2C 30 30 30 30 OD 0018 41 54 3A 50 46 34 30 30 AT M0020 2C 30 38 44 35 0D OD OD This firmware upgrade patch is only an example meant to illustrate the procedure for loading a patch into the EEPROM Loading this code into a SOmodem causes undesirable behavior jog mp og mp gt D D DD P Rev 1 3 35 SILICON LABS AN93 2 6 6 4 Combination Example This example shows boot commands and custom AT commands stored in the same EEPROM Table 29 Combination Example Command Function BOOT lt CR gt Start of EEPROM contents lt commands gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt lt CR gt End of BOOT string lt Custom AT Command Name 1 gt lt CR gt lt comma
329. ough V 92 The Si2457 supports all modulations and protocols from Bell 103 through 90 The 512434 supports all modulations and protocols from Bell 103 through V 34 The Si2415 supports all modulations and protocols from Bell 103 through V 32bis The Si2404 supports all modulations and protocols from Bell 103 through V 22bis Table 1 Modulations Modulation Data Rates bps Modulation Si2494 93 Si2457 Si2439 34 Si2415 Si2404 V 92 48k 40k 32k 24k PCM v V 90 56k 54 6k 53 3k 52k 50 6k PCM v v 49 3k 48k 46 6k 45 3k 44k 42 6k 41 3k 40k 38 6k 37 3k 36k 34 6k 33 3k 32k 30 6k 29 3k 28k V 34 33 6k 31 2k 28 8k 26 4k 24k TCM v v v 21 6k 19 2k 16 8k 14 4k 12k 9600 7200 4800 2400 V 32bis 14 4k 12k 9600 7200 4800 v v v v V 32 9600 TCM v v v v 9600 4800 QAM V 29FC 9600 QAM v v v v V 23 1200 FSK v v v v v V 22bis 2400 1200 QAM v v v v v V 22 1200 DPSK v v v v v Bell 212A 1200 DPSK v v v v v V 21 300 FSK v v v v v Bell 103 300 FSK v v v v v Note With the Si3018 DAA only Table 2 Protocols Protocol Function Si2494 93 Si2457 Si2439 34 Si2415 Si2404 V 44 Compression v V 42bis Compression v V 42 Error Correction v MNP5 Compression v v v v MNP2 4 Error Correction v v v v v Note The Si2494 93 57 39 34 15 04 family allows any supported protocol combined with any modulation
330. own the FSK data link with ATH 3 The host issues AT VNH 2 to the modem again to maintain off hook status for next cleardown 4 The host then issues AT FCLASS 8 followed by the usual 513000 voice pass through command sequence minimize the transition time the host should set up the Si3000 TX RX voice filters and all gain stages before the call 5 AT VLS 5 starts the Si3000 pass through which supports Listen in as well as V Channel bi directional voice operation Use VLS 13 VSP 1 etc if speakerphone is desired 6 When voice period is over the host puts the modem back in data mode using AT FCLASS 0 This will terminate voice operation as well as going to FCLASS 0 ATH and VLS 0 must not be used in FCLASS 8 to terminate the voice session because they override VNH 2 per V 253 standard 7 The host again issues AT VNH 2 to the modem to keep it off hook for the next cleardown 8 AT FO puts the transmitter in Bell 103 SIA mode to resume SIA protocol communication 8 1 1 2 Inserting a V 32bis period e g SIA Level 3 Video Block Support This can be accomplished with the following procedure using standard voice modem commands 1 After clearing down the SIA FSK link the host issues AT VNH 2 to the modem to maintain off hook status for the next cleardown 2 The host sets the modem to V 32bis i e AT amp H4 ATWN3 if error correction is desired 3 The host selects V 32bis originate or answer mode 2 if the tra
331. pacing between the capacitor leads between any line side high voltage component or trace and system side low voltage component or trace greater than 8 mm Also the spacing between any line side component or trace or through hole lead extending through the PCB and the chassis or anything connected to the chassis or low voltage circuitry must be greater than 8 mm or protected with insulating material capable of withstanding a voltage greater than 8 kV Additionally slots cut through the PCB are recommended between the leads of C1 C2 C8 and C9 for increased creepage The PCB and components should be clean and free of contamination such as solder flux or other residue The design engineer must verify the spacing indicated above meets or exceeds any specifications with which they wish to comply The ISOmodem used with the components and techniques described above offers the highest reliability and lowest cost of any available solution The use of supplemental surge suppression components is not recommended 254 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 10 5 AM Band Interference In certain areas AM band interference causes poor connectivity rates and error rates A good EMI common mode filter may be necessary in some situations An example of an off the shelf unit designed to plug directly into the phone line is the Coilcraft TRF RJ11 which can be used for debugging or fixing problem locations Ie Attenuation 3 UB Differential
332. path is muted unmuted to allow half duplex control for proper TAM operations Side tone is disabled Handset TX RX coefficients are applied The Si3000 is using the LINEI and LINEO signals with hands free TAM gain settings 7 3 3 2 TAM Handset This is variation to the TAM Hands Free mode above with the exception that the handset is used to review a locally recorded message or ICM privately The Si3000 is using the MIC and SPKRR and or SPKRL signals with handset gain settings A raised handset usually triggers off hook transition so the controller would have to support a special mode to not switch off hook into Handset mode 7 3 3 3 Speakerphone This mode is used to conduct a hands free voice call The modem is off hook and routing audio between Si3000 and DAA The modem voice path is configured for full duplex audio with speakerphone algorithm enabled Side tone is disabled Speakerphone TX RX filter coefficients are applied The Si3000 is using the LINEI and LINEO signals with speakerphone gain settings 7 3 3 4 Handset This mode is used to conduct a private voice call The modem is off hook and routing audio between the Si3000 and DAA The modem voice path is configured for full duplex audio with speakerphone algorithm disabled Side tone is enabled Handset TX RX filter coefficients are applied The Si3000 is using the MIC and SPKRR and or SPKRL signals with handset gain settings This mode is supported by all parts 192 Rev 1 3 SILIC
333. peration Bit 2 FOH controls when automatic Si3018 10 calibration takes place Table 61 U53 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 REV V 23 Reversing 0 Disable 1 Enable 14 0 Reserved Read returns zero Table 62 U54 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 8 OHCT Off hook to calibration timing in 32 ms units If enabled with TCAL 970 bit 12 this value controls the time between off hook and DAA calibration 7 0 Reserved Must be set to zero Table 63 U62 Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 12 Reserved Must be set to zero 11 Reserved Must be set to one 10 9 Reserved Must be set to zero 8 OHS2 On Hook Speed 2 This bit in combination with the OHS bit and the SQ 1 0 bits on hook speeds specified are measured from the time the OH bit is cleared until loop current equals zero OHS OHS2 SQ 1 0 Mean On Hook Speed 0 0 00 Less than 0 5 ms 0 1 00 3 ms 10 meets ETSI standard 1 X 11 26 ms 51096 meets Australia spark quenching spec Note The GCI command does not modify OHS2 SQ 1 0 7 Full 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 3 2 dBm maximum into 600 513018 only 6 5 Reserved Must be set to zero 106 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 63 U62 Bit Map Continued 4 Reserved be set to zero 3 Reserved be set to zero 2 FOH 0 Automatic calibration timer set to 426 ms 1 Automatic calibration timer set to 106 ms
334. ps format The AT VSM 4 OK voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM PCM file AT VTS 1000 0 100 OK Play user record tone prompt AT U199 8 OK a speaker to avoid echo speakerphone algorithm AT U199 amp FFFD OK Enable microphone for OGM recording Trigger receive operation The first byte after the new AT VRX CONNECT line character following the CONNECT message will be the first data stream byte Receive OGM voice stream During voice stream cap ture the user can adjust the UCO value via the Voice Stream lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commanas The host voice driver will need track the number of adjustments and update the VGR value for future use lt DLE gt lt ETX gt Terminate the receive operation The modem will lt DLE gt lt gt OK respond with lt DLE gt lt ETX gt to mark the end of the data stream The OK denotes the return to command mode Disable Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path This AT U0B1 0 OK ensures codec tones are not sent to the FDV and DTMF AT U199 2 OK Mute the microphone AT U199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for local ring tone alert tones 202 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 6 2 2 Review OGM The RS232 to Si3000 gain register UB8 in the ISOmodem can be used to adjust the voice stream gain Use the VGT command to adjust the UB8 value in command mode It is best to maintain two versions of VGT one for RS232 to Si3000 and another for RS232 to DAA Table 128 TAM Hand
335. ps should not be used Rev 1 3 43 SILICON LABS AN93 The second mode is a 32 768 kHz fundamental mode parallel resonant crystal Typical crystals require a 12 5 pF load capacitance This load is calculated as the series combination of the capacitance from each crystal terminal to ground including parasitic capacitance due to package pins and PCB traces The parasitic capacitance is estimated as 7 pF per terminal This in combination with the 18 pF capacitors provides 25 pF per terminal which in series yields the proper 12 5 pF load for the crystal Instead of a using a 32 768 kHz crystal a signal at 32 768 kHz can be applied to the XTALI pin In such a case the crystal loading caps should not be used The third mode is to use a 27 MHz clock signal A crystal cannot be used for this mode and the signal must be applied to the XTALI pin Frequency stability and accuracy are critically important to the performance of the modem ITU T specifications require less than 200 ppm difference between the carrier frequencies of two modems This value split between the two modems requires the oscillator frequency of each modem to be accurate and stable over all operating conditions within 100 ppm This tolerance includes the initial accuracy of the crystal the frequency drift over the temperature range that the crystal is expected to experience and the five year aging of the crystal Other factors affecting the oscillator frequency includ
336. ption Default Value U1D5 SSPHLDTIM time SSP stays in RX or TX mode to prevent frequent switching 0x0000 U1D6 SSPLTHRSH Local talker threshold 0x0000 U1D7 SSPRTHRSH Remote talker threshold 0x0000 U1D8 SSPBKTHRU Break through threshold for speaker in auto switch mode Ox7FFF Disable feature by setting this to 7FFFh 7 7 3 External Microphone Speaker Calibration The Si2494 39 speakerphone calibration is required for a new external speaker and microphone pair to work properly with the speakerphone code This section covers the following procedures m To calibrate the speaker and microphone module from a commercial reference platform to have the same speaker loudness and microphone sensitivity relative to those of the active reference system m Tocalibrate the speakerphone gains so that the AEC DTD input signal levels are ensured for optimal AEC AES DTD performance The external analog gains on the Si24xx VMB should be finalized before the performing the speakerphone calibration 7 7 3 1 Transmit Gain Calibration Speakerphone Disabled Figure 32 illustrates the reference setup where the commercial speakerphone is active with default settings Using the reference commercial speakerphone call the remote telephone and establish a voice call Place a sound source such as a PC speaker at a distance of one foot from the speakerphone s microphone Play out white noise as the near end speech through
337. r clamping VREG2 pin 10 is bypassed by C6 VREG pin 7 is bypassed by C5 These components must be located as close to the 513018 10 chip as possible to minimize lead lengths 4 1 2 Hookswitch and DC Termination The hookswitch and dc termination circuitry are shown in Figure 18 on page 46 Q1 Q2 Q4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R15 R16 R17 R19 and R24 perform the hookswitch function The on hook off hook condition of the modem is controlled by Si3018 10 pins 13 QB and 1 QE 4 1 3 Clocks The crystal oscillator circuit has three operating frequencies modes that are selected by using the correct clock source and by installing the correct pulldown resistors on the modem in order to signal the ISOmodem which mode to operate Selecting among these modes of operation is described in 2 1 Resetting the Device on page 11 One mode requires a 4 9152 MHz fundamental mode parallel resonant crystal Typical crystals require a 20 pF load capacitance This load is calculated as the series combination of the capacitance from each crystal terminal to ground including parasitic capacitance due to package pins and PCB traces The parasitic capacitance is estimated as 7 pF per terminal This in combination with the 33 pF capacitor provides 40 pF per terminal which in series yields the proper 20 pF load for the crystal Instead of using a 4 9152 MHz crystal a signal at 4 9152 MHz can be applied to the XTALI pin In such a case the crystal loading ca
338. r n 300 bool bValidLine true while bValidLine bValidLine GetFileTextLine caOutGoing if bValidLine cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor caOutGoing cpInputRd OK r n 3000 cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor ATE1 r cpInputRd OK r n 300 cpInputRd temp SendAndWaitFor AT amp T6Nr cpInputRd OK r n 300 printf Finish Loading 55 Mn cpInputRd fclose hpPatchFile Returns FALSE when at end of file Stops after first LF bool GetFileTextLin char cpIn cpInputRd cpInputRd temp cpIn 0 char cpInChar 8 cpInChar 1 0 while feof hpPatchFile 8 e Rev 1 3 269 SILICON LABS AN93 cpInChar 0 strcat cpIn if cpiInChar fgetc hpPatchFile cpInChar n return TRUE return FALSE oy 270 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 V 29 FastPOS Detailed Wave Files The following is a wave file that shows a V 29 FastPOS SDLC transaction It was captured with the program listed above with keep alive loop See Appendix B Line Audio Recording on page 273 for details on how to capture wave files RTS not RTS signal 5 first try to brazil 200 hypercom server wav Adobe Audition Edit View Effects Generate A Favorites Options Window Help S Sere View 0 27522 0 38 051 0 10529 Krna ey Sy ay Ay SST WE UT CITIES V 29 Calling Tone aon E BAR
339. rate in bits per second The lt rate gt parameter represents the DTE rate in bps and may be set to any of the fol lowing values 300 600 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 230400 245760 and 307200 Rev 1 3 173 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 110 Extended AT4 Command Set Continued Command Action 4VCDT n Caller ID Type Description After ring only Always on UK Japan DTMF after polarity reversal DTMF after polarity reversal off hook reception Always on DTMF DTMF after ring voas on o VCID lt pmode gt Caller ID Enable lt pmode gt Description 0 Off 1 On formatted 2 On raw data format VDR lt enable gt lt report gt Distinctive Ring Cadence Reporting lt enable gt lt report gt Mode 0 x Disable distinctive ring 1 0 Enable distinctive ring The DCE will report DROF and DRON result codes only DROF and DRON are reported in 100 ms units 1 1 Enable distinctive ring The DCE will report DROF and DRON result codes as well as well as a Ring result code x 10 seconds after the falling edge of a ring pulse DROF and DRON are reported in 100 ms units VGR gain Receive Gain Selection The lt gain gt parameter has a range of 112 134 with 128 marking the nominal value The default is 128 which represents 0 dB Step size is 3 dB This represents a range of 48 dB to 18 dB This command is used t
340. re upgrades boot commands etc 2 6 4 Boot Commands Custom Defaults Commands to be executed upon boot up are stored between the heading BOOT and the first lt gt lt gt delimiter The boot command has the following format BOOT CR commands lt commands gt lt CR gt lt CR gt Rev 1 3 33 SILICON LABS AN93 The commands end with a CR which in combination with the final lt CR gt provides the CR CR delimiter Boot commands must be the first entry in the EEPROM and are used to set the modem up with custom defaults such as settings for specific countries auto answer or other special settings upon power up or after a hardware or software reset This saves the host processor from reloading special configuration strings at power up or after a reset and allows the modem to be customized by programming the EEPROM or by substituting preprogrammed EEPROMs If the BOOT command is the final entry in the EEPROM it must end with an additional CR to provide the CR2 CR CR delimiter indicating the end of the EEPROM 2 6 5 AT Command Macros Customized AT Commands Macros allow the creation of single custom AT commands that execute combinations of default AT commands including special register configurations AT command macros have the following format lt command name gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt lt commands gt lt CR gt lt CR gt Each AT Command Macro en
341. register may not be necessary or the function of the S register may be available with the use of U registers discussed later or through an AT command Table 45 S Register Descriptions Definition S Register Function Default Range Units Decimal Decimal 0 Automatic answer This value represents the number 0 0 255 rings of rings the ISOmodem must detect before answering a call 0 disables auto answer 1 Ring counter Counts rings received on current call 0 0 255 rings 2 ESC code character 43 0 255 ASCII 3 Carriage return character 13 CR 0 255 ASCII 4 Linefeed character 10 LF 0 255 ASCII 5 Backspace character 08 BS 0 255 ASCII 6 Dial tone wait timer This timer sets the number of 02 0 255 seconds seconds the ISOmodem waits before blind dialing and is only active if blind dialing is enabled X0 X1 X3 7 Carrier wait timer This timer starts when dialing is 80 0 255 seconds completed It sets the number of seconds the modem waits without carrier before hanging up and the num ber of seconds the modem waits for ringback when originating a call before hanging up The register also sets the number of seconds the answer tone continues while using the AT Y2A command on 8 Dial pause timer for and lt dial command modifiers 02 0 255 seconds 9 Carrier presence timer Time the remote modem car 06 1 255 0 1 second rier must be detected before activating
342. rein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 8 304 Rev 1 3 e SILICON LABS
343. return to command mode A Handset Lowered Event timeout or silence event can trigger the lt DLE gt lt gt transmis sion AT UOB1 0 OK Disable Si3000 to DAA transmit gain path This ensures codec tones are not sent to the FDV and DTMF AT U199 A OK Mute the microphone and speaker paths to the codec AT U72 0108 OK Configure Si3000 Register 1 Disable speaker driver Enable line output driver Disable telephone instrument driver Disable MBIAS output AT U72 05D7 OK Configure Si3000 Register 5 20 dB Line In gain Enable Line In 20 dB MIC input gain Mute MIC input Mute telephone instrument input Enable IIR filter AT U72 065E OK Configure Si3000 Register 6 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable Line Out Disable telephone instrument output AT U72 075E OK Configure Si3000 Register 7 0 dB RX PGA gain Enable SPKRL Mute SPKRR SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 205 AN93 Table 129 TAM Handset Record OGM Continued Configure Si3000 Register 9 AT U72 0900 OK 0 dB Line Out attenuation 0 dB Speaker output attenuation Enable speaker for local ring tone alert AT U199 amp FFF7 OK tones 7 6 3 2 Review OGM The host will prompt the user to lift the handset to begin OGM review The procedure restores the TAM Hands Free settings before completion The host will need to ensure the Handset Lowered Event is received before Table 130 TAM
344. rm handset describes a handheld device containing a microphone and a speaker with a four wire connection for microphone signal pair MIC MBIAS and GND and speaker signal pair SPKRL and GND or SPKRL and The 513000 datasheet uses the term handset to describe a two wire device that is connected directly to the Public Switch Telephone Network PSTN This two wire device is referenced as a telephone instrument to avoid confusion The Si24xx VMB EVB Rev 2 0 mainboard with Si24xx2G QFN Rev 1 0 daughtercard serves as the general evaluation platform for the Si2494 39 parts See the 24 Global Voice ISOmodem EVB User s Guide for details Figure 29 illustrates the handset and speakerphone voice path The gain registers in Figure 29 use a 4 12 format with a range of 0x0001 72 247 dB to OxFFFF 24 082 dB For the Si3000 to DAA gain UB1 and the DAA to Si3000 gain UB5 a value of zero is used to disable the path Si2494 39 enters voice mode with FCLASS 8 Figure 30 illustrates the gain and signal selection options for the Si3000 codec Table 117 provides a summary of how the VLS command is used to control the various voice mode operations Table 118 shows the summary of FCLASS IDLE state transitions and the expected responses Rev 1 3 187 SILICON LABS AN93 syjed 29104 euoudaexeeds pue sagn 62 e1nBi4 31118911 29114 SH J8yl3
345. rns to data mode prepared to transmit an SMS Protocol 1 message AT FTM 202 Returns to data mode prepared to transmit an SMS Protocol 2 message To enable the SMS features on the ISOmodem the host must send AT FCLASS 256 to the modem prior to handling an SMS call The host can then dial or answer an SMS call using ATDTxxxx where xxxx is the number to be dialed or ATDT respectively Note the semicolon at the end of the command which places the modem into command mode immediately after dialing and returns OK The host can then prepare the modem for transmitting or receiving SMS data To receive Protocol 1 or Protocol 2 data the host must send AT FRM 200 This causes the modem to return to data mode silently listening for data from the remote SMS server If the modem detects a valid Protocol 1 or Protocol 2 packet it responds with a CONNECT 1 or CONNECT 2 message respectively followed by the SMS message without channel seizure and mark When the carrier stops the modem returns to command mode and responds with OK To transmit Protocol 1 or Protocol 2 data the host must send AT FTM 201 or AT FTM 202 This causes the modem to return to data mode and wait silently until data are received from the host processor for transmission Once data are received from the host the modem transmits the proper number of channel seizure and mark bits followed by the data it received from the host After the modem has begun tran
346. rocessor software is communicating with the modem controller and problems are in one of the following areas Inappropriate Commands Verify that all AT commands used are supported by the ISOmodem and comply with the proper format Be sure each command and argument is correct Do not mix upper and lower case alpha characters in an AT command An AT command string must contain 48 or fewer characters followed by a carriage return Command strings greater than 48 characters are ignored Command Timing The execution time for an AT command is approximately 200 ms Execution is complete when OK is received Subsequent AT commands should wait for the OK message which appears within 200 ms after the carriage return The reset recovery time the time between the rising edge of a hardware reset or the carriage return of an ATZ command and the time the next AT command can be executed is approximately 300 ms When a data connection is being established do not try to escape to the command mode until after the protocol message Register Configurations The ATS command lists the contents of all S registers and the AT R command lists the contents of all U registers Si3018 10 and or Associated Components If the modem goes off hook and draws loop current as a result of giving the ATH1 command go to 10 1 6 Si3018 10 Troubleshooting If the modem does not go off hook and draw loop current as a result of giving the ATH1 command and receiving an OK message beg
347. rrupt pin The four interrupts are 1 RXF Interrupt receive FIFO almost full 2 TXE Interrupt transmit FIFO almost empty 3 Timer Interrupt receive FIFO not empty 4 U70 Interrupt various conditions such as ringing parallel phone pickup etc as defined in register 070 The source of the interrupt can be determined by reading HIR1 28 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 2 3 Isolation Capacitor Interface The isolation capacitor is a proprietary high speed interface connecting the modem chip and the DAA chip through a high voltage isolation barrier provided by two capacitors It serves three purposes First it transfers control signals and transmit data from the modem chip to the DAA chip Second it transfers receive and status data from the DAA chip to the modem chip Finally it provides power from the modem chip to the DAA chip while the modem is in the on hook condition The signaling on this interface is intended for communication between the modem and the DAA chips and cannot be used for any other purpose It is important to keep the length of the ISOcap path as short and direct as possible The layout guidelines for the pins and components associated with this interface are described in 4 4 Layout Guidelines on page 49 and must be carefully followed to ensure proper operation and avoid unwanted emissions 2 4 Low Power Modes 2 4 1 Power Down Mode The Power Down mode is a lower power state than sleep mode It is enter
348. rt Phase 1 Enable Short Phase 2 Disable Short Phase 1 and Short Phase 2 Table 109 55 Parameters Value Description 0 The DCEs decide whether or not to use the short startup procedures The short startup procedures shall only be used if enabled by the command Forces the use of the short startup proce dures on the next and subsequent con nections if they are enabled by the command Forces the use of the full startup proce dures on the next and subsequent con nections independent of the setting of the PQC command 172 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 Handset TAM and Speakerphone Operation This section covers the voice functionality of the Si2494 39 The voice features of the Si2494 39 are divided into three major categories handset telephone answering machine TAM and speakerphone The Si2494 39 implements ITU T V 253 commands for TAM and speakerphone operation The TAM voice compression support includes the following formats m Signed linear 8 bit 64 kbps Unsigned linear 8 bit 64 kbps G 711 8 bit 64 kbps G 711 A law 8 bit 64 kbps G 726 ADPCM 2 bit 16 kbps m G726 ADPCM 4 bit 32 kbps All formats use a fixed 8 kHz sampling rate For most applications the user wants a high quality message format 64 kbps for the Outgoing Message OGM and is less concerned about the quality of the Incoming Message ICM Speak
349. rt to the default values stored in the on chip program memory The host processor interacts with the modem controller through AT commands used to change register settings and control modem operation Country EMI EMC and safety test reports are available from Silicon Laboratories representatives and distributors This application note is intended to supplement the Si2494 39 Revision A Si2493 Revision D and the Si2457 34 15 04 Revision D data sheets It provides all the hardware and software information necessary to implement a variety of modem applications including reference schematics sample PCB layouts AT command and register reference country configuration tables programming examples and more Particular topics of interest can be easily located through the table of contents or the comprehensive index located at the back of this document p GEKOUT Clocking 2 Data Bus IN Interface EECS RXD TXD CTS RIS DAA To Phone DCD Interface 2 HUM Line ESC S AOUT A AOUTb oS pu Parallel Interface 0 00 07 SDI Program Bus SDO SPI SCLK Interface FSYNC 513000 SDO INT Interface SDI INT MCLK RESET Figure 1 Functional Block Diagram Rev 1 3 8 11 Copyright 2011 by Silicon Laboratories AN93 This information applies to a product under development Its characteristics and specifications are subject to change without notice
350. s initHardware setControl SiESC DISABLE NOW LT External interrupt 1 is edge triggered 1 Enable external interrupt 1 PS 1 High interrupt priority for UARTO 1 0 Low interrupt priority for modem side EA 1 Enable global interrupt while 1 modemCommunicationUpdate UARTCommunicationUpdate 298 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 The infinite loop has two functions depending on the use of interrupts or polling for modem communication 1 In interrupt mode the TXE modem and TIO UART interrupts are always jump started by making periodic calls to nodemCommunicationUpdate and to UARTCommunicationUpdate respectively The calls are necessary only to jump start the modem and UART transmit interrupts A system that is aware of the transmit activity for both the modem and the UART can reduce the number of calls thereby freeing MCU bandwidth for other tasks 2 In polling mode only TIO UART interrupts need jump starting using periodic calls to UARTCommunicationUpdate and repeated calls to modemCommunicationUpdate are necessary to poll the modem s HIR1 and determine the status of the transmit and receive FIFOs An obvious limitation of the polling method is the need to constantly poll the modem for a change of FIFO state which uses up MCU bandwidth Compiler Option Dot Commands To include diagnostic dot command functions define DIAGNOSTICS
351. s The EEPROM must be between 8192 and 65536 bits in size and support the commands given in Table 26 The EEPROM must also support 16 bit addressing regardless of size allow a clock frequency of at least 1 MHz assert its output on falling edges of EECLK and latch input data on rising edges of EECLK AII data are sent to and from the EEPROM with the LSB first Required EEPROM command format and signal timing are shown in Tables 26 to 28 A typical EEPROM access timing diagram is shown on Figure 11 Such EEPROMs are available from several different manufacturers for example m Microchip 25LC080 25LC640 m Atmel AT25080 AT25640 Table 26 EEPROM Commands Instruction Name Instruction Format Description READ 0000 0011 Read data from memory at address WRITE 0000 0010 Write data to memory array beginning at address WRDI 0000 0100 Clear write enable bit disable write operation RDSR 0000 0101 Read status register WRSR 0000 0001 Write status register WREN 0000 0110 Set write enable bit enable write operations Table 27 EEPROM Status Register Any Other Bits are Unused 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WEL WIP WEL write enable latch WIP write in progress Table 28 EEPROM Timing Parameter Symbol Min Typ Max Unit EECLK period ECLK 1 0 us EESD input setup time EISU 100 ns EESD input hold time EIH
352. s Free Review OGM Host to Modem Commands Modem to Host Result Local Modem Actions Data Codes Data 128 Set the RS232 to Si3000 transmit gain UB8 for Hands Free Select G 711U 4 8 bit 64 kbps format The AT VSM 4 OK voice driver will need to track the OGM format with the OGM PCM file AT VTX CONNECT Trigger transmit operation lt DLE gt lt u gt TX Underrun Appears at the start of VTX before trans mit data are seen Transmit OGM voice stream During voice stream cap ture the user can adjust the UB8 value via the Voice Stream lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjustments and update the VGT value for future use Terminate the transmit operation The modem will lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK respond with OK to denote the return to command mode 7 6 2 3 Record Local ICM The Record Local ICM is identical to the Record OGM procedure provided in Table 127 on page 202 The main difference is that one of the ADPCM formats is generally used and the PCM file is stored with the other ICM files recorded from the PSTN 7 6 2 4 Review ICM The Review ICM is identical to the Review OGM procedure provided in Table 128 on page 203 The main difference is that one of the ADPCM formats is generally used to conserve message space 7 6 2 5 Speakerphone Transition The SP Button On Event will
353. s zero 104 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 10 U4E Pre Dial Delay Time Register sets the delay time between the command carriage return and when the modem goes off hook and starts dialing either tone or pulse see Table 57 This delay establishes the minimum time the modem must be on hook prior to going off hook and dialing France Sweden Switzerland and Japan have minimum on hook time requirements The value stored in UAE is the desired delay in milliseconds minus 100 ms The 100 ms offset is due to a delay inherent in the dialing algorithm 6 2 Country Dependent Setup on page 133 contains information about country specific values for this register 5 7 11 U4F Flash Hook Time Register U4F sets the time the modem goes on hook as a result of a or amp dial modifier flash hook The value is stored in the register in milliseconds see Table 58 5 7 12 050 051 Loop Current Debouncing Registers 050 LCDN sets the loop current debouncing time and U51 LCDF sets the loop current debouncing off time see Table 59 Loop current debounce is used in cases where the presence or absence of loop current must be determined prior to taking some action For example it may be necessary to verify the presence of loop current prior to dialing The loop current debounce on time LCDN is used to program a delay in measuring loop current after the modem goes off hook to ensure th
354. se be sure ground is connected to the modem module through one pin connected to the motherboard ground plane The modem reset line is sensitive and must be kept very short and routed well away from any circuitry or components that could be subjected to an ESD event Finally mount the modem module as close to the motherboard as possible Avoid high profile sockets that increase the separation between the modem module and the motherboard Rev 1 3 53 SILICON LABS AN93 Murata BLM 18A Motherboard G601 SN1 Connector To Modem Chip Vcc vec Si24xx Pins 5 21 1 0 uF 0 1 uF 0 1 uF 1 0 uF 10 kQ To RESET Si24xx Pin 12 2 2 uF GND GND Figure 22 Modem Module Vcc and RESET Filter 4 5 Analog Output The call progress tone provided by AOUT and discussed in this section comes from a PWM output pin on the ISOmodem AOUT is a 50 duty cycle 32 kHz square wave pulse width modulated PWM by voice band audio such as call progress tones The PWM signal should be processed by a high pass filter R2 R3 R4 C2 C3 and C4 and with the aid of a bridge mode amplifier provides low cost 100 mW to 250 mW power with a 3 to 5 V supply See the circuit in Figure 23 A slightly more expensive amplifier LM4862 is available and while still pin compatible provides twice as much power Re 47pF 4 P 4 RI 3V3 10K R2 R3 R4 R5 C1 C5 1 xir 1K 1K 1K 10
355. seconds If a dial tone is still present the first digit is resent with pulse dialing followed by the other digits in the dial string If a dial tone is not present the remaining digits are dialed with DTMF Adaptive dialing does not select 10 pps vs 20 pps dialing This must be configured beforehand In a PBX installation this method typically results in pulse dialing because the first digit dialed usually 8 or 9 is used to obtain an outside line and therefore results in a dial tone 6 10 4 Automatic Phone Line Configuration Detection The modem may automatically determine the following characteristics of the telephone line DTMF or pulse dialing only m Determine if 20 pps is supported on a pulse dial only line m Identify it as an outside line or extension network PBX m f connected to a PBX determine if the dial tone is constant or make break m f connected to a PBX determine the number to dial for an outside line The AT amp X1 command automatically determines the above parameters through a series of off hooks and dialed digits Table 106 Automatic Phone Line Configuration AT Result Code Command WXYZn W 0 line supports DTMF dialing 1 line is pulse dial only X 0 line supports 20 pps dialing 1 line supports 10 pps dialing only Y 0 extension network PBX 1 connected to outside line Z 0 continuous dial tone 1 make break dial tone n 0 9 number for outside line amp X1 6 10 5 Line Type Determ
356. served Read returns zero 4 RIGPO RI pin Follow this bit when U7C 0 RIGPIOEN 1 3 1 Reserved Read returns zero 0 RIGPOEN 0 RI pin indicates valid ring signal 1 RI pin follows U7C 4 RIGPO 118 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 81 U7D Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 Reserved Read returns zero 14 NLM Host software recommended to always set this to bit 0 Enables No Loop Current Detect 1 Disables Loop Current Detect 13 Reserved Read returns zero 12 TCAL 0 z Timed calibration disabled 1 Timed calibration The time between off hook and calibration is set in 054 OHCT 11 CALD 0 No calibration during dial 1 Calibrate during dial It is recommended that the dial string start with to prevent first digit loss 10 2 Reserved Read returns zero 1 ATZD 0 ATZ enabled 1 ATZ disabled 0 FDP 0 FSK data processing stops when carrier is lost 1 FSK data processing continues for two bytes after carrier is lost 5 7 20 U80 Transmit Delay for V 22 Fast Connect 080 controls delay parameters when the modem is V 22 Fast Connect mode MS V22 AT U7A 3 and the server does not respond with a short answer tone prior to scrambled data or HDLC flags U80 configures the modem to operate without these tones Bit 15 turns this function on After the end of dialing the modem waits for a time set by U80 14 0
357. ses to dial 7 0x0007 PD8 Number of pulses to dial 8 0x0008 U40 PD9 Number of pulses to dial 9 0x0009 U42 PDBT Pulse dial break time ms units 0x003D U43 PDMT Pulse dial make time ms units 0x0027 U45 PDIT Pulse dial interdigit time ms units 0x0320 5 7 7 046 048 DTMF Dial Registers 046 048 set the DTMF power level DTMF on time and DTMF off time respectively see Table 54 The DTMF power levels are set in register U46 as a 16 bit value with the format OXOHLO where H is a hexadecimal number 0 for the dBm level of the high frequency DTMF tone and L is a hexadecimal number 0 F for the dBm level of the low frequency DTMF tone The power level is specified in 1 dB units The DTMF output level is 0 dBm for each tone if U46 0x0000 and 15 dBm if 046 The default power level is 9 dBm for the high tone and 11 dBm for the low tone 047 048 set the DTMF time DTNT and off time DTFT respectively as hexadecimal values in milliseconds The default value for both U47 0 48 is 100 ms and the range of values is 0 1000 ms Table 54 DTMF Dial Registers Register Name Description Default U46 DTPL DTMF power level 0x09BO U47 DTNT DTMF on time ms units 0x0064 U48 DTFT DTMF off time ms units 0x0064 102 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 8 049 04 Ring Detect Registers 049 U4B and U4C set a representation
358. set at a default value of 11111 which results CLKOUT 2 048 MHz The CLKOUT adjustment range 15 lt 1 lt 30 is 12 288 MHz to 6 342194 MHz U6F contains the parallel SPI port receive FIFO interrupt timer and resets to Bits 15 8 are reserved and should not be written to any value other than 0 Bits 7 0 set the period of an internal timer that is reset whenever the parallel or SPI port receive FIFO Hardware Interface Register 0 is read If the internal timer expires with data in the receive FIFO an interrupt is generated regardless of the state of RXF Hardware Interface Register 1 bit 7 This ensures that the host always removes all receive data from the parallel or SPI port receive FIFO even if RXF is not set Table 70 U6C Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 8 LVS 7 0 Voltage Status Eight bit signed two s complement number representing the on hook or off hook tip ring volt age Each bit represents 1 V Polarity of the voltage is represented by the MSB sign bit A value of zero indicates a measured voltage of less than 3 V 7 3 Reserved Read returns zero 2 0 RXG 2 0 Global Receive Gain in dB Default 000b Rev 1 3 111 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 71 U6E Bit Map Bit Function 15 13 Reserved Do not modify 12 8 R1 CLKOUT Divider Default 11111b 7 5 Reserved Read returns 101b Do not modify 4 HRS Hardware Rese
359. sion 0 9 to Revision 1 0 m Added Appendix D Si3006 3009 Supplement for for 3006 and 3009 DAA support Revision 1 0 to Revision 1 1 m Major revision to reflect the latest Si24xx ISOmodem product offerings m Added support for new product features SPI interface and 32 768 kHz clock input m Added software support for parallel and SPI interfaces Revision 1 1 to Revision 1 2 m Correction to SPI and 32 768 kHz and SPI strapping tables Added several registers Removed Appendix D Updated for Si2493 57 34 15 04 Revision D Added Si2493 and Si2439 configuration and voice functions Revision 1 2 to Revision 1 3 m Added Si2494 and Si2439 configuration and voice functions m Added 2 5 SSI Voice Mode 24 Pin TSSOP and 38 Pin QFN Only on page 30 m Added 5 13 EPOS Electronic Point of Sale Applications on page 125 m Added 7 Handset TAM and Speakerphone Operation on page 173 m Added 8 Security Protocols on page 224 m Added 9 Chinese ePOS SMS on page 234 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 303 AN93 CONTACT INFORMATION Silicon Laboratories Inc 400 West Cesar Chavez Austin TX 78701 Tel 1 512 416 8500 Fax 1 512 416 9669 Toll Free 1 877 444 3032 Please visit the Silicon Labs Technical Support web page https www silabs com support pages contacttechnicalsupport aspx and register to submit a technical support request The information in this document is believed
360. smitting it will send marks when it does not have data to send and will continue to do so until the host escapes to command mode The content of the data message is entirely up to the host including any checksum or CRC ETSI ES 201 912 describes two standard data and transfer layers that are commonly used SMS typically relies on caller identification information to determine if the call should be answered using an SMS device or not Refer to 6 3 Caller ID for more information on how to configure the modem for Caller ID detection 150 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 5 Type Il Caller ID SAS Detection When a call is in progress the Subscriber Alerting Signal SAS tone is sent by the central office to indicate a second incoming call The central office may also issue a CPE Alert Signal CAS after the SAS to indicate that call waiting Caller ID CWCID information is available If properly configured the modem will acknowledge the CAS tone receive the CWCID data and perform a retrain The ISOmodem is configured through the PCW command to toggle the RI pin PCW 0 hang up 1 or do nothing PCW 2 upon receipt of the SAS tone The default is to ignore the SAS tone The modem enabled through the VCID command will collect Caller ID information if PCW is set to toggle the RI pin The command can be used to verify receipt of the SAS and CWCID data Bit 9 will be set for SAS receipt due to the RI toggle Bit 4 will b
361. sor and software the evaluation board ISOmodem and the prototype system Si3018 10 and associated external components If this connection is successful the problem lies with the PCB layout the external components associated with the ISOmodem or the ISOmodem device itself If the connection attempt is not successful the problem lies with the Si3018 10 and or associated components Proceed to Si3018 10 Troubleshooting This diagnosis can be validated by connecting the Host ISOcap capacitors to the Si3018 10 on the evaluation board as shown in Figure 43 10 1 6 513018 10 Troubleshooting Start by measuring the on hook and off hook voltages at the Si3018 10 pins with respect to IGND pin 15 Compare these voltages to those in Figure 44 This may indicate an area of circuitry to investigate further using the Component Troubleshooting techniques in the following section The voltages measured should be reasonably close to those in the figure If any of the on hook or off hook Si3018 10 pin voltages are significantly different than those in Figure 44 and nothing seems wrong with the external circuitry after using the Component Troubleshooting techniques replace the Si3018 10 10 1 7 Component Troubleshooting A digital multimeter is a valuable tool for verifying resistances across components diode directions transistor polarities and node voltages During this phase of troubleshooting it is very useful to have a known good ISOModem evalu
362. stance Pin 1 gt 6 2 gt 5 MO Pin 3 gt 2 Pin 4 1 Pin 5 gt 5 Pin 6 gt 5 Pin 7 gt 1 Pin 8 gt 2 9 gt 2 10 gt 1 11 00 12 gt 2 13 gt 5 Pin 14 14 16 gt 5 SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 247 AN93 Table 149 Resistance across Components Si3018 10 Resistance FB1 10 FB2 10 RV1 gt 20 MQ R1 1 07 kQ R2 1500 R3 3 65 R4 2 49 kQ R5 100 kQ R6 100 kQ R7 4 5 or 16 MQ R8 4 5 or 16 MQ H9 gt 800 R10 536 R11 73 R12 10 R13 10 R15 10 R16 10 C1 gt 20 0 C2 gt 20 0 C3 gt 3 C4 3 5 MQ or 9 7 MQ C7 2 MQ or 5 MQ C8 gt 20 MQ C9 gt 20 0 Note If two values given the resistance measured is dependent on polarity Table 150 Voltages across Components with Diode Checker Component Voltage Q1 Q3 Q4 Q5 Base red lead to Emitter black lead 0 6 V Base red lead to Collector black lead 0 6 V Verifies transistors are NPN Q2 Emitter red lead to Base black lead 0 6 V Collector red lead to Base black lead 0 6 V Verifies transistor is PNP Collector of Q2 red lead 21V to pin 1 of Si3018 10 black lead If test fails Z1 is reversed 248 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 10 2 Self Test The Si24xx ISOmodem s advan
363. t No frame checking would be done by the modem all of that would be left to the host As shown above lt DLE gt lt ETX gt marks the end of frame After sending OK to the host the modem goes back into command mode 9 2 2 4 Response 3 If the frame had been received with channel seizure and mark segment detected at beginning of frame the modem would send one of the responses below to the host CONNECT 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt Frame Data Received DLE ETX lt CR gt lt LF gt OK lt CR gt lt LF gt The Host does all upper level frame validations since the modem does not do any frame checking As shown above DLE ETX signifies the end of frame After the modem sends OK it goes back to command mode 238 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 9 3 Example Session The example below shows a typical session The user determines the values of the U registers transmit AT FCLASS 256 CR Enable SMS POS mode waitfor OK transmit 0 0 12 4 Set SMS POS parameters waitfor OK transmit ATD phone number here CR dial out waitfor OK xO0d x0a The atthe end of the dial string returns the modem to command mode after dialing The modem will issue OK after dialing transmit AT UD1 3C CR Set TxDelay 600ms waitfor OK transmit AT UD2 3E8 CR Wait 10 s for an answer waitfor OK transmit AT FRM 200 CR Go into data mode and wai
364. t 0 Normal operation 1 Device will perform hardware reset All registers will return to default settings 3 0 Reserved Read returns 0 Do not modify Table 72 U6F Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 8 Reserved Do not modify 7 0 PTMR Port Receive FIFO Interrupt Timer in milliseconds U70 controls escape and several indicator and detector masks and provides several read only status bits see Table 73 Bits 5 6 7 and 14 are reserved Bits 4 0 are read only and bits 15 and 13 8 are read write 070 resets to 0x2700 with a power on or manual reset Bit 15 HES 0 default disables the hardware escape pin Setting HES 1 enables ESC When ESC is enabled escape from the data mode to the command mode occurs at the rising edge of the ESC pin Multiple escape options can be enabled simultaneously For example U70 13 TES 1 by default which enables the escape If HES is also set HES 1 either escape method works Additionally the 9th bit escape can also be enabled with the AT B6 command or through autobaud Bit 13 TES 1 default enables the standard escape sequence To successfully escape from data mode to command mode using there must be UART parallel or SPI activity depending on the interface mode for a guard period determined by register S12 both before and after the 512 be set for a period ranging from 200 ms to 5 1 seconds
365. t and emptied by modemInterrupt Once the buffer is empty subsequent TXE modem interrupts have no effect If the buffer is filled again after all TXE interrupts have been serviced the interrupt needs jump starting This is accomplished calling modemCommunicationUpdate after filling the buffer The two arrays above must be sized by choosing a power of two for the value of BUFFERSIZE defined in modem 80C51 h This is because keeping track of the circular buffer indexes requires modulus operations Instead of costly integer divisions with remainder the modulus operation is achieved by bit masking using the all one bit pattern equal to BUFFERSIZE minus one For example if BUFFERSIZE is 1024 210 the bit mask MODULUS MASK used for updating buffer pointers modulo BUFFERSIZE must be 1023 0011 1111 1111 When buffer index reaches the value 1024 0100 0000 0000 a bitwise AND operation with MODULUS MASK will reset the index value to zero If the value of BUFFERSIZE is changed in the header file then the value of MODULUS MASK must be set to the same value minus one The following global variables track the state of the buffers A value of zero indicates an empty buffer int gModemToUARTBufferSize int gUARTToModemBufferSize Read and write addresses to the above buffers are tracked by the following pointers int gLastFromUART The last byte that was added to gUARTToModemBuffer int gNextToModem The first byte tha
366. t The MMUTE bit U199 3 mutes the microphone input audio path The bit should be cleared for the normal speakerphone operation For message review during hands free TAM the bit should be set to mute the microphone Bit SPCAL U199 2 in U199 must be set for speakerphone s calibration and cleared for normal speakerphone operation Bit fields SPKREF and MICREF in U19E contain the speakerphone s speaker and microphone levels during speakerphone calibration Table 116 U199 Bit Definitions Bit Name Function 8 SSP LOCTALK 1 Local talker enabled 0 Remote talker enabled Toggled by lt DLE gt lt 0x27 gt 7 SSP PTT 1 Manually switch between near far talker push to talk mode 0 Automatically switch based on signal levels Toggled by lt DLE gt lt 0x26 gt 6 SSP FLAG 1 Enable SSP mode 0 Disable SSP mode Toggled by lt DLE gt lt 0x25 gt 3 MMUTE 1 Mute speaker of speakerphone or handset 0 Unmute speaker 2 SPCAL 1 AEC speaker microphone calibration 0 Normal mode 1 SMUTE 1 Mute local talker 0 Unmute local talker 186 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 7 2 Voice Reference Overview This document uses the term handset mode to describe the use of the microphone MIC and speaker SPKRL SPKRR connections on the 513000 The term hands free or speakerphone mode describes the use of the line input LINEI and line out LINEO connections on the Si3000 The te
367. t EM gt lt t9 gt OxA4 Transmit 0x19 0x99 Received 0x19 0x99 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t10 gt 5 Transmit 0x19 0 11 Received 0x19 0x11 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t11 gt OxA6 Transmit 0x19 0x13 Received 0x19 0x13 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t12 gt Transmit 0x99 0x19 Received 0x99 0x19 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t13 gt OxA8 Transmit 0x99 0x11 Received 0x99 0x11 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t14 gt OxA9 Transmit 0x99 0x13 Received 0x99 0x13 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t15 gt OxAA Transmit 0x11 0x19 Received 0x11 0x19 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t16 gt OxAB Transmit 0x11 0x99 Received 0x11 0x99 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t17 gt OxAC Transmit 0x11 0x13 Received 0x11 0x13 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t18 gt OxAD Transmit 0x13 0x19 Received 0x13 0x19 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t19 gt OxAE Transmit 0x13 0x99 Received 0x13 0x99 Yes Yes lt EM gt lt t20 gt OxAF Transmit 0x13 0x11 Received 0x13 0x11 Yes Yes Abort Detected in Framed Yes Receive Yes lt EM gt lt mark gt 0 0 Begin Transparent Mode Submode Only Trarsmite ag enter Detected a non flag to flag Framed Submode if cur m transition Preceding data was rently in Transparent Sub a alia lt EM gt lt flag gt OxB1 mode If ESA E 1 frame If ESA E 1 sent FCS es append FCS to end of matches that of the calculated frame before sending CRC closing HDLC flag Rev 1 3 127 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 86 EM In Band Commands and Statuses Continued
368. t for Originate modem The length of the timeout is dependent on the host called Once the connection is made the answer modem s host expects to receive a frame such as 0x81 0x00 0x05 0x13 Oxcd Oxaa Oxa4 0x00 0 4 Followed by lt DLE gt lt ETX gt lt CR gt lt LF gt OK lt CR gt lt LF gt Once a frame has been received the receive modem becomes the transmit modem The server returns a frame of data to the terminal transmit AT FTM 202 lt CR gt Use Protocol 2 waitfor CONNECT x0d x0a Transmit a frame such as 0x82 0x00 0x05 0 6 Oxea 0x50 0x6b 0x00 0x68 transmit 10 03 Send lt DLE gt lt ETX gt at the end of frame waitfor OK x0d x0a e Rev 1 3 239 SILICON LABS AN93 POS Server TS1 gt 152 CAS TS3 4 CAS Ack Complete the CAS Handshake Send FSK Packet TS5 TD3 Send FSK Packet TS4 gt Send FSK Packet Figure 38 Diagram of Handshake Using CAS CAS ACK and Message Packet Exchange 240 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 For Figure 39 assume that the originating modem transmits first and that the two modems alternate transmitting and receiving For simplicity this figure does not show the provisions for timeout cases HES 1 AT FCLASS 256 V 23 half duple x Z N A orginale ATDT ATD Txxxx
369. t granted MOH with 1 minute timeout granted MOH with 2 minute timeout granted MOH with 3 minute timeout granted GQ NN MOH with 4 minute timeout granted 9 MOH with 6 minute timeout granted 10 MOH with 8 minute timeout granted 11 MOH with 12 minute timeout granted 12 MOH with 16 minute timeout granted 13 MOH with indefinite timeout granted 14 MOH request denied Future requests in the same session will also be denied 164 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 6 7 2 Receiving Modem On Hold Requests If modem on hold is enabled via the PMH 1 command the Si2493 may be placed on hold by a remote modem The maximum time the modem will remain on hold is configured with the setting Possible values of PMHT are given in Table 107 Upon receipt of modem on hold request the Si2493 will indicate PMHR followed by the code corresponding to the timeout granted The DCD pin will be deasserted while the modem is on hold and the CONNECT result code will indicate a return to data mode A modem disconnect due to a timeout or failed negotiation will result in a NO CARRIER result code 6 8 HDLC Bit Errors on a Noisy Line Bit errors can occur on an impaired line The problem lies in determining and ignoring the spurious data resulting from poor line conditions and recovering valid data This example illustrates a typical data corruption problem due to a noisy line and th
370. t is assumed that the designer has read the data sheet implemented the reference design using the recommended bill of materials and carefully followed the layout guidelines presented in 4 4 Layout Guidelines on page 49 Troubleshooting begins with system level checks and then proceeds all the way down to the component level In this chapter all system side pin numbers refer to the 24 pin TSSOP package and all line side pin numbers refer to the 16 pin version 10 1 2 Visual Inspection Before troubleshooting be certain that the circuit boards and components are clean Carefully wash the boards to remove all solder flux and solder flakes Inspect the modem circuitry to ensure all components are installed and inspect all solder joints for incomplete connections cold solder joints and solder bridges Check all polarized components such as diodes and capacitors for correct orientation Thoroughly clean the circuit board after replacing a component or soldering any connection Reset the Modem Make sure the modem is reset after the power and clocks are applied and stable 10 1 3 Basic Troubleshooting Steps m Checkthe Power With power off use an ohmmeter to verify that the system ground is connected to ISOmodem 6 Turn System power and measure the voltage between pin 5 and pin 6 and between pin 21 and pin 6 on the ISOmodem In both cases the voltage should be 3 3 V If this is not the case check the power routing If power is pr
371. t to 0 0 255 minutes 38 Hang up delay time Maximum delay between receipt of the ATHO command and hang up If time out occurs before all data can be sent the NO CARRIER 3 result code is sent An OK response is sent if all data are transmitted prior to time out This register applies to V 42 mode only 538 255 disables time out and the modem only disconnects if data are successfully sent or carrier lost 20 0 255 seconds 40 Data Pattern Data pattern generated during amp T4 and amp T5 transmit tests 0 All spaces 0s 1 All marks 1s 2 Random data 0 2 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS 89 AN93 Table 45 S Register Descriptions Continued Definition S Register Decimal Function Default Decimal Range Units 41 V 34 symbol rate Symbol rate for V 34 when using the amp T4 and amp T5 commands 0 2400 symbols second 1 2743 symbols second 2 2800 symbols second 3 3000 symbols second 4 3200 symbols second 5 3429 symbols second A valid combination of symbol rate S41 and data rate amp G must be selected Symbol Rate Allowable Data Rates 2400 2400 21600 2743 4800 26400 2800 4800 26400 3000 4800 28800 3200 4800 31200 3429 4800 33600 0 42 Blacklisting The ISOmodem does not dial the same number more than two times in S44 seconds An attempt to dial a third
372. t value of U6F is 1 ms The timer interrupt can only be cleared by reading at least one byte from the receive FIFO If there remain bytes in the receive FIFO after servicing a timer interrupt the timer will trigger another interrupt after the same amount of time specified in the U6F register 070 Interrupt This interrupt is analogous to the interrupt pin when operating in UART mode It is the result of a condition set in the U70 register being met e g a parallel phone detection if bit PPDM was set in 070 The U70 interrupt indicated by the INT bit in HIR1 can be enabled and disabled using the INTM bit in the same register The only way to clear this interrupt is by sending the command to the modem Typically this requires the application layer to send an ESC control word to place the modem in command mode before sending The response from the reports the cause of the interrupt Refer the programmer s guide for more information Figure 76 shows the ISR implementation for modem originated interrupts The interrupt service routine keeps running in a loop until all interrupt conditions are cleared The modemInterrupt sample code on page 300 shows the full ISR implementation Refer to the define statements to see how the different interrupt conditions are inferred 294 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 global interrupt Read modem status RXF TXE timer or U70 interrupt
373. t will be taken out of gUARTToModemBuffer int gLastFromModem The last byte that was added to gModemToUARTBuffer int gNextTOoUART The first byte that will be taken out of gModemToUARTBuffer The flow of data between the modem and the UART is managed by the following functions har pullByteForModem void Remove a byte from gUARTToModemBuffer har pullByteForUART void Remove a byte from gModemToUARTBuffer void pushByteToModem char byteToSend Add a byte to gUARTToModemBuffer void pushByteToUART char byteToSend Add byte to gModemToUARTBuffer Figure 77 summarizes the interactions between the function calls pointers and buffers described above 296 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Receive data Dereferenceand gNextToUART P sssi Update buffer size update pointer Send data to UART Receive data Z Dereferenceand payer Update buffer size 22 gNextToModem Dereterenegng Update buffer size update pointer Send data to modem Figure 77 Circular Buffer Flowchart Rev 1 3 297 SILICON LABS AN93 Status and Control Sample code for this layer can be found in status control c file This code can be ported to other applications with minimal changes needed to compile on the host pl
374. ta may be sent from the modem to the terminal CTS clear to send is a control signal from the modem DCE to the terminal DTE indicating data may be sent from the terminal to the modem for transmission to the remote modem This arrangement is typically referred to as hardware flow control There is a 14 character FIFO and a 1024 character elastic transmit buffer see Figure 3 CTS goes inactive high when the 1024 character buffer reaches 796 characters then reasserts low when the buffer falls below 128 characters There is no provision to compensate for FIFO overflow Data received on TXD when the FIFO is full are lost XON XOFF is a software flow control method in which the modem and terminal control the data flow by sending characters 0 0 11 and XOFF characters S 0x13 XON XOFF flow control is enabled on the ISOmodem with AT Q4 DCD does not de assert during a retrain see Table 45 S9 Carrier presence timer and S10 Carrier loss timer CTS always deasserts during initial training retrain and at disconnect regardless of the setting For Q0 CTS flow control is disabled CTS is inactive during data transfer The modem remains in the data mode during normal automatic retrains The host can force a retrain by escaping to the command mode and sending ATO1 or ATO2 The DCD and RI pins can be used as hardware monitors of the carrier detect and ring signals Additionally the INT pin can be programmed to monitor the bits in reg
375. te These countries do not have built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut 138 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Italy 59 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 5006 3 Japan AT GCl 0 Jordan AT GCl 16 AT U49 22 7A Kazakhstan AT GCl 73 Korea South AT GCl 61 AT U67 A Kuwait Defaults Kyrgyzstan AT GCl 73 Latvia AT GCl 1B AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Lebanon AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 Lesotho AT GCl 9F AT U63 33 AT U67 A ATS006 3 Liechtenstein AT GCl 2E AT U62 904 Lithuania AT GCl 73 AT U45 344 AT U62 904 33 Note These countries do not have a built in support but are using the settings of other countries as a shortcut SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 139 AN93 Table 90 Country Initialization Table Continued Country Initialization Luxembourg 69 AT U14 7 AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U4F 64 AT U52 2 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS006 3 Macao Defaults Malaysia 1 6 946 80 Malta AT GCl 2E AT U35 10E0 AT U46 9B0 AT U62 904 AT U67 8 Martinique AT GCl 1B AT U62 904 AT U67 8 ATS007 50
376. tem the alarm panel always calls the central station and sends data the central station only acknowledges its readiness to receive data and that data has been received For this reason the communication part of the alarm panel has been called the transmitter the communication part of the central station has been called the receiver With the SIA protocol the central station can also send data to the alarm panel since data is sent using FSK the communication can be half duplex or full duplex Nevertheless the traditional nomenclature of transmitter for the alarm panel and receiver for the central station is still used for the SIA protocol The communication session consists of four elements m The Handshake Tone a single tone m The Speed Synchronization Signal two tones m Data Blocks and Control Signals transmitted using Bell 103 FSK encoded data m Acknowledgement Blocks can be either single tones or Bell 103 FSK encoded data according to the capabilities of the transmitter 8 1 1 Modem Specific Implementation Details 8 1 1 1 Listen In and V channel Periods Voice Pass Through This can be accomplished with the following procedure using standard voice modem commands 1 Prior to making the call the host issues AT VNH 2 to modem This will keep the modem off hook when the host clears down the FSK data connection using ATH 2 After the modem has negotiated a Listen in period using the SIA protocol in Bell 103 the host clears d
377. ters and bits used for Intrusion Detection 162 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 102 Intrusion Detection Register Bit s Name Function 070 10 PPDM Parallel Phone Detect Mask 070 2 PPD Parallel Phone Detect U76 15 9 OHSR Sample Rate 076 8 FACL ACL 076 7 5 DCL Differential Current Level 076 4 0 ACL Absolute Current Level 077 15 12 IST Intrusion Settling Time 077 11 HOI Hang Up On Intrusion U78 15 14 IB Intrusion Blocking U78 7 0 IS Intrusion Suspend U79 4 0 LVCS Line Voltage Current Sense U83 15 0 NOLN Line Threshold V1 U84 15 0 LIUS Line in use Threshold 1 085 15 0 NLIU Line in use No Line Threshold V2 The ISOmodem has an internal analog to digital converter used to monitor the loop voltage when on hook and loop current when off hook to check for parallel devices going off hook The host measures loop voltage or current by reading U79 4 0 LVCS To set the ISOmodem to monitor loop voltage in the on hook state the host issues the following commands To set the ISOmodem to monitor loop current the host issues the following commands Command Function 79 Host reads the loop voltage from the LVCS Register U79 bits 4 0 while the modem is on hook Command Function ATH1 To go off hook AT R79 Host reads loop current from the LVCS Register U79 bits 4 0 whi
378. th This will allow call screening of the ICM AT U199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for call screening of the ICM AT VRX CONNECT Trigger receive operation The first byte after the newline character following the CONNECT message will be the first data stream byte Voice Stream Receive ICM voice stream During voice stream capture the user can adjust the UBF value via the lt DLE gt lt u gt and lt DLE gt lt d gt commands The host voice driver will need track the number of adjust ments and update the VGR value for future use DLE lt DLE gt lt ETX gt OK Terminate the receive operation The modem will respond with lt DLE gt lt ETX gt to mark the end of the data stream The OK denotes the return to command mode A loss of loop current parallel phone detect timeout or silence event can trigger the lt DLE gt lt gt transmission SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 209 AN93 Table 131 TAM PSTN Normal Answer OGM Playback with ICM Record Continued Disable DAA to Si3000 receive gain path AT UOB5 0 OK This ensures line events such as CID and ring tone are not heard via the codec AT U199J2 OK Mute the microphone ATU199 amp FFF7 OK Enable speaker for local ring tone alert tones Disable voice mode Used as a transition AT VLS 0 OK point between non zero VLS voice modes This will hang up the call AT VLS 14 OK Setup on hook TAM vo
379. th bit escape mode This mode is not allowed with a parallel or SPI interface Nn Asynchronous protocol WO Wire mode no error correction no compression Notes 1 When autobaud mode BO B1 and P1 is not detected automatically The combination of B2 and P3 is detected This is compatible with seven data bits no parity two stop bits Seven data bits no parity one stop bit may be forced by sending AT T17 B1 2 After changing the baud rate the result code OK is sent at the o d DTE rate Subsequent commands must be sent at the new rate If the ISOmodem is configured in autobaud mode AT commands YTO through T15 lock the new baud rate and disable autobaud To eliminate any possibility of a race condition between the receipt of the result code and the changing of the UART speed CTS is de asserted while the result code is being sent until after the rate has been successfully changed The host should send the command and wait for the OK response After OK has been received the host may send data at the new rate as soon as CTS is asserted The command should be the last command sent in a multi command line and may not be used on the same command line as U or R commands If it is not the OK from the T command is sent at the old DTE rate and other result codes are sent at the new DTE rate 3 The autobaud feature does not detect this rate 4 Default is T16 if autobaud is selected by reset strap option otherwise default is
380. th lower ac Leakage Rev 1 3 289 SILICON LABS AN93 APPENDIX C PARALLEL SPI INTERFACE SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTATION This appendix describes the software interface requirements for communication with the ISOmodem in parallel or SPI mode Sample code was developed to run on the Silicon Labs C8051F12xx platform to allow basic communication between the modem and a PC using the parallel or SPI interface Figure 74 shows a typical connection between a PC and the modem using the MCU C8051F12xx demo board as interface Terminal emulation software RS 232 interface C8051F12xx Parallel interface UART Parallel interface interface Figure 74 PC to Modem Connection through a C8051F12xx Demo Board A typical application is structured in four software layers 1 Hardware access where the MCU performs all the basic accesses to and from the modem 2 Interrupt service or polling depending on the mode of access polling or interrupt this layer contains the algorithms that determine when the host and the modem exchange data 3 Data buffer management status and control this portion of the code contains the circular buffers that relay data between the UART and the modem in both directions Access functions are provided for the application to set the software interrupt mask and the escape bit and to query the status of software interrupts 4 The application layer this code depends on the application An example application
381. that this external clock signal be stable before the reset ends 2 1 1 Reset Sequence After power on the modem must be reset by asserting the RESET pin low for the required time then waiting a fixed 300 ms before sending the first AT command The reset recovery time of 300 ms is also applicable if the reset is a SW triggered event such as an ATZ command If a 4 9152 MHz crystal or an external 27 MHz clock is used the reset must be asserted for 5 ms and a wait of 300 ms duration must happen before an AT command is issued If a 32 kHz crystal is used the reset pulse must be 500 ms long and followed by the same 300 ms duration wait as that used for higher frequency clocks This is adequate to reset all the on chip registers Note that 16 us after the customer applied reset pulse starts the I O pins will be tri stated with a weak pull up and 16 after the end of this reset pulse the IO pins will switch to inputs or outputs as appropriate to the mode indicated by the pull down strapping This 16 us delay is for newer revs of the modem parts those parts that introduce a 32 kHz crystal and SPI operation older revs exhibit a delay of only nanoseconds The reset sequence described above is appropriate for all user modes of the modem including UART SPI and Parallel bus operation A software reset of the modem can also be performed by issuing the command ATZ or by setting U register 6E bit 4 RST high using AT commands After issuing a softw
382. the host Autobaud can be turned off using AT commands TO through 1715 and 1T17 Host software should disable autobaud operation once the DTE rate has been established This prevents transients on TXD to cause inadvertent baud rate changes Autobaud is off when dialing answering and in data mode When autobaud mode is off the baud rate is set to the most recently active baud rate prior to entering one of these states When autobaud mode is on autoparity is performed when either at or AT is detected Autoparity detects the formats listed in Table 19 20 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 19 Serial Formats Detected in Autobaud Mode Symbol Data bits Parity Stop bits 7N1 7 None mark 1 7N2 7 None mark 2 781 7 None space 1 701 7 Odd 1 7E1 7 Even 1 8 1 8 None mark 1 8E1 8 Even 1 801 8 Odd 1 9N1 9 None mark 1 Note For 7N1 the modem is programmed to 7 data bits mark parity and one stop bit This may be changed with the and commands In autobaud mode 7N1 is properly interpreted and echoed but the ATP and AT B commands must be sent prior to dialing in order to lock the parity and format to 7N1 Otherwise the ISOmodem locks to 7 bits mark parity and two stop bits 7N2 2 2 3 3 Flow Control The ISOmodem supports flow control through RTS CTS and XON XOFF RTS request to send is a control signal from the terminal DTE to the modem DCE indicating da
383. this bit is set to 1 the pulse dial modifier P is ignored and the dial command is carried out as a tone dial ATDT Bit 5 GT18 0 default disables the 1800 Hz guard tone GT18 1 enables the 1800 Hz guard tone Bit 4 GT55 0 default disables the 550 Hz guard tone GT55 1 enables the 550 Hz guard tone Bit 3 CTE 0 default disables and CTE 1 enables the calling tone referred to in bit 14 The calling tone is a 1300 Hz tone in originate mode with a 0 5 0 7 sec 1 5 2 0 sec off cadence as described in V 25 Rev 1 3 103 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 56 Register U4D Bit Map Bit Name Function 15 Reserved Read returns zero 14 Turn Off Calling Tone 0 Disable 1 Enable 13 Reserved Read returns zero 12 NHFP No Hook Flash Pulse 0 Disable 1 Enable 11 NHFD No Hook Flash Dial 0 Disable 1 Enable 10 CLPD Check Loop Current Before Dialing 0 Ignore 1 Check 9 Reserved Read returns zero 8 FTP Force Tone or Pulse 0 Disable 1 Enable 7 SPDM Skip Pulse Dial Modifier 0 No 1 Yes 6 Reserved Read returns zero 5 GT18 1800 Hz Guard Tone Enable UK Guard Tone 0 Disable 1 Enable 4 GT55 550 Hz Guard Tone Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable 3 CTE Calling Tone Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Reserved Read returns zero 1 Reserved Read returns zero 0 Reserved Read return
384. through 9 respectively see Table 53 The values entered in hexadecimal format with digit 0 having a default setting of 10 decimal pulses digit 1 having a default setting of one pulse digit 2 having a default setting of two pulses etc This pulse arrangement is used throughout most of the world There are however two exceptions New Zealand and Sweden New Zealand requires 10 pulses for 0 nine pulses for 1 eight pulses for 2 etc Sweden on the other hand requires one pulse for 0 two pulses for 1 etc Complete information is provided in 6 2 Country Dependent Setup on page 133 U42 U43 and U45 set the pulse dial break time PDBT make time PDMT and interdigit delay time PDIT respectively The values are entered in hexadecimal format and represent milliseconds The default values meet FCC requirements The default dialing speed is 10 pps See 6 2 Country Dependent Setup on page 133 for Japanese 20 pps dialing configuration Rev 1 3 101 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 53 Pulse Dial Registers Register Name Description Default U37 PDO Number of pulses to dial 0 0x000A U38 PD1 Number of pulses to dial 1 0x0001 U39 PD2 Number of pulses to dial 2 0x0002 U3A PD3 Number of pulses to dial 3 0x0003 U3B PD4 Number of pulses to dial 4 0x0004 U3C PD5 Number of pulses to dial 5 0x0005 U3D PD6 Number of pulses to dial 6 0x0006 U3E PD7 Number of pul
385. time period the ISOmodem shall assume that the remote station has gone off hook and return an OK result code Default time is 0 seconds Receive Voice Stream Enable DTE receive of voice stream The DCE will return a CON NECT response followed by the voice stream as defined by the VSM command DTE can issue DLE lt DLE gt lt ESC gt sequence to terminate the receive stream The DCE will return a lt DLE gt lt ETX gt followed by OK response for lt DLE gt lt gt and lt DLE gt lt ESC gt followed by OK response for DLE ESC DCE can be configured to terminate the stream using the DTE DCE Inactivity Timer which is configured using the VIT command The DTE will need to process any lt DLE gt shielded events present in the data stream Any DLE DLE sequences can be preserved to allow less overhead during playback of the stream with the VTX command Command VRA n VRID n VRN n VRX VSD lt sds gt lt sdi gt Silence Detection lt sds gt Noise level sensitivity 127 Less aggressive more sensitive lower noise lev els considered to be silence 128 Nominal level of sensitivity 129 More aggressive less sensitive higher noise lev els considered to be silence lt sdi gt sets the length of a time interval in 0 1 second units which must contain no or little activity before the ISOmodem will report QUIET lt DLE gt lt q gt Default is fi
386. tion transfer across the UART TX and RX lines The control status channel that runs alongside the main data channel is signaled by the use of EM shielding This means a special character is chosen to signify the beginning of the control status channel In its simplest form this special character in conjunction with the next character is taken together as a single nugget of information denoting a special control message or a special status V 80 uses 0x19 as a special control character The next question becomes how to send the character 0x19 as data This is accommodated by the concept of transparency in which the host is required to send a special sequence to signify its desire to send 0x19 as data rather than a control character The concept could have been very simple but there are additional complications m The desire to support 7 bit data and 1 bit parity asynchronous protocols m The desire to support XON and XOFF handshaking m The desire to limit bandwidth usage The desire to support 7 data bits and 1 parity bit creates the possibility that the host would be sending 0x99 when the intention is to be sending the 0x19 special character The EM character is really a shortcut for saying 0x19 or 0x99 The XOFF characters are 0x11 and 0x13 respectively These characters are treated in a special way by many UARTS and therefore V 80 must ensure that neither 0x11 or 0x13 occur in the
387. to U1 3 1 and C2 should be placed directly between U1 and U2 Short direct traces should be used to connect C1 and C2 to U1 and U2 These traces should not be longer than two inches and should be minimized in length Place C2 such that its accompanying trace to the C2B 6 on the 513018 is not close to the trace from R7 to the RNG1 pin on the Si3018 pin 8 4 Place R7 and R8 as close as possible to the RNG1 and RNG2 pins pins 8 and 9 ensuring a minimum trace length from the RNG1 or RNG2 pin to the R7 or R8 resistor In order to space the R7 component further from the trace from C2 to the C2B pin it is acceptable to orient it 90 degrees relative to the RNG1 pin pin 8 Rev 1 3 51 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 34 Layout Checklist Continued P Layout Items Required 5 The area of the loop from C50 to U1 pin 4 and from C51 to pin 13 back to pin 12 DGND should be minimized The return traces to U2 pin 12 DGND should be on the component side 6 The loop formed by XTALI Y1 and XTALO should be minimized and routed on one layer The loop formed by Y1 C40 and C41 should be minimized and routed on one layer 7 The digital ground plane is made as small as possible and the ground plane has rounded corners 8 Series resistors on clock signals are placed near source 9 Use a minimum of 15 mil wide traces in DAA section use a minimum of 20 mil wide trac
388. trol RTS CONTROL ENABLE assert RTS else dcb fRtsControl RTS CONTROL DISABLE dis assert RTS bSuccess SetCommState hCom amp dcb if bSuccess Handle the error printf SetCommState failed with error d n GetLastError exit 1 else return void AssertDTR bool bAssert BOOL bSuccess if bAssert dcb fDtrControl RTS CONTROL ENABLE assert RTS else dcb fDtrControl RTS CONTROL DISABLE dis assert RTS bSuccess SetCommState hCom amp dcb if bSuccess Handle the error printf SetCommState failed with error d n GetLastError exit 1 gt amp 268 Rev 1 3 lt SILICON LABS AN93 return void Delay long iMs clock t wait covert ms s to clock t by mutiplying by CLOCKS PER SEC 1000 clock t iMs CLOCKS PER SEC 1000 clock t goal wait goal wait clock while goal clock void LoadAndSendPatch void char caOutGoing 256 cpInputRd temp SendAndWaitFor AT amp T7Nr cpInputRd OKNrNn 300 Reset the modem printf Current s cpInputRd cpInputRd cpInputRd temp printf Loading patch s n fnamePatch if hpPatchFile fopen fnamePatch rb NULL fprintf stderr The Patch File is missing Nn exit 1 AssertRTS true cpInputRd SendAndWaitFor ATE1 r cpInputRd OK
389. trolled in the program are the RTS and DTR lines The hardware used was the Engineering Eval Board Rev 3 2 and a 24xx2G DC Rev 1 2 module containing a 24 2457 Rev C ISOmodem chip plus a 3018 DAA chip JP6 was strapped 1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14 JP5 was unstrapped Setup procedure 1 Host DTE Rate must be greater than 19200 2 Host DTE must be configured for 8N1 CTS only flow control 3 Load Patch rc p71 bcd8 txt AT GCl xxxxxxx AT amp D2 Enables escape pin U70 HES bit needs to be set also AT IFC 0 2 Flow control setup AT U87 050A V 80 Setup AT NO Wire Mode AT FCLASS 1 AT U7A 1 AT UAA 8004 AT ES 6 8 Synch access mode AT ESA 0 0 0 1 Synch access mode control 4 Make Sure RTS is negated voltage high 5 Make Sure DTR is asserted voltage low 6 Send ATDT Notes 1 Patch is Originate Only mx 2 RTS is used as DIRECTION of transfer Think push to talk paradigm Assert RTS PRIOR to transmission Negate RTS after frame has been sent The modem will guarantee that the carrier is turned off after all current frames have been completed Rev 1 3 261 SILICON LABS AN93 3 DTR is assumed to be connected to the ESC pin of the modem It has been programmed to HANG UP when DTR is negated 4 When the modem is in RECEIVE operation RTS negated it is not possible to communicate with the modem The only control is to hang up using DTR 5 The modem automatically takes care of figuring out i
390. uency in Hz 0x007A 2400 maximum valid ring frequency in Hz U4B 0x004B RGMN Ring cadence minimum ON time in seconds multiplied by 2400 0x0258 U4G 0x004G RGNX Ring cadence maximum total time in seconds multiplied by 2400 0x6720 U4D 0x004D MOD1 This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 Rev 1 3 93 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 46 U Register Descriptions Continued Register Address Name Description Default Hex Value U4E 0x004E PRDD Pre dial delay time ms units 0x0000 U4F 0x004F FHT Flash hook time ms units 0x01F4 U50 0x0050 LCDN Loop current debounce on time ms units 0x015E U51 0x0051 LCDF Loop current debounce off time ms units 0x00C8 U52 0x0052 XMTL Transmit level adjust 1 dB units 0x0000 U53 0x0053 MOD2 This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U62 0x0062 DAAC1 This is a bit mapped register 0x0804 U63 0x0063 DAAC3 This is a bit mapped register 0x0003 U65 0x0065 DAAC4 This is a bit mapped register 0 00 066 0x0066 DAAC5 This is a bit mapped register 0 40 067 0 0067 ITC1 This is a bit mapped register 0x0008 U68 0x0068 ITC2 This is a bit mapped register 0x0000 U6A 0x006A ITC4 This is a bit mapped register read only N A U6C 0x006C LVS This is a bit mapped register 0xXX00 U6E 0x006E CK1 This is a bit mapped register Ox1FAO0 U6F 0x006F PTME This is a bit mapped register 0x0001 070 0x0
391. urrent above 10 mA also increases signal headroom and prevents degradation of the signal level in low voltage countries 38 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 3 2 AC Termination The ISOmodem has four ac termination impedances when used with the Si3018 line side device selected by the ACT bits in Register U63 The four available settings for the Si3018 are listed in Table 31 If an ACT 3 0 setting other than the four listed in Table 31 is selected the ac termination is forced to 600 ACT 3 0 0000 Table 31 AC Termination Settings for the Si3018 Line Side Device ACT 3 0 AC Termination 0000 600 Q 0011 220 820 120 nF and 220 Q 820 Q 115 nF 0100 370 620 310 nF 1111 Global complex impedance 3 3 Ringer Impedance and Threshold The ring detector in many DAAs is ac coupled to the line with a large 1 uF 250 V decoupling capacitor The ring detector on the ISOmodem is resistively coupled to the line This produces a high ringer impedance to the line of approximately 20 MO This meets the majority of country PTT specifications including FCC and ETSI ES 203 021 Several countries including Poland South Africa and Slovenia require a maximum ringer impedance that can be met with an internally synthesized impedance by setting the RZ bit Register 67 bit 1 Some countries specify different ringer thresholds The RT bit Register 067 bit 0 selects between two different r
392. used to set AEC speaker reference gain U19C and the AEC microphone input signal gain U19D Here the modem has the AEC AES enabled AT VSP 1 with the calibrated UB1 and UB5 values which where obtained from the two previous sections Using the Si24xx VMB call the remote phone and establish a voice call Use the command sequence in Table 135 The AECREF U19E contains the energy information of both the AEC speaker reference signal SPKREF and the microphone signal MICREF The SPKREF bits represent the AEC speaker reference energy and MICREF bits represent the AEC microphone input energy The energy value is computed from 5 92 Reg Name Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 U19E AECREF SPKREF MICREF Send the white noise from the remote phone so that the energy level at the meter Tip and Ring is 15dBm Use the 19 command to read the contents of the U19E register Adjust the AEC gain U19C of the speaker reference signal until SPKREF reaches a value as close to 0x38 as possible Adjust the AEC gain U19D of the microphone input signal until MICREF has a value as close as possible to 0x38 U19C and U19D are calibrated when the AT R19E reading is close to 0x3838 with a power level difference of less than 2dB Record these values and use them in the
393. utobaud mode BO B1 and P1 is not detected automatically The combination of B2 and P3 is detected This is compatible with seven data bits no parity two stop bits Seven data bits no parity one stop bit may be forced by sending AT T17 B1 2 After changing the baud rate the result code OK is sent at the old DTE rate Subsequent commands must be sent at the new rate If the ISOmodem is configured in autobaud mode AT commands NT0 through T15 lock the new baud rate and disable autobaud To eliminate any possibility of a race condition between the receipt of the result code and the changing of the UART speed CTS is de asserted while the result code is being sent until after the rate has been successfully changed The host should send the command and wait for the OK response After OK has been received the host may send data at the new rate as soon as CTS is asserted The command should be the last command sent in a multi command line and may not be used on the same command line as U or R commands If it is not the OK from the T command is sent at the old DTE rate and other result codes are sent at the new DTE rate 3 The autobaud feature does not detect this rate 4 Default is T16 if autobaud is selected by reset strap option otherwise default is 179 19 2 kbps 82 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 42 Extended AT Command Set Continued Command Action T3 2400 bps 174 4800 bps
394. ve seconds SILICON LABS Rev 1 3 75 AN93 Table 39 Basic AT Command Set Continued Command Action VSM n Voice Compression Method 0 Signed PCM 1 Unsigned PCM 4 G 711 5 G711 A Law 129 2 bit 2 kB s storage 131 4 bit 4 kB s storage VSP Voice Speakerphone State lt mode gt Description 0 Speakerphone AEC AES and LEC disabled Handset FIR filter coefficients are selected 1 Speakerphone AEC AES and LEC enabled Speakerphone FIR filter coefficients are selected The VLS 13 command must be used in combination with this setting VTD n DTMF Tone Duration Timer This command sets the default DTMF tone generation duration in 10 ms units for the VTS command Default time is 1 second n 100 VTS lt freq DTMF and Tone Generation 15 lt freq2 gt This command can be used to produce DTMF tones single fre lt dur gt quency tones and double frequency tones Note that the bracket characters are required for correct operation lt freqi gt Frequency one which has a range of 0 200 3200 Hz lt freq2 gt Frequency two which has a range of 0 200 3200 Hz lt dur gt Duration of the tone s in 10 ms units VTX Transmit Voice Samples Used for sending digitized voice samples from host memory through the UART interface The VSM command determines the format of the samples Multiple routing options are available 76 Rev 1 3 SI
395. window Select Microphone as input and adjust balance and volume dvanced to open the Advanced Controls for Microphone screen Deselect the 1 Mic Boost radio button Mic Boost is essentially an mechanism that can spoil the audio recordings 276 Rev 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Volume Sounds Qu Voice Hardware Sound playback Default device SoundMAX Digital Audio Volume a lt I3 o 15 Sound recording A Default device 1 SoundMAX Digital Audio E Recording Control Options Help CD Player Microphone Line In Balance Balance Balance MIDI music playback MS ERE E 4 b 5 24 Advanced Controls for Microphone Volume Volume These settings can be used to make Tin agdjustments to your audio Tone Controls These settings control how the tone of your audio sounds Bass Select Select Treble Other Controls These settings make other changes to how your audio sounds See your hardware documentation for details Figure 55 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Rev 1 3 277 SILICON LABS AN93 Making the Recording with Windows Sound Recorder Windows XP NT or Windows 98 Use the following procedure 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Entertainment gt Sound Recorder to open Sound Recorder wi
396. window that the dial tone must be present for a valid detection See 5 7 5 034 035 Dial Tone Timing Register for more information Table 48 00 016 Dial Tone Registers Register Name Description Default 000 DT1A0 0x0800 U01 DT1B1 0 0000 002 DT1B2 Dial tone detection filters stage 1 biquad coefficients 0x0000 003 DT1A2 0 0000 004 DT1A1 0 0000 005 DT2A0 0x00A0 006 DT2B1 Ox6EF 1 007 DT2B2 detection filters stage 2 biquad coefficients OxC4F4 008 DT2A2 0 000 009 DT2A1 0 0000 DT3A0 0x00A0 UOB DT3B1 0 7880 UOC DT3B2 Dial tone detection filters stage biquad coefficients 0xC305 DT3A2 0 4000 UOE DT3A1 0 50 DT4A0 0x0400 U10 DT4B1 0x70D2 U11 DT4B2 Dial tone detection filters stage 4 biquad coefficients 0xC830 U12 DT4A2 0x4000 U13 DT4A1 0x80E2 U14 DTK Dial tone detection filter output scaler 0x0009 U15 DTON Dial tone detection ON threshold 0x00A0 U16 DTOF Dial tone detection OFF threshold 0x0070 Rev 1 3 97 SILICON LABS AN93 5 7 3 017 030 Busy Tone Detect Filter Registers U17 U2A set the biquad filter coefficients for stages 1 4 of the busy tone detection filter and U2B U2C and U2D set the busy tone detection output scalar on threshold and off threshold respectively see Table 49 The thresholds are empirically foun
397. wn in Table 103 If the server refuses to grant a modem on hold request the modem will use the PMHT setting to determine what to do If PMHT 0 the modem will remain connected to the server If PMHT is set to a non zero value the modems will disconnect The Si2494 93 will indicate these conditions with the result code MHnack Disconnecting or MHnack Reconnecting Once modem on hold has been initiated it may be necessary for the Si2494 93 to perform a hook flash to indicate to the central office the incoming call may be accepted This is initiated with the command The Si2494 93 will go on hook for the time set in user register U4F and remain off hook while on hold Usually a second hook flash is necessary to reestablish a data connection with the remote modem The Si2494 93 will attempt to reestablish a data connection with the remote modem upon receipt of the ATO command and will indicate the connection has been reestablished with the CONNECT message If the modems fail to renegotiate the connection the Si2494 93 will send the NO CARRIER message Table 103 Possible Responses to PMHR Command from Remote Modem Value Description Modem on hold request denied or not available The modem may initiate another modem on hold request at a later time MOH with 10 second timeout granted MOH with 20 second timeout granted MOH with 30 second timeout granted MOH with 40 second timeou
398. x0014 U9F 0x0003 Call Waiti UA0 0x000F Saudi Arabia 5 Toad mng 425 0 15 0 2 0 15 10 0 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x000F 8 U9F 0x0003 Sierra Leone Waiting Tone 425 1 0 UAO 0x0064 U9F 0x0003 Call Waitin 9 425 0 3 0 2 0 3 3 2 UA1 0x0014 UA2 0x001E UA3 0x0140 U9F 0x0003 Slovenia Waiting Tone 425 0 3 10 0 UA0 0x001E UA1 0x03E8 U9F 0x0001 Solomon Waiting Tone 400 450 400 0 5 0 5 0x0032 UA1 0x0032 Call Waiti U9F 0x0001 South Africa TR ing 400x33 0 4 4 0 UAO 0x0028 UA1 0x0190 U9F 0x0003 Call Waitin UAD 0 0012 Tore 9 425 0 175 0 175 0 175 3 5 UA1 0x0012 UA2 0x0012 UA3 0x015E U9F 0x0003 Sri Lanka 425 0 5 2 5 UAO 0x0032 UA1 1 3 SILICON LABS AN93 Table 101 SAS Cadence for Supported Countries Continued Country Tone Frequency Hz Cadence seconds U Registers U9F 0x0003 Call Waiting UAO 0x0014 Sweden Tone 425 0 2 0 5 0 2 UA1 0x0032 UA2 0x0014 Call Waiti U9F 0x0007 Tajikistan Tone 950 1400 1800 08 32 UA0 0x0050 UA1 0x0140 bi U9F 0x0000 1 us Waiting Tone 440 0 3 10 0 0x001E 9 UA1 0x03E8 U9F 0x0005 Call Waiti UAO 0x0014 Turkey 5 ng 450 0 2 0 6 0 2 8 0 UA1 0x003C UA2 0x0014 UA3 0x0320 U9F 0x0000 Turks and Caicos T
399. y reversals from being detected as a loss of loop current a debounce timer controlled by U registers 50 and 51 is used However if the HOI bit is set a parallel phone intrusion while off hook will give a LINE IN USE result code to indicate that the ISOmodem has gone on hook due to a parallel phone intrusion 6 6 2 Off Hook Condition When the ISOmodem is off hook the U79 4 0 LVCS value represents loop current Additionally the ISOmodem is typically in the data mode and it is difficult for the host to monitor the LVCS value For this reason a controller based off hook intrusion algorithm is used There is a delay between the ISOmodem going off hook and the start of the intrusion algorithm set by U77 15 12 IST Intrusion Settling Time This avoids false intrusion detections due to loop transients during the on hook to off hook transition The off hook intrusion algorithm monitors the value of LVCS at a sample rate determined by U76 15 9 OHSR The algorithm compares each LVCS sample to the reference value in U76 4 0 ACL ACL 0 at the first off hook event after reset unless a value is written to it by the host If ACL 0 the ISOmodem does not begin the intrusion algorithm until after two LVCS samples have been received If the host writes a non zero value to ACL prior to the ISOmodem going off hook a parallel phone intrusion occurring during the IST interval and maintained until the end of the IST interval triggers a PPD interrupt
400. ynchronizes to the HDLC flag stream It then extracts the frame between the HDLC Flags and performs zero bit deletion on the payload The receiver also calculates the CRC and matches with the 16 bit FCS of the frame Then the EM transparency is added and finally the lt EM gt lt flag gt is sent as an indication that the calculated CRC of the frame matches the FCS Rev 1 3 259 SILICON LABS AN93 Isomodem with V 80 UART HDLC lt PLL XTAL Data FLAG Clock Ek Insertion Data Bloc V 80 V 80 Transp T L Transparency 2670 84 ransparency Transmit gt MODEM Decode Stuffing 2 Path CTS UART gt nsert V EM lt FLAG gt Frame Check between blocks Sequence Generate DCE gt V 80 Handler HDLC RX Bit Clock vao Recovery FLAG Transparency Belsction Decode Receive RXD MODEM V 80 Demodulate lt EM lt FLAGs if good lt UART Transparency Bit RX frame EM lt ERR gt Encode eletion x if bad RX frame n a Fk Add EM lt FLAG gt Data or EM ERR Check Block Figure 51 ISOmodem V 80 Protocol HDLC Framing in Framed Sub Mode The ISOmodem in EPOS Applications m The Rev D Si2493 57 34 15 04 and Rev A Si2494 39 include all Rev B and C patches m AT U87 10 must be set when using Rev

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Administrator Manual - Support  Pure Audio  SERVICE MANUAL EMC Isolation Valve  DeLOCK 20542  (UHU-255) - tonlichtverleih.de  L`ergonomie au bureau :  MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  ユーザーズマニュアル  Mode d`emploi  1 Functional Description - Alcatel  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file